2009 Buick Enclave Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Storage Areas ...... 2-49 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-33 System ...... 1-1 Sunroof ...... 2-54 Windshield Head Restraints ...... 1-2 Replacement ...... 5-36 Front Seats ...... 1-3 Instrument Panel ...... 3-1 Windshield Wiper Blade Instrument Panel Rear Seats ...... 1-8 Replacement ...... 5-36 Overview ...... 3-4 Safety Belts ...... 1-12 Tires ...... 5-37 Climate Controls ...... 3-20 Child Restraints Appearance Care ...... 5-80 ...... 1-25 Warning Lights, Gages, Vehicle Identiﬁcation Airbag System ...... 1-45 and Indicators ...... 3-28 ...... 5-87 Restraint System Driver Information Electrical System ...... 5-87 Check ...... 1-59 Center (DIC) ...... 3-42 Capacities and Speciﬁcations ...... 5-94 Features and Controls ...... 2-1 Audio System(s) ...... 3-68 ...... 6-1 Keys ...... 2-2 Driving Your Vehicle ...... 4-1 Maintenance Schedule Doors and Locks ...... 2-8 Your Driving, the Road, Maintenance Schedule ..... 6-1 Windows ...... 2-14 and the Vehicle ...... 4-1 Customer Assistance Theft-Deterrent Towing ...... 4-20 Information ...... 7-1 Systems ...... 2-16 Customer Assistance Starting and Operating Service and Appearance and Information ...... 5-1 ...... 7-1 Your Vehicle ...... 2-20 Care Reporting Safety Service ...... 5-3 Mirrors ...... 2-31 Defects ...... 7-12 Fuel Object Detection ...... 5-5 Vehicle Data Recording Systems ...... 2-34 Checking Things Under and Privacy ...... 7-14 OnStar® System ...... 2-41 the Hood ...... 5-9 Universal Home Remote All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-33 Index ...... i-1 System ...... 2-44 Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-33 ii Preface

This manual describes features that Propriétaires Canadiens may or may not be on your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de speciﬁc vehicle. ce guide en français auprès de Read this manual from beginning to concessionnaire ou à l’adresse end to learn about the vehicle’s suivante: GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM features and controls. Pictures, Helm, Incorporated Emblem, BUICK, the BUICK symbols, and words work together P.O. Box 07130 Emblem are registered trademarks; to explain vehicle operation. Detroit, MI 48207 and the name ENCLAVE is a Keep this manual in the vehicle for 1-800-551-4123 trademark of General Motors quick reference. www.helminc.com Corporation. This manual includes the latest Canadian Owners Index information at the time it was A French language copy of this To quickly locate information about printed. GM reserves the right to manual can be obtained from your the vehicle, use the index in the back make changes after that time dealer/retailer or from: of the manual. It is an alphabetical without further notice. For vehicles Helm, Incorporated list of what is in the manual and the ﬁrst sold in Canada, substitute page number where it can be found. the name “General Motors of P.O. Box 07130 Canada Limited” for Buick Motor Detroit, MI 48207 Division wherever it appears in this 1-800-551-4123 manual. www.helminc.com

Safety Warnings and Vehicle Symbols { CAUTION Symbols The vehicle has components and These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead that could hurt you or other of text. Symbols are shown along people. with the text describing the operation or information relating to a speciﬁc component, control, message, Cautions tell what the hazard is and gage, or indicator. what to do to avoid or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions. A circle with a slash through it is a M : This symbol is shown when safety symbol which means “Do A notice tells about something that you need to see your owner manual Not,” “Do not do this” or “Do not let can damage the vehicle. for additional instructions or this happen.” information. Notice: These mean there is A box with the word CAUTION is something that could damage * : This symbol is shown when used to tell about things that your vehicle. you need to see a service manual could hurt you or others if you were Many times, this damage would not for additional instructions or to ignore the warning. be covered by the vehicle’s information. warranty, and it could be costly. The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage. There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words, CAUTION or Notice. iv Preface

Vehicle Symbol Chart B : Engine Coolant Temperature } : Power Here are some additional symbols / that may be found on the vehicle O : Exterior Lamps : Remote Vehicle Start and what they mean. For more # > information on the symbol, refer to : Fog Lamps : Safety Belt Reminders the index. . : Fuel Gage 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor 9 : Airbag Readiness Light + : Fuses _ : Tow/Haul Mode # : Air Conditioning i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam F : Traction Control ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) Changer M : Windshield Washer Fluid j g : Audio Steering Wheel : LATCH System Child Restraints Controls or OnStar® * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp $ : Brake System Warning Light : : Oil Pressure " : Charging System g : Outside Power Foldaway I : Cruise Control Mirrors Seats and Restraint System 1-1

Safety Belts Airbag System Seats and Safety Belts: They Are Airbag System ...... 1-45 for Everyone ...... 1-12 Where Are the Airbags? ...... 1-47 Restraint System How to Wear Safety When Should an Airbag Belts Properly ...... 1-16 Inflate? ...... 1-49 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-20 What Makes an Airbag Safety Belt Use During Inflate? ...... 1-50 Head Restraints Pregnancy ...... 1-25 How Does an Airbag Head Restraints ...... 1-2 Safety Belt Extender ...... 1-25 Restrain? ...... 1-51 What Will You See After Front Seats Child Restraints an Airbag Inflates? ...... 1-51 Power Seats ...... 1-3 Older Children ...... 1-25 Passenger Sensing System ....1-53 Manual Lumbar ...... 1-3 Infants and Young Children ....1-28 Servicing Your Power Lumbar ...... 1-4 Child Restraint Systems ...... 1-31 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .....1-57 Heated Seats ...... 1-4 Where to Put the Restraint .....1-32 Adding Equipment to Your Heated and Cooled Seats ...... 1-4 Lower Anchors and Tethers Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .....1-58 Memory Seat and Mirrors ...... 1-5 for Children (LATCH) ...... 1-34 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-6 Securing a Child Restraint Restraint System Check in a Rear Seat Position ...... 1-40 Checking the Restraint Rear Seats Securing a Child Restraint Systems ...... 1-59 Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-8 in the Right Front Seat Replacing Restraint System Third Row Seats ...... 1-10 Position ...... 1-42 Parts After a Crash ...... 1-60 1-2 Seats and Restraint System

Head Restraints The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints in all outboard seating positions.

{ CAUTION

With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive Adjust the head restraint so that the Pull the head restraint up to raise it. until the head restraints for all top of the restraint is at the same To lower the head restraint, press the occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant’s release button, located on the head adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the restraint post on the top of the chance of a neck injury in a crash. seatback, while you push the head restraint down. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. Seats and Restraint System 1-3

Front Seats If the vehicle has power seats, Manual Lumbar the controls are located on Power Seats the outboard side of the seats. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the power seat adjustment control (A) forward or rearward. The vehicle may have additional features to adjust the power seat: • Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the power seat adjustment control (A) up or down. • Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front If the vehicle has this feature, the of the control up or down. handle is located on the inboard side Driver Seat with Power Seat of the seatback. Control, Power Recline, and • Raise or lower the rear part of the Power Lumbar shown seat cushion by moving the rear Turn the handle rearward to of the control up or down. decrease lumbar support. Turn A. Power Seat Adjustment Control the handle forward to increase The vehicle may have a memory lumbar support. B. Reclining Seatbacks on function which allows seat settings page 1-6. to be saved and recalled. See The lumbar support may need to C. Power Lumbar on page 1-4. Memory Seat and Mirrors on be adjusted when changing page 1-5 for more information. the seating position. 1-4 Seats and Restraint System

Power Lumbar Heated Seats If the vehicle has remote vehicle start and is started using the remote If the seats have power lumbar, On vehicles with heated front seats, keyless entry transmitter, the front the controls used to operate this the controls are located on the center heated seats will be turned on to feature are located on the outboard console. To operate the heated seats the high setting if it is cold outside. side of the seats. See “Power the engine must be running. See “Remote Vehicle Start” Lumbar” under Power Seats on under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) I (Heated Seatback): Press to page 1-3 for more information. System Operation on page 2-4. turn on the heated seatback. To increase or decrease lumbar When the ignition is turned on, the support, press and hold the front or J (Heated Seat and Seatback): heated seat feature will turn off. To turn the heated seat feature back rear of the control (C). Press to turn on or off the heated on, press the desired button. Release the control when the seat and seatback. seatback reaches the desired level The light on the button will come on Heated and Cooled Seats of lumbar support. to indicate that the feature is on. If the front seats have the heated and Each time the button is pressed, The lumbar support may need to cooled seat feature, the buttons used the temperature settings change be adjusted when changing to control this feature are located on from high, to medium, to low, to off. the seating position. the front doors near the door handle. Indicator lights above the button will show the level of heat selected: H (Cooled Seat): To cool the entire three for high, two for medium, and seat, press the button with the one for low. cooled seat symbol. The passenger seat may take This symbol will appear on the longer to heat up. climate control display to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high, Seats and Restraint System 1-5 medium, and low and to turn the Memory Seat and Mirrors A second seating and mirror cooled seat off. Indicator bars next to position can be programmed by the symbol designate the level of On vehicles with the memory repeating the above steps and cooling selected: three for high, package, the controls are located pressing button 2. two for medium, and one for low. on the driver door. To recall the memory positions, 1: Saves the seating position for z (Heated Seat and Seatback): the vehicle must be in P (Park). driver 1. To heat the entire seat, press the Press and release either button 1 button with the heated seat and 2: Saves the seating position for or 2. The seat, outside mirrors, and seatback symbol. driver 2. power steering column will move to the position previously stored. This symbol will appear on the S : Recalls the easy exit position. You will hear a single beep. climate control display to indicate If the RKE transmitter is used to that the feature is on. Press the To save a position in memory: enter the vehicle and the remote button to cycle through the 1. Adjust the driver seat, including recall memory feature has been temperature settings of high, the seatback recliner, both turned on, automatic seat and mirror medium, and low and to turn the outside mirrors, and the power movement will occur. See “MEMORY heated seat off. Indicator bars next steering column to a comfortable SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle to the symbol designate the level position. Customization on page 3-59 for more of heat selected: three for high, See Outside Power Mirrors on information. two for medium, and one for low. page 2-32 for more information. To stop recall movement of the The heated and cooled seats will Not all vehicles will have the memory feature at any time, press be canceled after the ignition is ability to save and recall one of the power seat controls, turned off. To use the heated and the mirror positions. memory buttons, or power mirror cooled seat feature after the vehicle buttons. is started, you will need to press the 2. Press and hold button 1 until appropriate seat button again. two beeps sound to let you know that the position has been stored. 1-6 Seats and Restraint System

If something has blocked the Reclining Seatbacks driver seat while recalling a memory position, the driver seat recall may Manual Reclining Seatbacks stop working. If this happens, remove the obstruction and press { CAUTION the appropriate control for the area that is not recalling for two seconds. You can lose control of the Try pressing the memory button vehicle if you try to adjust a again. If the memory position is still manual driver’s seat while the not being recalled, see your dealer/ vehicle is moving. The sudden retailer for service. movement could startle and Easy Exit Seat confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. On vehicles with seats that have S : With the vehicle in P (Park), Adjust the driver’s seat only when manual reclining seatbacks, the lever press the exit button. You will hear the vehicle is not moving. used to operate them is located on a single beep. The driver seat the outboard side of the seat. will move back into the exit position. To recline the seatback: If the easy exit seat feature has { CAUTION been turned on in the Driver 1. Lift the recline lever. If either seatback is not locked, it Information Center (DIC), automatic 2. Move the seatback to the desired could move forward in a sudden seat movement will occur when position, then release the lever to the key is removed from the ignition. stop or crash. That could cause lock the seatback in place. injury to the person sitting there. For programming information, see Always push and pull on the 3. Push and pull on the seatback to DIC Vehicle Customization on seatbacks to be sure they are make sure it is locked. page 3-59 for more information. locked. Seats and Restraint System 1-7

To return the seatback to an upright position: { CAUTION

1. Lift the lever without applying Sitting in a reclined position when pressure to the seatback and the vehicle is in motion can be the seatback will return to dangerous. Even when buckled the upright position. up, the safety belts cannot do 2. Push and pull on the seatback to their job when reclined like this. make sure it is locked. The shoulder belt cannot do its Power Reclining Seatbacks job because it will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in On vehicles with seats that front of you. In a crash, you could have power reclining seatbacks, the control used to recline them is go into it, receiving neck or other Do not have a seatback reclined if located on the outboard side of the injuries. the vehicle is moving. seat behind the power seat control. The lap belt cannot do its job See “Reclining Seatbacks” under either. In a crash, the belt could Power Seats on page 1-3 for more go up over your abdomen. The information. belt forces would be there, not at • To recline the seatback, tilt the top your pelvic bones. This could of the control (B) rearward. cause serious internal injuries. • To bring the seatback forward, tilt For proper protection when the the top of the control forward. vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly. 1-8 Seats and Restraint System

Rear Seats Entering and Exiting the Third Row Rear Seat Operation { CAUTION

Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. To access the third row: 1. Remove objects on the ﬂoor in Notice: Folding a rear seat with front of or on the second row seat, the safety belts still fastened may or in the seat tracks on the ﬂoor. A. Seat Adjustment Handle cause damage to the seat or the B. Reclining Seatback Strap safety belts. Always unbuckle the 2. Move the front center console armrest completely forward. C. Sliding Seat Lever safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position See Center Console Storage on before folding a rear seat. page 2-49. 3. Place folding armrests in the upright position. Seats and Restraint System 1-9

4. Ensure that the safety belt is 5. Push and pull on the seatback 3. Pull forward on the reclining unfastened and in the stowed and seat cushion to make sure seatback strap (B) and push position. they are locked in place. down on the seatback. 5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C) 6. Check that the safety belt is not If the headrest touches the front forward and move the seatback under the seat cushion. seat, slide the second row forward. The seat cushion seat rearward. Reclining the Seatbacks will fold, and the entire seat will To return the seatback to the slide forward. To recline the seatback: seating position, lift the upper Returning the Seat to the 1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull corner of the seatback and push it Seating Position the reclining seatback strap (B). rearward until it locks into place. Push and pull on the seatback To return the second row seat to its 2. Move the seatback to the desired to make sure it is locked. normal seating position: position, then release the strap to lock the seatback in place. 1. Remove objects on the ﬂoor Adjusting the Seats behind the second row seat 3. Push and pull on the seatback to To adjust the second row seats, or in the seat tracks on the ﬂoor. make sure it is locked. pull outward on the seat adjustment handle (A). Slide the seat forward 2. Pull the seatback rearward until it Folding the Rear Seat is locked in place. or rearward to the desired position. To fold the second row seats: Release the handle and push 3. Slide the seat rearward by 1. Remove anything on or under and pull on the seat to make sure it pushing on the seatback until it is is locked. locked into place. the seat. 4. Push down on the rear of the 2. Place the armrest in the upright seat cushion until it is locked position, and unfasten the in place. safety belt. 1-10 Seats and Restraint System

Third Row Seats To fold the seatback: 1. Remove anything on or under { CAUTION the seat.

Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or pushed forward in the entry position, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. 3. Pull up on the release lever located on the back of the The third row seats can be folded seat. The headrest moves forward or removed. forward automatically. 2. Disconnect the rear safety belt 4. Push the seatback forward to Notice: Folding a rear seat with mini-latch, using a key in the lay ﬂat. the safety belts still fastened may slot on the mini-buckle, let cause damage to the seat or the the belt retract into the headliner. safety belts. Always unbuckle the Stow the mini-latch in the safety belts and return them to holder located in the headliner. their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. Seats and Restraint System 1-11

To return the seatback to the Removing the Third Row seating position: { CAUTION Seats 1. Raise the seatback into place by A safety belt that is improperly 1. Remove the cargo management using the pullstrap from the rear routed, not properly attached, system, if it is in the vehicle. of the vehicle, or by pushing it into or twisted will not provide the See Cargo Management System place from inside the vehicle. protection needed in a crash. on page 2-52. 2. The headrest must be locked into The person wearing the belt could 2. Remove anything on or under place before sitting in the seat. be seriously injured. After raising the seat. the rear seatback, always check Notice: Folding a rear seat with { CAUTION to be sure that the safety belts the safety belts still fastened may are properly routed and attached, cause damage to the seat or the If either seatback is not locked, it and are not twisted. safety belts. Always unbuckle the could move forward in a sudden safety belts and return them to stop or crash. That could cause 4. Reconnect the center safety belt their normal stowed position injury to the person sitting there. mini-latch to the mini-buckle. before folding a rear seat. Always push and pull on the Do not let it twist. 3. Fold the seatback down. seatbacks to be sure they are 5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure See “Folding the Seatback” locked. the mini-latch is secure. earlier in this section. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to 4. Remove the rear bolts located on make sure it is locked in place. the ﬂoor on each side of the seat. 1-12 Seats and Restraint System

5. Remove the seat by tilting it 2. Place the seat on the vehicle Safety Belts slightly upward, and then floor so that the front seat pulling it out of the rear of the hooks are on the vehicle bars. vehicle in one motion. Safety Belts: They Are 3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to for Everyone 6. Replace the bolts in the floor 55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the holes for storage. seat to make sure it is locked This section of the manual describes in place. how to use safety belts properly. Installing the Third Row Seats It also describes some things not to 4. Raise the seatback to its upright do with safety belts. 1. Before installing the seat the position. Push and pull on the seatback must be folded seatback to make sure it is forward. See “Folding the locked into place. { CAUTION Seatback” earlier in this section. 5. Push the headrest up into Do not let anyone ride where a The seats must be placed in position. Push and pull on safety belt cannot be worn the proper locations to attach the headrest to make sure it is correctly. The wider seat must locked into place. properly. In a crash, if you or your be installed on the driver side passenger(s) are not wearing and the narrower seat on the 6. Reconnect the center safety belt safety belts, the injuries can be passenger side. Remove the mini-latch to the mini-buckle. much worse. You can hit things bolts from the holes in the floor Do not let it twist. inside the vehicle harder or be before installing the seats. ejected from the vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. Seats and Restraint System 1-13

In most states and in all Canadian Why Safety Belts Work { CAUTION provinces, the law requires When you ride in or on anything, wearing safety belts. Here is why: It is extremely dangerous to ride you go as fast as it goes. in a cargo area, inside or outside You never know if you will be of a vehicle. In a collision, people in a crash. If you do have a crash, riding in these areas are more you do not know if it will be a serious one. likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some in any area of your vehicle that crashes can be so serious that even is not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not safety belts. Be sure everyone in survive. But most crashes are your vehicle is in a seat and using in between. In many of them, people a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without safety belts they could have been This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed. reminder to buckle the safety belts. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose See Safety Belt Reminders on After more than 40 years of safety it is just a seat on wheels. page 3-30 for additional information. belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter... a lot! 1-14 Seats and Restraint System

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... Seats and Restraint System 1-15

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And you can unbuckle a safety or the instrument panel... or the safety belts! belt, even if you are upside down. With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time Q: If my vehicle has airbags, to stop. You stop over more distance, why should I have to wear and your strongest bones take the safety belts? forces. That is why safety belts make A: Airbags are supplemental such good sense. systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions. 1-16 Seats and Restraint System

Q: If I am a good driver, and I How to Wear Safety Belts Occupants who are not buckled up never drive far from home, why Properly can be thrown out of the vehicle should I wear safety belts? in a crash. And they can strike This section is only for people of others in the vehicle who are A: You may be an excellent driver, adult size. wearing safety belts. but if you are in a crash — even one that is not your fault — you Be aware that there are special First, before you or your and your passenger(s) can be things to know about safety belts passenger(s) wear a safety belt, hurt. Being a good driver does not and children. And there are different there is important information protect you from things beyond rules for smaller children and infants. you should know. your control, such as bad drivers. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-25 or Most accidents occur within Infants and Young Children on 25 miles (40 km) of home. page 1-28. Follow those rules for And the greatest number of everyone’s protection. serious injuries and deaths It is very important for all occupants occur at speeds of less than to buckle up. Statistics show that 40 mph (65 km/h). unbelted people are hurt more often Safety belts are for everyone. in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the ﬂoor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Seats and Restraint System 1-17

In a crash, this applies force to the Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash. A: The lap belt is too loose. It will A: The shoulder belt is too loose. not give nearly as much It will not give as much protection this way. protection this way. { CAUTION { CAUTION You can be seriously hurt if your You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose. In a crash, shoulder belt is too loose. In a you could slide under the lap belt crash, you would move forward and apply force on your abdomen. too much, which could increase This could cause serious or even injury. The shoulder belt should fatal injuries. The lap belt should ﬁt snugly against your body. be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. 1-18 Seats and Restraint System

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong A: The belt is over an armrest. A: The shoulder belt is worn under buckle. the arm. It should be worn over { CAUTION the shoulder at all times. { CAUTION You can be seriously injured if your { CAUTION You can be seriously injured if belt goes over an armrest like this. your belt is buckled in the wrong The belt would be much too high. You can be seriously injured if you place like this. In a crash, the belt In a crash, you can slide under the wear the shoulder belt under your would go up over your abdomen. belt. The belt force would then be arm. In a crash, your body would The belt forces would be there, applied on the abdomen, not on move too far forward, which would not on the pelvic bones. This the pelvic bones, and that could increase the chance of head and could cause serious internal cause serious or fatal injuries. neck injury. Also, the belt would injuries. Always buckle your belt Be sure the belt goes under the into the buckle nearest you. armrests. (Continued) Seats and Restraint System 1-19

Q: What is wrong with this? CAUTION (Continued) { CAUTION

apply too much force to the ribs, You can be seriously injured by not which are not as strong as wearing the lap-shoulder belt shoulder bones. You could also properly. In a crash, you would not severely injure internal organs like be restrained by the shoulder belt. your liver or spleen. The shoulder Your body could move too far belt should go over the shoulder forward increasing the chance of and across the chest. head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. Q: What is wrong with this? The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across go over the shoulder and across the body. the chest. { CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your A: The belt is behind the body. dealer/retailer to ﬁx it. 1-20 Seats and Restraint System

Lap-Shoulder Belt If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all All seating positions in the vehicle the way, the child restraint have a lap-shoulder belt. locking feature may be engaged. If you are using a rear seating If this happens, let the belt go position with a detachable safety belt back all the way and start again. and the safety belt is not attached, see Third Row Seats on page 1-10 for instruction on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly. 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is the belt across you. Do not let adjustable, so you can sit up it get twisted. straight. To see how, see “Seats” The lap-shoulder belt may lock in the Index. if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to 3. Push the latch plate into the unlock it. Then pull the belt buckle until it clicks. across you more slowly. Seats and Restraint System 1-21

4. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-25. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 5. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this section 6. To make the lap part tight, pull To unlatch the belt, push the button for instructions on use and up on the shoulder belt. on the buckle. The belt should return important safety information. It may be necessary to pull the to its stowed position. Slide the latch stitching on the safety belt plate up the safety belt webbing through the latch plate to fully when the safety belt is not in use. tighten the lap belt on smaller The latch plate should rest on the occupants. stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop on the side wall. Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle. 1-22 Seats and Restraint System

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster You can move the height adjuster Pretensioners work only once. If the The vehicle has a shoulder belt up by pushing up on the shoulder pretensioners activate in a crash, height adjuster for the driver and belt guide. they will need to be replaced, and probably other new parts for right front passenger seating After the adjuster is set to the desired the vehicle’s safety belt system. positions. position, try to move it down without See Replacing Restraint System Adjust the height so that the shoulder pushing the button to make sure it Parts After a Crash on page 1-60. portion of the belt is centered on the has locked into position. shoulder. The belt should be away Rear Safety Belt Comfort Safety Belt Pretensioners from the face and neck, but not Guides falling off of the shoulder. Improper This vehicle has safety belt Rear shoulder belt comfort guides shoulder belt height adjustment pretensioners for the front outboard may provide added safety belt could reduce the effectiveness of occupants. Although the safety comfort for older children who have the safety belt in a crash. belt pretensioners cannot be seen, outgrown booster seats and for they are part of the safety belt some adults. When installed on a assembly. They can help tighten shoulder belt, the comfort guide the safety belts during the early positions the shoulder belt away stages of a moderate to severe from the neck and head. frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for There is a guide for each outboard pretensioner activation are met. passenger position in the second row And, for vehicles with side impact seat and all passenger positions in airbags, safety belt pretensioners the third row. can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event.

To move it down, push down on the button (A) and move the height adjuster to the desired position. Seats and Restraint System 1-23

Here is how to install a comfort guide by pulling on the handle behind to the safety belt: the seatback. The comfort guide will now be accessible.

2. Place the guide over the belt and Outboard Positions insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 1. For the outboard positions, remove the guide from its storage Third Row Center Position clip on the interior body. Pull the comfort guide out of its For the third row center position, storage location and then return locate the comfort guide which the headrest to its upright is located in a storage pocket, position. at the top of the seat, under The elastic cord on the comfort the headrest on the driver’s side guide is adjustable. You can of the vehicle. To access the make it longer or shorter by comfort guide, you will ﬁrst need squeezing both ends of the to move the headrest forward plastic adjuster. 1-24 Seats and Restraint System

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release twisted and it lies ﬂat. The elastic the safety belt as described cord must be under the belt previously in this section. Make and the guide on top. sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage location or on its storage clip. Seats and Restraint System 1-25

Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus Child Restraints is to protect the mother. When Pregnancy a safety belt is worn properly, it is Safety belts work for everyone, more likely that the fetus will not Older Children including pregnant women. Like be hurt in a crash. For pregnant all occupants, they are more likely women, as for anyone, the key to to be seriously injured if they do making safety belts effective is not wear safety belts. wearing them properly. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be Older children who have outgrown long enough for you. To help avoid booster seats should wear the personal injury, do not let someone vehicle’s safety belts. else use it, and use it only for the A pregnant woman should wear a seat it is made to ﬁt. The extender lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion has been designed for adults. Never should be worn as low as possible, use it for securing child seats. below the rounding, throughout To wear it, attach it to the regular the pregnancy. safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender. 1-26 Seats and Restraint System

The manufacturer’s instructions that • Does the lap belt fit low and snug Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort come with the booster seat, state on the hips, touching the thighs? Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt the weight and height limitations for If yes, continue. If no, return to the on page 1-20. that booster. Use a booster seat booster seat. According to accident statistics, with a lap-shoulder belt until • Can proper safety belt fit be children and infants are safer when the child passes the below fit test: maintained for the length of the properly restrained in a child • Sit all the way back on the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return restraint system or infant restraint seat. Do the knees bend at the to the booster seat. system secured in a rear seating seat edge? If yes, continue. position. If no, return to the booster seat. Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? In a crash, children who are not • Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. buckled up can strike other people Does the shoulder belt rest on the A: An older child should wear a who are buckled up, or can be shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, lap-shoulder belt and get the thrown out of the vehicle. Older try using the rear safety belt additional restraint a shoulder children need to use safety comfort guide. See “Rear Safety belt can provide. The shoulder belts properly. Belt Comfort Guides” under belt should not cross the face Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-20 or neck. The lap belt should for more information. If the fit snugly below the hips, shoulder belt still does not rest just touching the top of the on the shoulder, then return to thighs. This applies belt force the booster seat. to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Seats and Restraint System 1-27

{ CAUTION { CAUTION

Never do this. Never do this. Never allow two children to wear Never allow a child to wear the the same safety belt. The safety safety belt with the shoulder belt belt can not properly spread the behind their back. A child can be impact forces. In a crash, the seriously injured by not wearing two children can be crushed the lap-shoulder belt properly. together and seriously injured. In a crash, the child would not be A safety belt must be used by restrained by the shoulder belt. only one person at a time. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 1-28 Seats and Restraint System

Infants and Young Children who are not restrained { CAUTION properly can strike other people, or Children can be thrown out of the vehicle. Everyone in a vehicle needs Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is protection! This includes infants { CAUTION and all other children. Neither the wrapped around their neck and the distance traveled nor the age safety belt continues to tighten. Never do this. Never leave children unattended in and size of the traveler changes the Never hold an infant or a child need, for everyone, to use safety a vehicle and never allow children while riding in a vehicle. Due to restraints. In fact, the law in to play with the safety belts. crash forces, an infant or a child every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says will become so heavy it is not Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer possible to hold it during a crash. children up to some age must protection for adults and older be restrained while in a vehicle. For example, in a crash at only children, but not for young children 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) and infants. Neither the vehicle’s infant will suddenly become a safety belt system nor its airbag 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s system is designed for them. Every arms. An infant should be secured time infants and young children in an appropriate restraint. ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. Seats and Restraint System 1-29

{ CAUTION

Never do this. Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inﬂates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. 1-30 Seats and Restraint System

Q: What are the different types of In addition, there are many kinds add-on child restraints? of restraints available for { CAUTION children with special needs. A: Add-on child restraints, which A young child’s hip bones are still are purchased by the vehicle’s so small that the vehicle’s regular owner, are available in four basic { CAUTION safety belt may not remain low types. Selection of a particular on the hip bones, as it should. restraint should take into To reduce the risk of neck and Instead, it may settle up around consideration not only the child’s head injury during a crash, infants the child’s abdomen. In a crash, weight, height, and age but also need complete support. This is the belt would apply force on a whether or not the restraint will be because an infant’s neck is not body area that is unprotected by compatible with the motor vehicle fully developed and its head any bony structure. This alone in which it will be used. weighs so much compared with could cause serious or fatal the rest of its body. In a crash, injuries. To reduce the risk of For most basic types of child an infant in a rear-facing child restraints, there are many serious or fatal injuries during a restraint settles into the restraint, crash, young children should different models available. so the crash forces can be When purchasing a child always be secured in appropriate distributed across the strongest child restraints. restraint, be sure it is designed part of an infant’s body, the back to be used in a motor vehicle. If it and shoulders. Infants should is, the restraint will have a label always be secured in rear-facing saying that it meets federal motor child restraints. vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. Seats and Restraint System 1-31

Child Restraint Systems

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats (A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child provides restraint for the child’s body restraint designed to improve the ﬁt A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides with the harness. of the vehicle’s safety belt system. restraint with the seating surface A booster seat can also help a child against the back of the infant. to see out the window. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. 1-32 Seats and Restraint System

Securing an Add-On Child A child can be endangered in a crash Securing the Child Within the Restraint in the Vehicle if the child restraint is not properly Child Restraint secured in the vehicle. { CAUTION When securing an add-on child { CAUTION restraint, refer to the instructions that A child can be seriously injured or come with the restraint which may A child can be seriously injured killed in a crash if the child restraint be on the restraint itself or in a or killed in a crash if the child is is not properly secured in the booklet, or both, and to this manual. not properly secured in the child vehicle. Secure the child restraint The child restraint instructions are restraint. Secure the child properly properly in the vehicle using the important, so if they are not following the instructions that vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH available, obtain a replacement came with that child restraint. system, following the instructions copy from the manufacturer. that came with that child restraint Keep in mind that an unsecured and the instructions in this manual. child restraint can move around Where to Put the in a collision or sudden stop Restraint To help reduce the chance of injury, and injure people in the vehicle. According to accident statistics, the child restraint must be secured in Be sure to properly secure any child children and infants are safer when the vehicle. Child restraint systems restraint in the vehicle — even properly restrained in a child restraint must be secured in vehicle seats by when no child is in it. system or infant restraint system lap belts or the lap belt portion of a secured in a rear seating position. lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-34 for more information. Seats and Restraint System 1-33

We recommend that children and When securing a child restraint in a child restraints be secured in a rear CAUTION (Continued) rear seating position, study the seat, including: an infant or a child instructions that came with the riding in a rear-facing child restraint; be seriously injured or killed if child restraint to make sure a child riding in a forward-facing child the right front passenger airbag it is compatible with this vehicle. seat; an older child riding in a booster inflates and the passenger seat is Wherever a child restraint is seat; and children, who are large in a forward position. installed, be sure to secure the enough, using safety belts. Even if the passenger sensing child restraint properly. A label on the sun visor says, “Never system has turned off the right Keep in mind that an unsecured put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger frontal airbag, no child restraint can move around front.” This is because the risk to the system is fail-safe. No one can in a collision or sudden stop rear-facing child is so great, if the guarantee that an airbag will not and injure people in the vehicle. airbag deploys. deploy under some unusual Be sure to properly secure any child circumstance, even though it is restraint in the vehicle — even { CAUTION turned off. when no child is in it. Secure rear-facing child restraints A child in a rear-facing child in a rear seat, even if the airbag is restraint can be seriously injured or off. If you secure a forward-facing killed if the right front passenger child restraint in the right front seat, airbag inflates. This is because always move the front passenger the back of the rear-facing child seat as far back as it will go. It is restraint would be very close to better to secure the child restraint the inflating airbag. A child in a in a rear seat. forward-facing child restraint can See Passenger Sensing System (Continued) on page 1-53 for additional information. 1-34 Seats and Restraint System

Lower Anchors and In order to use the LATCH system Top Tether Anchor Tethers for Children in your vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH (LATCH) attachments. The child restraint The LATCH system holds a child manufacturer will provide you with restraint during driving or in a crash. instructions on how to use the This system is designed to make child restraint and its attachments. installation of a child restraint easier. The following explains how to The LATCH system uses anchors attach a child restraint with these in the vehicle and attachments attachments in your vehicle. on the child restraint that are made Not all vehicle seating positions or for use with the LATCH system. child restraints have lower anchors Make sure that a LATCH-compatible and attachments or top tether A top tether (A, C) anchors the child restraint is properly installed anchors and attachments. top of the child restraint to the using the anchors, or use the Lower Anchors vehicle. A top tether anchor is built vehicle’s safety belts to secure the into the vehicle. The top tether restraint, following the instructions attachment (B) on the child restraint that came with that restraint, and connects to the top tether anchor also the instructions in this manual. in the vehicle in order to reduce When installing a child restraint with the forward movement and rotation a top tether, you must also use either of the child restraint during driving the lower anchors or the safety belts or in a crash. to properly secure the child restraint. Lower anchors (A) are metal bars A child restraint must never be built into the vehicle. There are Your child restraint may have a attached using only the top tether two lower anchors for each single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). and anchor. LATCH seating position that will Either will have a single accommodate a child restraint with attachment (B) to secure the lower attachments (B). top tether to the anchor. Seats and Restraint System 1-35

Some child restraints with top Lower Anchor and Top Tether tethers are designed for use with Anchor Locations or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can be obtained, Second Row — 60/40 Bench in kit form, for many child restraints. i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating Ask the child restraint manufacturer Second Row — Bucket whether or not a kit is available. positions with top tether anchors. i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions positions with top tether anchors. with two lower anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. 1-36 Seats and Restraint System

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, each second row anchor position has a label, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion. Third Row Second Row — Bucket Shown, Bench Similar i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. The top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seatback for each seating position in the second row. Open the cover to access the To assist you in locating the top anchors. Be sure to use an anchor tether anchors, the top tether anchor located on the same side of the symbol is located on the cover or vehicle as the seating position where near the anchor. the child restraint will be placed. Seats and Restraint System 1-37

that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must { CAUTION be attached. Do not attach more than one Accident statistics show that children child restraint to a single anchor. are safer if they are restrained in Attaching more than one child the rear rather than the front seat. restraint to a single anchor could See Where to Put the Restraint on cause the anchor or attachment to page 1-32 for additional information. come loose or even break during Securing a Child Restraint a crash. A child or others could Designed for the LATCH System be injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a Third Row Seat { CAUTION crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor. The third row has one top tether If a LATCH-type child restraint is anchor located at the bottom rear of not attached to anchors, the child the center seatback. This anchor restraint will not be able to protect should be used for the center the child correctly. In a crash, the seating position only. Never install child could be seriously injured or two top tethers using the same killed. Install a LATCH-type child top tether anchor. restraint properly using the Do not secure a child restraint anchors, or use the vehicle’s in a position without a top tether safety belts to secure the restraint, anchor if a national or local following the instructions that came law requires that the top tether with the child restraint and the be attached, or if the instructions instructions in this manual. 1-38 Seats and Restraint System

Do not fold the empty rear seat Make sure the third row { CAUTION with a safety belt buckled. This bench seatbacks are both could damage the safety belt or upright before placing Children can be seriously injured the seat. Unbuckle and return the the child restraint on or strangled if a shoulder belt is safety belt to its stowed position, the seat. wrapped around their neck and the before folding the seat. 1.3. Put the child restraint on safety belt continues to tighten. 1. Attach and tighten the lower the seat. Buckle any unused safety belts attachments to the lower 1.4. Attach and tighten the lower behind the child restraint so anchors. If the child restraint children cannot reach them. Pull attachments on the child does not have lower attachments restraint to the lower the shoulder belt all the way out of or the desired seating position anchors. the retractor to set the lock, if your does not have lower anchors, vehicle has one, after the child secure the child restraint with the 2. If the child restraint manufacturer restraint has been installed. top tether and the safety belts. recommends that the top tether Refer to your child restraint be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top Notice: Do not let the LATCH manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual. tether anchor, if the vehicle attachments rub against the has one. Refer to the child vehicle’s safety belts. This may 1.1. Find the lower anchors for restraint instructions and the damage these parts. If necessary, the desired seating position. following steps: move buckled safety belts to 1.2. Recline the seatback to the 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. avoid rubbing the LATCH full reclined position. attachments. 2.2. If the anchor is covered, Make sure the second row ﬂip open the cover to bench seatbacks are expose the anchor. aligned at the same angle before placing the child restraint on the seat. Seats and Restraint System 1-39

2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions:

If the position you are using does not have a headrest If the position you are using or head restraint and has a ﬁxed headrest or head you are using a dual tether, restraint and you are using a route the tether over the dual tether, route the tether seatback. around the headrest or head restraint. If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. 1-40 Seats and Restraint System

Securing a Child In Canada, the law requires that Restraint in a Rear Seat forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether Position be attached. When securing a child restraint in a If the child restraint does not have rear seating position, study the the LATCH system, you will be using instructions that came with the the safety belt to secure the child child restraint to make sure restraint in this position. Be sure to it is compatible with this vehicle. follow the instructions that came If the child restraint has the LATCH with the child restraint. Secure the system, see Lower Anchors and child in the child restraint when If the position you are using Tethers for Children (LATCH) on and as the instructions say. has a ﬁxed headrest or page 1-34 for how and where to If more than one child restraint head restraint and you are install the child restraint using needs to be installed in the using a single tether, LATCH. If a child restraint is secured rear seat, be sure to read Where to route the tether over the in the vehicle using a safety belt Put the Restraint on page 1-32. headrest or head restraint. and it uses a top tether, see Lower 1. Put the child restraint on the seat. 3. Push and pull the child restraint Anchors and Tethers for Children in different directions to be sure (LATCH) on page 1-34 for top tether 2. Pick up the latch plate, and it is secure. anchor locations. run the lap and shoulder portions Do not secure a child seat in a of the vehicle’s safety belt position without a top tether anchor through or around the restraint. if a national or local law requires The child restraint instructions that the top tether be anchored, will show you how. or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. Seats and Restraint System 1-41

3. Push the latch plate into the 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 5. To tighten the belt, push down buckle until it clicks. all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the Position the release button on set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to the buckle so that the safety belt tighten the lap portion of the belt could be quickly unbuckled if and feed the shoulder belt back necessary. into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 1-42 Seats and Restraint System

6. If the child restraint has a top Securing a Child A label on the sun visor says, tether, follow the child restraint Restraint in the Right “Never put a rear-facing child seat manufacturer’s instructions in the front.” This is because the risk regarding the use of the top Front Seat Position to the rear-facing child is so great, tether. See Lower Anchors and The vehicle has airbags. A rear if the airbag deploys. Tethers for Children (LATCH) seat is a safer place to secure on page 1-34 for more a forward-facing child restraint. { CAUTION information. See Where to Put the Restraint on 7. Push and pull the child restraint page 1-32. A child in a rear-facing child in different directions to be sure In addition, the vehicle has a restraint can be seriously injured or it is secure. passenger sensing system which is killed if the right front passenger To remove the child restraint, designed to turn off the right airbag inflates. This is because unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and front passenger frontal airbag and the back of the rear-facing child let it return to the stowed position. seat-mounted side impact airbag restraint would be very close to If the top tether is attached to a top under certain conditions. See the inflating airbag. A child in a tether anchor, disconnect it. Passenger Sensing System on forward-facing child restraint can page 1-53 and Passenger Airbag be seriously injured or killed if the Status Indicator on page 3-32 right front passenger airbag for more information, including inflates and the passenger seat is important safety information. in a forward position. (Continued) Seats and Restraint System 1-43

If the child restraint has the LATCH You will be using the lap-shoulder CAUTION (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and belt to secure the child restraint in Tethers for Children (LATCH) on this position. Follow the instructions Even if the passenger sensing page 1-34 for how and where to that came with the child restraint. system has turned off the right install the child restraint using 1. Move the seat as far back as it front passenger frontal airbag, no LATCH. If a child restraint is secured will go before securing the system is fail-safe. No one can using a safety belt and it uses a top forward-facing child restraint. guarantee that an airbag will not tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on When the passenger sensing deploy under some unusual system has turned off the circumstance, even though it is page 1-34 for top tether anchor locations. right front passenger frontal turned off. airbag and seat-mounted side Secure rear-facing child restraints Do not secure a child seat in a impact airbag, the off indicator position without a top tether anchor in a rear seat, even if the airbag is on the passenger airbag if a national or local law requires off. If you secure a forward-facing status indicator should light and that the top tether be anchored, child restraint in the right front seat, stay lit when the vehicle is or if the instructions that come with always move the front passenger started. See Passenger Airbag the child restraint say that the Status Indicator on page 3-32. seat as far back as it will go. It is top strap must be anchored. better to secure the child restraint 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. In Canada, the law requires that in a rear seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run forward-facing child restraints have the lap and shoulder portions See Passenger Sensing System a top tether, and that the tether of the vehicle’s safety belt on page 1-53 for additional be attached. information. through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 1-44 Seats and Restraint System

4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 6. To tighten the belt, push down buckle until it clicks. all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the Position the release button on set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt to the buckle so that the safety belt tighten the lap portion of the belt could be quickly unbuckled if and feed the shoulder belt back necessary. into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Seats and Restraint System 1-45

If the airbags are off, the off Airbag System All of the airbags in the vehicle will indicator in the passenger airbag have the word AIRBAG embossed status indicator will come on The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached and stay on when the vehicle is airbags: label near the deployment opening. started. • A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word If a child restraint has been installed • A frontal airbag for the right front AIRBAG will appear on the middle and the on indicator is lit, see passenger. part of the steering wheel for “If the On Indicator is Lit for a the driver and on the instrument Child Restraint” under Passenger • A seat-mounted side impact panel for the right front passenger. Sensing System on page 1-53 airbag for the driver. With seat-mounted side impact for more information. • A seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG airbag for the right front To remove the child restraint, will appear on the side of the passenger. unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and seatback closest to the door. let it return to the stowed position. • A roof-rail airbag for the driver, passenger seated directly With roof-rail airbags, the word behind the driver, and the third AIRBAG will appear along the row outboard passenger position. headliner or trim. • A roof-rail airbag for the right Airbags are designed to supplement front passenger, passenger the protection provided by safety seated directly behind the right belts. Even though today’s airbags front passenger, and the third row are also designed to help reduce outboard passenger position. the risk of injury from the force of an inﬂating bag, all airbags must inﬂate very quickly to do their job. 1-46 Seats and Restraint System

Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system: { CAUTION { CAUTION { Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against, or CAUTION faster than the blink of an eye. very close to, any airbag when it Anyone who is up against, or very inflates can be seriously injured or You can be severely injured or close to, any airbag when it killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder killed in a crash if you are not inflates can be seriously injured or belts offer protection for adults wearing your safety belt — even if killed. Do not sit unnecessarily and older children, but not for you have airbags. Airbags are close to the airbag, as you would young children and infants. designed to work with safety be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle’s safety belt belts, but do not replace them. of your seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is Also, airbags are not designed to Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young children deploy in every crash. In some position before and during a and infants need the protection crashes safety belts are your only crash. Always wear your safety that a child restraint system can restraint. See When Should an belt, even with airbags. The driver provide. Always secure children Airbag Inflate? on page 1-49. should sit as far back as possible properly in your vehicle. To read Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of how, see Older Children on crash helps reduce your chance the vehicle. page 1-25 or Infants and Young of hitting things inside the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or Children on page 1-28. or being ejected from it. Airbags sleep against the door or side are “supplemental restraints” to windows in seating positions with the safety belts. Everyone in your seat-mounted side impact airbags vehicle should wear a safety belt and/or roof-rail airbags. properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. Seats and Restraint System 1-47

Where Are the Airbags?

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-31 for The right front passenger frontal more information. airbag is in the instrument panel on The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger side. middle of the steering wheel. 1-48 Seats and Restraint System

{ CAUTION

If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an Driver Side shown, Passenger Driver Side shown, Passenger airbag, and do not attach or put Side similar Side similar anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other The seat-mounted side impact The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbag covering. airbags for the driver and right front right front passenger, passengers Do not use seat accessories that passenger are in the side of the behind the driver and right front seatbacks closest to the door. passenger, and the third row block the inflation path of a outboard passengers are in the seat-mounted side impact airbag. ceiling above the side windows. Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked. Seats and Restraint System 1-49

When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at Thresholds can also vary with Inflate? different crash speeds. For example: specific vehicle design. • If the vehicle hits a stationary Frontal airbags are not intended to Frontal airbags are designed to object, the airbags could inflate during vehicle rollovers, inflate in moderate to severe frontal inflate at a different crash speed rear impacts, or in many side or near-frontal crashes to help than if the vehicle hits a impacts. reduce the potential for severe moving object. injuries mainly to the driver’s or right In addition, the vehicle has front passenger’s head and chest. • If the vehicle hits an object that dual-stage frontal airbags. However, they are only designed deforms, the airbags could Dual-stage airbags adjust the to inflate if the impact exceeds inflate at a different crash speed restraint according to crash severity. a predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an The vehicle has electronic frontal threshold. Deployment thresholds object that does not deform. sensors, which help the sensing are used to predict how severe • If the vehicle hits a narrow object system distinguish between a a crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could moderate frontal impact and a more airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed severe frontal impact. For moderate the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a level less than full Whether the frontal airbags will or object (like a wall). deployment. For more severe frontal should deploy is not based on • If the vehicle goes into an object impacts, full deployment occurs. how fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could It depends largely on what you inflate at a different crash speed hit, the direction of the impact, than if the vehicle goes straight and how quickly your vehicle into the object. slows down. 1-50 Seats and Restraint System

The vehicle has seat-mounted system predicts that the vehicle is What Makes an Airbag side impact and roof-rail airbags. about to roll over, or in a severe See Airbag System on page 1-45. frontal impact. Inflate? Seat-mounted side impact and In a deployment event, the sensing In any particular crash, no one can roof-rail airbags are intended to system sends an electrical signal say whether an airbag should inflate in moderate to severe side triggering a release of gas from the have inflated simply because of the crashes. In addition, these roof-rail inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the damage to a vehicle or because airbags are intended to inflate during airbag causing the bag to break out of what the repair costs were. a rollover or in a severe frontal of the cover and deploy. The inflator, For frontal airbags, inflation is impact. Seat-mounted side impact the airbag, and related hardware are determined by what the vehicle hits, and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the all part of the airbag module. the angle of the impact, and how crash severity is above the system’s quickly the vehicle slows down. Frontal airbag modules are located designed threshold level. The For seat-mounted side impact and inside the steering wheel and threshold level can vary with specific roof-rail airbags, deployment is instrument panel. For vehicles with vehicle design. determined by the location seat-mounted side impact airbags, Seat-mounted side impact airbags and severity of the side impact. there are airbag modules in the side are not intended to inflate in frontal In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag of the front seatbacks closest to impacts, near-frontal impacts, deployment is determined by the door. For vehicles with roof-rail rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail the direction of the roll. airbags, there are airbag modules airbags are not intended to inflate in in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the rear impacts. A seat-mounted side side windows that have occupant impact airbag is intended to deploy seating positions. on the side of the vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing Seats and Restraint System 1-51

How Does an Airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags What Will You See After are designed to help contain Restrain? the head and chest of occupants in an Airbag Inflates? In moderate to severe frontal or the outboard seating positions in After the frontal airbags and near frontal collisions, even belted the first, second, and third rows. seat-mounted side impact airbags occupants can contact the steering The rollover capable roof-rail airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so wheel or the instrument panel. In are designed to help reduce the quickly that some people may not moderate to severe side collisions, risk of full or partial ejection in even realize an airbag inflated. even belted occupants can contact rollover events, although no system Roof-rail airbags may still be at least the inside of the vehicle. can prevent all such ejections. partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some components of Airbags supplement the protection But airbags would not help in many the airbag module may be hot for provided by safety belts. types of collisions, primarily because several minutes. For location of the the occupant’s motion is not toward Frontal airbags distribute the force airbag modules, see What Makes an those airbags. See When Should an of the impact more evenly over the Airbag Inflate? on page 1-50. Airbag Inflate? on page 1-49 for occupant’s upper body, stopping more information. The parts of the airbag that come the occupant more gradually. into contact with you may be Seat-mounted side impact and Airbags should never be regarded warm, but not too hot to touch. roof-rail airbags distribute the force as anything more than a supplement There may be some smoke of the impact more evenly over the to safety belts. and dust coming from the occupant’s upper body. vents in the deflated airbags. 1-52 Seats and Restraint System

Airbag inflation does not prevent The vehicle has a feature that may not be there to help protect you in the driver from seeing out of the automatically unlock the doors, another crash. A new system will windshield or being able to steer the turn the interior lamps on, and turn include airbag modules and vehicle, nor does it prevent people the hazard warning flashers on possibly other parts. The service from leaving the vehicle. when the airbags inflate. You can manual for your vehicle covers lock the doors, turn the interior the need to replace other parts. { CAUTION lamps off, and turn the hazard • The vehicle has a crash sensing warning flashers off by using the and diagnostic module which When an airbag inflates, there may controls for those features. records information after a crash. be dust in the air. This dust could In many crashes severe enough See Vehicle Data Recording and cause breathing problems for to inflate the airbag, windshields Privacy on page 7-14 and Event people with a history of asthma or are broken by vehicle deformation. Data Recorders on page 7-15. other breathing trouble. To avoid Additional windshield breakage • Let only qualified technicians work this, everyone in the vehicle should may also occur from the right front on the airbag systems. Improper get out as soon as it is safe to do passenger airbag. service can mean that an airbag so. If you have breathing problems • Airbags are designed to inflate system will not work properly. but cannot get out of the vehicle only once. After an airbag inflates, See your dealer/retailer for after an airbag inflates, then get you will need some new parts for service. fresh air by opening a window or a the airbag system. If you do not door. If you experience breathing get them, the airbag system will problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention. Seats and Restraint System 1-53

Passenger Sensing If you are using remote start, if The sensors are designed to detect equipped, to start the vehicle from a the presence of a properly-seated System distance, you may not see the occupant and determine if the right The vehicle has a passenger system check. When the system front passenger frontal airbag should sensing system for the right front check is complete, either the word be enabled (may inﬂate) or not. passenger position. The passenger ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or According to accident statistics, airbag status indicator will be off, will be visible. See Passenger children are safer when properly visible on the instrument panel Airbag Status Indicator on secured in a rear seat in the when the vehicle is started. page 3-32. correct child restraint for their The passenger sensing system turns weight and size. off the right front passenger frontal We recommend that children be airbag under certain conditions. secured in a rear seat, including: an The driver airbag, seat-mounted infant or a child riding in a side impact airbags and the roof-rail rear-facing child restraint; a child United States airbags are not affected by the riding in a forward-facing child seat; passenger sensing system. an older child riding in a booster The passenger sensing system seat; and children, who are works with sensors that are part large enough, using safety belts. of the right front passenger seat.

Canada The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, are visible during the system check. 1-54 Seats and Restraint System

A label on the sun visor says, • A right front passenger takes “Never put a rear-facing child seat CAUTION (Continued) his/her weight off of the seat for a in the front.” This is because the risk period of time. to the rear-facing child is so great, system is fail-safe. No one can • Or, if there is a critical problem if the airbag deploys. guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual with the airbag system or the circumstance, even though the passenger sensing system. { CAUTION airbag is turned off. When the passenger sensing A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints system has turned off the right restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit or killed if the right front passenger off. If you secure a forward-facing to remind you that the airbag is airbag inflates. This is because child restraint in the right front seat, off. See Passenger Airbag Status the back of the rear-facing child always move the front passenger Indicator on page 3-32. restraint would be very close to seat as far back as it will go. It is the inflating airbag. A child in a better to secure the child restraint The passenger sensing system is forward-facing child restraint can in a rear seat. designed to turn on (may inflate) the be seriously injured or killed if right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a the right front passenger airbag The passenger sensing system is person of adult size is sitting properly inflates and the passenger seat designed to turn off the right in the right front passenger seat. is in a forward position. front passenger frontal airbag if: Even if the passenger sensing • The right front passenger seat is When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right unoccupied. system has allowed the airbag to be front passenger frontal airbag, no enabled, the on indicator will light • The system determines that an and stay lit to remind you that (Continued) infant is present in a child the airbag is active. restraint. Seats and Restraint System 1-55

For some children, including children If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child in child restraints, and for very small Child Restraint restraint and restarting the adults, the passenger sensing vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, system may or may not turn off the If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly right front passenger frontal airbag, and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback and depending upon the person’s seating 1. Turn the vehicle off. adjust the seat cushion, if posture and body build. Everyone in 2. Remove the child restraint from adjustable, to make sure that the the vehicle who has outgrown child the vehicle. vehicle seatback is not pushing restraints should wear a safety belt the child restraint into the seat properly — whether or not there is an 3. Remove any additional items cushion. from the seat such as blankets, airbag for that person. Also make sure the child restraint cushions, seat covers, seat is not trapped under the vehicle heaters, or seat massagers. { CAUTION head restraint. If this happens, 4. Reinstall the child restraint adjust the head restraint. See If the airbag readiness light ever following the directions provided Head Restraints on page 1-2. by the child restraint manufacturer comes on and stays on, it means 6. Restart the vehicle. that something may be wrong with and refer to Securing a Child The passenger sensing system the airbag system. To help avoid Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1-42. may or may not turn off the injury to yourself or others, have airbag for a child in a child the vehicle serviced right away. restraint depending upon the See Airbag Readiness Light on child’s seating posture and body page 3-31 for more information, build. It is better to secure the including important safety child restraint in a rear seat. information. 1-56 Seats and Restraint System

If the Off Indicator is Lit for an 3. Place the seatback in the fully We recommend that you not use Adult-Size Occupant upright position. seat covers or other aftermarket 4. Have the person sit upright in equipment except when approved the seat, centered on the seat by GM for your speciﬁc vehicle. cushion, with legs comfortably See Adding Equipment to Your extended. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on 5. Restart the vehicle and have the page 1-58 for more information person remain in this position for about modiﬁcations that can affect two to three minutes after the how the system operates. on indicator is lit. A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger Additional Factors Affecting sensing system. Here is how: System Operation • The passenger sensing system Safety belts help keep the passenger may turn off the passenger airbag If a person of adult-size is sitting in position on the seat during vehicle when liquid is soaked into the in the right front passenger seat, maneuvers and braking, which helps seat. If this happens, the off but the off indicator is lit, it could be the passenger sensing system indicator will be lit, and the airbag because that person is not sitting maintain the passenger airbag readiness light on the instrument properly in the seat. If this happens, status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child panel will also be lit. Restraints” in the Index for additional use the following steps to allow • Liquid pooled on the seat that has information about the importance of the system to detect that person and not soaked in may make it more proper restraint use. enable the right front passenger likely that the passenger sensing frontal airbag: A thick layer of additional material, system will enable (turn on) the 1. Turn the vehicle off. such as a blanket or cushion, or passenger airbag while a child 2. Remove any additional material aftermarket equipment such as seat restraint or child occupant is on from the seat, such as blankets, covers, seat heaters, and seat the seat. If the passenger airbag cushions, seat covers, seat massagers can affect how well the is turned on, the on indicator will heaters, or seat massagers. passenger sensing system operates. be lit. Seats and Restraint System 1-57

If the passenger seat gets wet, dry Servicing Your the seat immediately. If the airbag { CAUTION readiness light is lit, do not install a Airbag-Equipped Vehicle child restraint or allow anyone to Airbags affect how the vehicle For up to 10 seconds after the occupy the seat. See Airbag should be serviced. There are parts ignition is turned off and the Readiness Light on page 3-31 for of the airbag system in several battery is disconnected, an airbag important safety information. places around the vehicle. Your can still inflate during improper dealer/retailer and the service service. You can be injured if you The on indicator may be lit if an manual have information about are close to an airbag when it object, such as a briefcase, servicing the vehicle and the airbag inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. handbag, grocery bag, laptop or system. To purchase a service other electronic device, is put on an They are probably part of the manual, see Service Publications unoccupied seat. If this is not desired airbag system. Be sure to follow Ordering Information on page 7-13. remove the object from the seat. proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so. { CAUTION

Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system. 1-58 Seats and Restraint System

Adding Equipment to In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system from Your Airbag-Equipped passenger sensing system for the properly turning off the passenger right front passenger position, airbag(s). See Passenger Vehicle which includes sensors that Sensing System on page 1-53. Q: Is there anything I might add to are part of the passenger seat. If you have questions, call or change about the vehicle The passenger sensing system Customer Assistance. The phone that could keep the airbags may not operate properly if the numbers and addresses for from working properly? original seat trim is replaced Customer Assistance are in A: Yes. If you add things that with non-GM covers, upholstery Step Two of the Customer change the vehicle’s frame, or trim, or with GM covers, Satisfaction Procedure in bumper system, height, front end upholstery or trim designed for this manual. See Customer or side sheet metal, they may a different vehicle. Any object, Satisfaction Procedure on keep the airbag system from such as an aftermarket seat page 7-1. working properly. Changing or heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under or If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail moving any parts of the front airbags, see Different Size Tires seats, safety belts, the airbag on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of and Wheels on page 5-53 for sensing and diagnostic module, additional important information. steering wheel, instrument panel, the passenger sensing system. roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling This could either prevent proper headliner or pillar garnish trim, deployment of the passenger front sensors, side impact airbag(s) or prevent the sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system. Seats and Restraint System 1-59

Q: Because I have a disability, Restraint System Keep safety belts clean and dry. I have to get my vehicle See Care of Safety Belts on modified. How can I find out Check page 5-82. whether this will affect my airbag system? Checking the Restraint Airbags A: If you have questions, call Systems The airbag system does not need Customer Assistance. The phone regularly scheduled maintenance Safety Belts or replacement. Make sure the numbers and addresses for airbag readiness light is working. Customer Assistance are in Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light, safety belts, See Airbag Readiness Light Step Two of the Customer on page 3-31 for more information. Satisfaction Procedure in buckles, latch plates, retractors, and this manual. See Customer anchorages are all working properly. Notice: If an airbag covering Satisfaction Procedure on Look for any other loose or damaged is damaged, opened, or broken, page 7-1. safety belt system parts that might the airbag may not work properly. keep a safety belt system from doing Do not open or break the airbag In addition, your dealer/retailer and its job. See your dealer/retailer to coverings. If there are any opened the service manual have information have it repaired. Torn or frayed or broken airbag covers, have about the location of the airbag safety belts may not protect you in a the airbag covering and/or airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic crash. They can rip apart under module replaced. For the module and airbag wiring. impact forces. If a belt is torn or location of the airbag modules, frayed, get a new one right away. see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-50. See your Make sure the safety belt reminder dealer/retailer for service. light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-30 for more information. 1-60 Seats and Restraint System

Replacing Restraint If the vehicle has been in a crash, New parts and repairs may be System Parts After a do you need new safety belts necessary even if the safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped) or LATCH system (if equipped), was Crash parts? not being used at the time of the crash. { After a very minor crash, nothing CAUTION may be necessary. But the If an airbag inﬂates, you will need safety belt assemblies that were to replace airbag system parts. A crash can damage the used during any crash may See the part on the airbag system restraint systems in your vehicle. have been stressed or damaged. earlier in this section. A damaged restraint system may See your dealer/retailer to have the Have the safety belt pretensioners not properly protect the person safety belt assemblies inspected checked if the vehicle has been in a using it, resulting in serious injury or replaced. or even death in a crash. To help crash, if the airbag readiness light make sure your restraint systems If the vehicle has the LATCH stays on after the vehicle is started, are working properly after a crash, system and it was being used or while you are driving. See Airbag have them inspected and any during a crash, you may need Readiness Light on page 3-31. new LATCH system parts. necessary replacements made as soon as possible. Features and Controls 2-1

Theft-Deterrent Systems Mirrors Features and Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-16 Automatic Dimming Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2-16 Rearview Mirror ...... 2-31 Controls PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Outside Power Mirrors ...... 2-32 Immobilizer ...... 2-18 Outside Power Foldaway PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Mirrors ...... 2-32 Immobilizer Operation ...... 2-18 Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-33 Keys Outside Convex Mirror ...... 2-34 Keys ...... 2-2 Starting and Operating Outside Heated Mirrors ...... 2-34 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Your Vehicle System ...... 2-3 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 2-20 Object Detection Systems Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Ignition Positions ...... 2-21 Ultrasonic Rear Parking System Operation ...... 2-4 Retained Accessory Assist (URPA) ...... 2-34 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 Power (RAP) ...... 2-22 Rear Vision Starting the Engine ...... 2-22 Camera (RVC) ...... 2-37 Doors and Locks Engine Coolant Heater ...... 2-23 ® Door Locks ...... 2-8 OnStar System Automatic Transmission ® Power Door Locks ...... 2-8 Operation ...... 2-24 OnStar System ...... 2-41 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 2-26 Universal Home Remote Programmable Automatic Parking Brake ...... 2-27 Door Locks ...... 2-9 Shifting Into Park ...... 2-28 System Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-9 ...... 2-29 Universal Home Remote Shifting Out of Park ...... 2-44 Lockout Protection ...... 2-9 Parking Over Things System Liftgate ...... 2-10 ...... 2-29 Universal Home Remote That Burn ...... 2-45 Power Liftgate ...... 2-11 Engine Exhaust ...... 2-30 System Operation Running the Vehicle Windows While Parked ...... 2-30 Windows ...... 2-14 Power Windows ...... 2-14 Sun Visors ...... 2-16 2-2 Features and Controls

Storage Areas Keys Glove Box ...... 2-49 Cupholders ...... 2-49 Instrument Panel Storage ...... 2-49 { CAUTION Center Console Storage ...... 2-49 Second Row Center Leaving children in a vehicle with Console ...... 2-50 the ignition key is dangerous for Floor Mats ...... 2-51 Luggage Carrier ...... 2-51 many reasons, children or others Rear Seat Armrest ...... 2-52 could be badly injured or even Cargo Tie Downs ...... 2-52 killed. They could operate the Cargo Management power windows or other controls System ...... 2-52 or even make the vehicle move. Sunroof The windows will function with the Sunroof ...... 2-54 keys in the ignition and children The key is used for the ignition and could be seriously injured or killed all door locks. if caught in the path of a closing The key has a bar-coded key tag window. Do not leave the keys in that the dealer/retailer or qualiﬁed a vehicle with children. locksmith can use to make new keys. Store this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or additional key is needed. Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. Features and Controls 2-3

If you are locked out of the vehicle, This device complies with RSS-210 If there is a decrease in the RKE call the Roadside Assistance of Industry Canada. Operation is operating range, try this: Center. See Roadside Assistance subject to the following two • Check the distance. The Program on page 7-6. conditions: transmitter may be too far from 1. This device may not cause the vehicle. Stand closer Remote Keyless Entry interference. during rainy or snowy weather. (RKE) System 2. This device must accept any • Check the location. Other The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) interference received, including vehicles or objects may be system operates on a radio interference that may cause blocking the signal. Take a few frequency subject to Federal undesired operation of the device. steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and Communications Commission (FCC) Changes or modiﬁcations to this try again. Rules and with Industry Canada. system by other than an authorized This device complies with Part 15 of service facility could void • Check the transmitter’s battery. the FCC Rules. Operation is authorization to use this equipment. See “Battery Replacement” subject to the following two later in this section. conditions: • If the transmitter is still not 1. This device may not cause working correctly, see your interference. dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed technician for service. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 2-4 Features and Controls

Remote Keyless Entry / (Remote Vehicle Start): For If enabled through the DIC, the (RKE) System Operation vehicles with this feature, see parking lamps flash twice to indicate Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-5 unlocking has occurred. See DIC The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) for additional information. Vehicle Customization on page 3-59. transmitter functions work up K to 195 feet (60 m) away from the Q (Lock): Press to lock all the Pressing on the RKE transmitter vehicle. doors. disarms the content theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent There are other conditions which If enabled through the Driver on page 2-16. can affect the performance of Information Center (DIC), the parking the transmitter. See Remote Keyless lamps flash once to indicate locking & (Power Liftgate): Press and Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3. has occurred. If enabled through the hold for about one second to DIC, the horn sounds when Q is open and close the liftgate. The pressed again within five seconds. taillamps flash and a chime sounds See DIC Vehicle Customization on to indicate when the liftgate is page 3-59 for additional information. opening and closing.

Pressing Q may arm the content L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): theft-deterrent system. See Content Press and release to locate the Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16. vehicle. The parking lamps flash and the horn sounds three times. K (Unlock): Press once to unlock Press and hold L for more than only the driver door. If K is pressed two seconds to activate the again within five seconds, all panic alarm. The parking lamps With Remote Start and Liftgate remaining doors unlock. The interior flash and the horn sounds (Without Remote Start or Liftgate lamps come on and stay on for repeatedly for 30 seconds. The Similar) 20 seconds or until the ignition is alarm turns off when the ignition is turned on. moved to ON/RUN or L is Features and Controls 2-5 pressed again. The ignition must be Battery Replacement 2. Remove the old battery. Do not in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm use a metal object. Replace the battery if the REPLACE to work. BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY 3. Insert the new battery, positive Programming Transmitters to message displays in the DIC. side facing down. Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery. the Vehicle Notice: When replacing the Only RKE transmitters programmed battery, do not touch any of the 4. Snap the transmitter back to this vehicle will work. If a circuitry on the transmitter. Static together. transmitter is lost or stolen, a from your body could damage replacement can be purchased and the transmitter. Remote Vehicle Start programmed through your dealer/ This vehicle may have a remote retailer. When the replacement starting feature that starts the engine transmitter is programmed to this from outside of the vehicle. vehicle using the DIC, all remaining transmitters must also be If the vehicle has an automatic reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen climate control system, the climate transmitters will no longer work once control system defaults to a heating the new transmitter is programmed. or cooling mode depending on the Each vehicle can have up to eight outside temperatures. If the vehicle transmitters programmed to it. See does not have an automatic climate “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC control system, the system turns on Operation and Displays on at the setting the vehicle was set to page 3-43 for instructions on how to when the vehicle was last turned off. program transmitters to this vehicle. 1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object inserted into the notch on the side. 2-6 Features and Controls

If the vehicle has an automatic Do not use the remote start feature To start the vehicle: climate control system and heated if the vehicle is low on fuel. The 1. Aim the transmitter at the seats, the heated seats turn on vehicle could run out of fuel. vehicle. during colder outside temperatures If the vehicle has the remote start and shut off when the key is 2. Press and release Q, then feature, the RKE transmitter turned to ON/RUN. See Heated functions have an increased range immediately press and hold Seats on page 1-4 or Heated and of operation. However, the range / until the parking lamps ﬂash. Cooled Seats on page 1-4 for may be less while the vehicle If the vehicle’s lights can not more information. is running. be seen, press and hold / for at The rear window defogger and There are other conditions which least four seconds. The heated mirrors, if the vehicle has can affect the performance of vehicle’s doors lock. When the them, turn on during colder outside the transmitter, see Remote Keyless vehicle starts, the parking temperatures and turn off when Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3 lamps turn on and remain on the key is turned to ON/RUN. for additional information. while the vehicle is running. Laws in some communities may Pressing / again, after the / (Remote Start): This button is restrict the use of remote starters. vehicle has started, shuts the For example, some laws may located on the RKE transmitter if the vehicle off. require a person using the remote vehicle has remote start. start to have the vehicle in view 3. If it is the ﬁrst remote start since when doing so. Check local the vehicle has been driven, regulations for any requirements on repeat these steps while the remote starting of vehicles. engine is still running, to extend the time by 10 minutes for the engine to continue to run. Remote start can be extended one time. Features and Controls 2-7

After entering the vehicle during a For example, if Q and then / are The engine turns off during a remote start, insert and turn the key pressed again after the vehicle remote start if the coolant to the ON/RUN position to drive has been running for five minutes, temperature gets too high or if the vehicle. 10 minutes are added, allowing the oil pressure gets low. If the vehicle is left running it the engine to run for 15 minutes. Vehicles that have the remote automatically shuts off after The additional 10 minutes are vehicle start feature are shipped 10 minutes unless a time extension considered a second remote start. from the factory with the remote has been done. vehicle start system enabled. The The vehicle must be started with the system may be enabled or disabled To manually shut off a remote start: key once two remote starts, or a through the DIC if the vehicle has • Aim the RKE transmitter at the single remote start with one DIC buttons. See “REMOTE vehicle and press / until the time extension has been done. START” under DIC Vehicle parking lamps turn off. The vehicle can be started using the Customization on page 3-59 for additional information. If the vehicle • Turn on the hazard warning remote start feature again after the key is removed from the ignition. does not have DIC buttons, see flashers. your dealer/retailer to enable • Turn the ignition switch on and The vehicle cannot be started or disable the remote start system. then off. using the remote start feature if the key is in the ignition, the hood is The vehicle can be started using the open, or if there is an emission remote start feature two separate control system malfunction. times between driving sequences. The engine runs for 10 minutes after each remote start. Or, the engine run time can be extended another 10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time frame, and before the engine stops. 2-8 Features and Controls

Power Door Locks Doors and Locks CAUTION (Continued) The power door lock switches are Door Locks • Young children who get into located on the front doors. unlocked vehicles may be " (Unlock): Press to unlock the { CAUTION unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat doors. Unlocked doors can be and can suffer permanent Q (Lock): Remove the key from dangerous. injuries or even death from the ignition and press to lock heat stroke. Always lock the • Passengers, especially the doors. children, can easily open the vehicle whenever leaving it. doors and fall out of a moving • Outsiders can easily enter Delayed Locking vehicle. When a door is through an unlocked door locked, the handle will not when you slow down or stop When locking the doors with the open it. The chance of being your vehicle. Locking your power lock switch and a door or the thrown out of the vehicle in a doors can help prevent this liftgate is open, the doors will lock crash is increased if the from happening. ﬁve seconds after the last door is doors are not locked. So, all closed. You will hear three chimes to passengers should wear To lock or unlock a door, use the signal that the delayed locking safety belts properly and the key from the outside or the door lock feature is in use. doors should be locked from the inside. Pressing the power lock switch whenever the vehicle is twice or the lock button on the RKE driven. transmitter twice will override the (Continued) delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors. Features and Controls 2-9

This feature will not operate if the Rear Door Security door unlocked. To return the door to key is in the ignition. normal operation, turn the slot to Locks the vertical position. This feature can be programmed by The vehicle has rear door security using the Driver Information locks to prevent passengers Center (DIC). See “DELAY DOOR Lockout Protection from opening the rear doors from LOCK” under DIC Vehicle the inside. This feature protects you from Customization on page 3-59. locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a Programmable Automatic front door is open. Door Locks If the driver side power door lock Vehicles with an automatic switch is pressed when the driver’s lock/unlock feature enable you to door is open and the key is in program the vehicle’s power the ignition, all of the doors will lock door locks. This feature can be and then the driver door will programmed through the Driver unlock. Information Center (DIC). See DIC If the passenger side power door Vehicle Customization on lock switch is pressed when the front page 3-59 for more information. passenger door is open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors Open the rear doors to access the will lock and then the front security locks on the inside edge passenger door will unlock. of each door. To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to the horizontal position. The door can only be opened from the outside with the 2-10 Features and Controls

Liftgate To open the liftgate, press the CAUTION (Continued) touchpad under the liftgate handle. { The vehicle must be in P (Park) CAUTION • Adjust the Climate Control to open the liftgate. To close system to a setting that the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull Exhaust gases can enter the brings in only outside air and strap as an aid. vehicle if it is driven with the set the fan speed to the The liftgate will not open if the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with highest setting. See Climate battery is disconnected or has low any objects that pass through the Control System in the Index. voltage. The liftgate will resume seal between the body and the • If the vehicle is equipped with trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine operation when the battery is a power liftgate, disable the reconnected and charged. exhaust contains Carbon power liftgate function. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be If the battery is properly connected seen or smelled. It can cause For more information about and has adequate voltage, and unconsciousness and even death. carbon monoxide, see Engine the liftgate still will not function, the Exhaust on page 2-30. If the vehicle must be driven with vehicle should be taken to a dealers/retailer for service. the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: If the vehicle has a power liftgate, • Close all of the windows. see Power Liftgate on page 2-11. • Fully open the air outlets on To unlock the liftgate, use the power or under the instrument door lock switch or press the door panel. unlock button on the RKE transmitter (Continued) twice. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4. Features and Controls 2-11

Power Liftgate CAUTION (Continued) { CAUTION Power Liftgate Operation • Adjust the Climate Control You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power { CAUTION system to a setting that brings in only outside air and liftgate. Make sure there is no one Exhaust gases can enter the set the fan speed to the in the way of the liftgate as it is vehicle if it is driven with the highest setting. See Climate opening and closing. liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with Control System in the Index. any objects that pass through the • If the vehicle is equipped with Notice: If you open the liftgate seal between the body and the a power liftgate, disable the without checking for overhead trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine power liftgate function. obstructions such as a garage exhaust contains Carbon For more information about door, you could damage the Monoxide (CO) which cannot be carbon monoxide, see Engine liftgate or the liftgate glass. seen or smelled. It can cause Exhaust on page 2-30. Always check to make sure the unconsciousness and even death. area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it. If the vehicle must be driven with The vehicle may have a power the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: liftgate. The vehicle must be The power liftgate can be power in P (Park) to use this feature. opened and closed in the • Close all of the windows. following ways: • Fully open the air outlets on The taillamps will ﬂash and a chime or under the instrument will sound when the power liftgate • Press and hold the power liftgate panel. is used. button on the RKE transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (Continued) System Operation on page 2-4 for more information. 2-12 Features and Controls

If the transmission is shifted out of P (Park) while the power function is in progress, the liftgate power function will continue to completion. If the transmission is shifted out of P (Park) and the vehicle accelerates before the power liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched before you drive away.

• Press the liftgate button on the Power Liftgate Button near If you power open the liftgate and center console. Liftgate Latch the liftgate support struts have lost pressure, the lights will ﬂash • Press the touchpad on the The liftgate can also be closed by and a chime will sound. The liftgate outside liftgate handle. pressing the power liftgate will stay open temporarily, then button next to the liftgate latch. slowly close. See your dealer/retailer Pressing the buttons or touchpad a Press the button a second second time while the liftgate is for service before using the liftgate time during liftgate operation to if this occurs. moving reverses the direction. reverse that operation. Obstacle Detection Features The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under extreme A warning chime will sound and the temperatures or under low battery liftgate will automatically reverse conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate direction to the full closed or can still be operated manually. open position if the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a power open or close cycle. Features and Controls 2-13

After removing the obstruction, the or closed manually. Do not force the To open the liftgate, press the power liftgate operation can be liftgate open or closed during a touchpad on the handle on the used again. power cycle. outside of the liftgate and lift the gate open. To close the liftgate, use the If the liftgate comes across more Manual Operation of Power pull cup to lower the liftgate and obstacles on the same power cycle, Liftgate close. The liftgate latch will power the power function deactivates, close. Always close the liftgate and you must manually open before driving. or close the liftgate. A message displays, LIFTGATE OPEN, If the RKE button or the power close to indicate that the liftgate is open. button on the liftgate is pressed while See Driver Information Center power operation is disabled, the (DIC) on page 3-42 for more lights will ﬂash three times, but the information. After removing the liftgate will not move. obstructions, manually open It is not recommended that you the liftgate to the full open position drive with the liftgate open. or close the liftgate to the fully However, if you must drive with the closed and latched position. The liftgate open, the liftgate should liftgate resumes normal power be set to manual operation by operation. To change the liftgate to manual pressing the OFF switch on the The vehicle has pinch sensors operation, press the switch on center console. located on the side edges of the the center console to the OFF liftgate. If an object is caught position. between the liftgate and the body and presses against this sensor, the With the power liftgate disabled and liftgate will reverse direction and all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate open fully. The liftgate will remain can be manually opened and closed. open until it is activated again 2-14 Features and Controls

Windows Power Windows

{ CAUTION { CAUTION

Leaving children, helpless adults, Leaving children in a vehicle with or pets in a vehicle with the the keys is dangerous for many windows closed is dangerous. reasons, children or others could They can be overcome by be badly injured or even killed. the extreme heat and suffer They could operate the power permanent injuries or even death windows or other controls or even from heat stroke. Never leave a make the vehicle move. The child, a helpless adult, or a pet windows will function and they alone in a vehicle, especially with could be seriously injured or killed the windows closed in warm or hot if caught in the path of a closing weather. window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows. Features and Controls 2-15

Press the switch to lower the Programming the Power window. Pull up on the front edge of Windows the switch to raise the window. If the battery on the vehicle has Express-Down Windows been recharged, disconnected, or replaced, windows with the The express-down feature allows express-up feature need to be the windows to be lowered without reprogrammed for this feature to holding the switch. Press the work. To program the window: window switch fully and release it to activate the express-down feature. 1. Close all doors with the ignition in The express mode can be canceled the ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN by pressing or pulling the switch. position, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. Uplevel shown, base similar Express-Up Window See Retained Accessory Power The power window controls are The express-up feature allows the (RAP) on page 2-22. located on each of the side doors. windows to be raised all the way 2. Press and continue to hold the The driver door also has switches without holding the switch up. Pull window switch until the window that control the passenger and rear the switch up fully and release it to is fully open. windows. The power windows activate the express-up feature. The 3. Pull up and hold the window work with the ignition in express-up mode can be canceled switch to close the window. ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or by pressing or pulling the switch. Continue to hold it brieﬂy after when Retained Accessory Power the window is fully closed. (RAP) is active. See Retained 4. Repeat for each window that has Accessory Power (RAP) on the express-up feature. page 2-22. 2-16 Features and Controls

Anti-Pinch Feature Sun Visors Theft-Deterrent The anti-pinch feature is on windows Pull the sun visor down to block Systems with the express-up feature. If an glare. Detach the sun visor from the object is in the way of the window as center mount and slide it along Vehicle theft is big business, it is express-closing, or in certain the rod from side-to-side to cover especially in some cities. This weather conditions like severe icing, the driver or passenger side of vehicle has theft-deterrent features, the window will stop and open to the front window. Swing the however, they do not make it a factory preset position. The sun visor to the side to cover the impossible to steal. window functions normally once the side window. It can be moved along obstruction is removed. the rod from side-to-side in this Content Theft-Deterrent position also. Window Lockout This vehicle has a content Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror theft-deterrent alarm system. o (Window Lockout): The To activate the theft-deterrent window lockout switch is located The vehicle has lighted visor vanity system: with the power window switches on mirrors on both the driver and the driver door armrest. This passenger sun visors. Pull the sun • Press Q on the Remote Keyless feature prevents the rear passenger visor down and lift the mirror Entry (RKE) transmitter or the windows from operating the cover to turn the lamps on. power door lock switch when any windows, except from the driver door is open. position. Press the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off. An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on.

The security light ﬂashes. Features and Controls 2-17

When the door is closed, the is not unlocked by pressing Q Testing the Alarm security light stops flashing and during the ten second pre-alarm, the To test the alarm: stays on solid for approximately alarm goes off. The headlamps 30 seconds. The content flash and the horn sounds for about 1. From inside the vehicle, lower theft deterrent alarm is not armed two minutes, then turns off to the driver side window and until the security light goes off. save the battery power. open the driver door. If the delayed locking feature is The vehicle can be started with the 2. Press Q. active, the alarm is not activated correct ignition key if the alarm until all doors are closed and the 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the has been set off. security light goes off. door and wait for the security To avoid setting off the alarm by light to go out. • Press Q when the driver door is accident: 4. Then reach in through the closed. The security light comes window, unlock the door with the on solid for approximately • Lock the vehicle with the door manual door lock and open the 30 seconds and then goes off. key after the doors are closed. door. This should set off the The content theft deterrent alarm • Unlock the door with the RKE alarm. is not armed until the security light transmitter. Unlocking a door goes off. any other way sets off the alarm If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the vehicle’s headlamps The theft-deterrent system will not if the system has been armed. flash, check to see if the horn activate if the doors are locked Press K or place the key in works. The horn fuse may be blown. with the vehicle’s key or the manual the ignition and turn it to START to To replace the fuse, see Fuses door lock. turn off the alarm. and Circuit Breakers on page 5-88. If a locked door is opened without If the alarm does not sound or using the RKE transmitter, a the vehicle’s headlamps do ten second pre-alarm occurs. The not flash, see your dealer/retailer horn chirps and the lights flash. for service. If the key is not placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door 2-18 Features and Controls

PASS-Key® III+ Electronic This device complies with RSS-210 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic of Industry Canada. Operation is Immobilizer subject to the following two Immobilizer Operation The PASS-Key III+ system operates conditions: This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ on a radio frequency subject to 1. This device may not cause (Personalized Automotive Security Federal Communications interference. System) theft-deterrent system. Commission (FCC) Rules and with PASS-Key® III+ is a passive Industry Canada. 2. This device must accept any theft-deterrent system. interference received, including This device complies with Part 15 of interference that may cause The system is automatically armed the FCC Rules. Operation is undesired operation of the when the key is removed from subject to the following two device. the ignition. conditions: Changes or modifications to The system is automatically 1. This device may not cause this system by other than an disarmed when the key is turned to harmful interference. authorized service facility could void ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or 2. This device must accept any authorization to use this equipment. START from the LOCK/OFF interference received, including position. PASS-Key III+ uses a radio interference that may cause frequency transponder in the key You do not have to manually arm or undesired operation. that matches a decoder in the disarm the system. vehicle. The security light comes on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system. When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses an incorrect key, the vehicle does not start. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start the Features and Controls 2-19 vehicle will be discouraged because It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ To program the new additional key: of the high number of electrical decoder to learn the transponder 1. Verify that the new key has a key codes. value of a new or replacement key. 1 Up to 10 keys may be programmed stamped on it. If the engine does not start and the to the vehicle. The following security light on the instrument panel 2. Insert the already programmed procedure is for programming comes on when trying to start the key in the ignition and start the additional keys only. If all the vehicle, there may be a problem with engine. If the engine does not currently programmed keys are lost your theft-deterrent system. Turn the start, see your dealer/retailer for or do not operate, you must see ignition off and try again. service. your dealer/retailer or a locksmith 3. After the engine has started, turn If the engine still does not start, and who can service PASS-Key® III+ to the key to LOCK/OFF, and the key appears to be undamaged, have keys made and programmed remove the key. try another ignition key and check the to the system. fuses. See Fuses and Circuit 4. Insert the key to be programmed See your dealer/retailer or a Breakers on page 5-88 for additional and turn it to the ON/RUN locksmith who can service information. If the engine still does position within five seconds of PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key not start with the other key, the the original key being turned blank that is cut exactly as the vehicle needs service. If the vehicle to the LOCK/OFF position. ignition key that operates the does start, the first key may be faulty. system. The security light turns off once See your dealer/retailer who can the key has been programmed. service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an emergency, 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 contact Roadside Assistance. See if additional keys are to be Roadside Assistance Program on programmed. page 7-6. 2-20 Features and Controls

If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lost or Starting and • Avoid making hard stops for damaged, see your dealer/retailer the first 200 miles (322 km) or a locksmith to have a new Operating Your or so. During this time the new key made. Vehicle brake linings are not yet The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT broken in. Hard stops with new SYSTEM message displays on New Vehicle Break-In linings can mean premature the Driver Information Center (DIC) wear and earlier replacement. when there is a problem with the Notice: The vehicle does Follow this breaking-in theft-deterrent system. See not need an elaborate break-in. guideline every time you get DIC Warnings and Messages on But it will perform better in new brake linings. page 3-50 for additional information. the long run if you follow these • Do not tow a trailer during guidelines: break-in. See Towing a Do not leave the key or device • If you have all-wheel drive, Trailer on page 4-24 for the that disarms or deactivates the theft keep your speed at 55 mph trailer towing capabilities deterrent system in the vehicle. (88 km/h) or less for the of your vehicle and more first 500 miles (805 km). information. • Do not drive at any one Following break-in, engine speed constant speed, fast or slow, and load can be gradually for the first 500 miles (805 km). increased. Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle. Features and Controls 2-21

Ignition Positions turn it only with your hand. If the R (ON/RUN): This position can be key cannot be turned by hand, see used to operate the electrical your dealer/retailer. accessories and to display some instrument panel warning and ( (LOCK/OFF): This position locks indicator lights. The switch stays in the ignition and transmission. The this position when the engine is key can be removed in LOCK/OFF. running. The transmission is also The shift lever must be in P (Park) unlocked in this position. If you leave to turn the ignition switch to the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be drained. You The steering can bind with the may not be able to start the vehicle if wheels turned off center. If this the battery is allowed to drain for an happens, move the steering wheel extended period of time. from right to left while turning the key The ignition switch has four different to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this doesn’t / (START): This is the position positions. work, then the vehicle needs service. that starts the engine. When In order to shift out of P (Park), the the engine starts, release the key. ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is ignition must be in ON/RUN or The ignition switch will return to the position in which you can ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake ON/RUN for driving. operate the electrical accessories or pedal must be applied. items plugged into the accessory Notice: Using a tool to force the power outlets. This position unlocks key to turn in the ignition could the ignition and steering wheel. cause damage to the switch or Use this position if the vehicle must break the key. Use the correct key, be pushed or towed. make sure it is all the way in, and 2-22 Features and Controls

Retained Accessory Starting the Engine components. If the ignition key is turned to the START position, Power (RAP) Move the shift lever to P (Park) or and then released when the These vehicle accessories can be N (Neutral). The engine will not start engine begins cranking, the used for up to 10 minutes after in any other position. To restart the engine will continue cranking for a the ignition key is turned off: engine when the vehicle is already few seconds or until the vehicle moving, use N (Neutral) only. • Audio System starts. If the engine does not start Notice: Do not try to shift to and the key is held in START, • Power Windows P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. cranking will be stopped after • Sunroof (if equipped) If you do, you could damage 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear Power to the windows and sunroof the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle is stopped. damage, this system also will work up to 10 minutes or prevents cranking if the engine is until a door is opened. Starting Procedure already running. Engine cranking The radio continues to work for 1. With your foot off the accelerator can be stopped by turning the 10 minutes or until the driver’s door pedal, turn the ignition to START. ignition switch to the ACC/ is opened. When the engine starts, let go of ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position. For an additional 10 minutes of the key. The idle speed will slow operation, close all the doors and down as the engine warms. Do Notice: Cranking the engine for turn the key to ON/RUN and not race the engine immediately long periods of time, by returning then back to LOCK/OFF. after starting it. Operate the the key to the START position engine and transmission gently to immediately after cranking has All these features will work when allow the oil to warm up and ended, can overheat and damage the key is in the ON/RUN or lubricate all moving parts. the cranking motor, and drain the ACC/ACCESSORY positions. The vehicle has a battery. Wait at least 15 seconds Computer-Controlled Cranking between each try, to let the System. This feature assists in cranking motor cool down. starting the engine and protects Features and Controls 2-23

2. If the engine does not start after Notice: The engine is designed To Use the Engine Coolant 5-10 seconds, especially in to work with the electronics Heater very cold weather (below 0°F in the vehicle. If you add electrical 1. Turn off the engine. or −18°C), it could be flooded with parts or accessories, you could too much gasoline. Try pushing change the way the engine 2. Open the hood and unwrap the the accelerator pedal all the way operates. Before adding electrical electrical cord. The cord is to the floor and holding it there as equipment, check with your located on the driver side of the you hold the key in START for up dealer/retailer. If you do not, the engine compartment. It is to a maximum of 15 seconds. engine might not perform routed around the windshield Wait at least 15 seconds between properly. Any resulting damage washer fluid reservoir. each try, to allow the cranking would not be covered by the motor to cool down. When the vehicle warranty. engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle Engine Coolant Heater starts briefly but then stops again, repeat these steps. This clears The engine coolant heater can the extra gasoline from the provide easier starting and better engine. Do not race the engine fuel economy during engine immediately after starting it. warm-up in cold weather conditions − Operate the engine and at or below 0°F ( 18°C). Vehicles transmission gently until the oil with an engine coolant heater should warms up and lubricates all be plugged in at least four hours moving parts. before starting. Some models may have an internal thermostat in the cord which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 0°F (−18°C). 2-24 Features and Controls

3. Plug the cord into a normal, in the area where you will be grounded 110-volt AC outlet. parking the vehicle for the best { CAUTION advice on this. { It is dangerous to get out of the CAUTION Automatic Transmission vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake Plugging the cord into an Operation firmly set. The vehicle can roll. ungrounded outlet could cause an The automatic transmission has a Do not leave the vehicle when the electrical shock. Also, the wrong shift lever located on the console engine is running unless you have kind of extension cord could between the seats. overheat and cause a fire. You to. If you have left the engine could be seriously injured. Plug running, the vehicle can move the cord into a properly grounded suddenly. You or others could be three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If injured. To be sure the vehicle will the cord will not reach, use a not move, even when you are on heavy-duty three-prong extension fairly level ground, always set the cord rated for at least 15 amps. parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into 4. Before starting the engine, be Park on page 2-28. If you are sure to unplug and store the pulling a trailer, see Towing a cord as it was before to keep it Trailer on page 4-24. away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be Make sure the shift lever is fully in damaged. P (Park): This position locks the P (Park) before starting the The length of time the heater should front wheels. It is the best position to engine. The vehicle has an remain plugged in depends on use when starting the engine automatic transmission shift lock several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer because the vehicle cannot move control system. You must fully apply easily. the regular brake first and then Features and Controls 2-25 press the shift lever button before N (Neutral): In this position, the D (Drive): This position is for shifting from P (Park) when the engine does not connect with normal driving. It provides the best ignition key is in ON/RUN. If the wheels. To restart the engine fuel economy. If you need more you cannot shift out of P (Park), when the vehicle is already moving, power for passing, and you are: ease pressure on the shift lever, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use • Going less than 35 mph then push the shift lever all the way N (Neutral) when the vehicle (56 km/h), push the accelerator into P (Park) as you maintain is being towed. pedal about halfway down. brake application. Then press the • Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or shift lever button and move the shift { CAUTION lever into another gear. See more, push the accelerator all the way down. Shifting Out of Park on page 2-29. Shifting into a drive gear while the R (Reverse): Use this gear to engine is running at high speed is Notice: If the vehicle seems to back up. dangerous. Unless your foot is accelerate slowly or not shift firmly on the brake pedal, the gears when you go faster, and you Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) vehicle could move very rapidly. continue to drive the vehicle that while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and hit way, you could damage the forward could damage the people or objects. Do not shift into transmission. Have the vehicle transmission. The repairs would a drive gear while the engine is serviced right away. You can drive not be covered by the vehicle running at high speed. in L (Low) when you are driving warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) less than 35 mph (56 km/h) and only after the vehicle is stopped. D (Drive) for higher speeds Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) until then. To rock the vehicle back and or N (Neutral) with the engine forth to get out of snow, ice or sand running at high speed may L (Low): This position gives you without damaging the transmission, damage the transmission. The access to gear ranges. This see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in repairs would not be covered by provides more engine braking but Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on the vehicle warranty. Be sure lower fuel economy than D (Drive). page 4-15. the engine is not running at high You can use it on very steep speed when shifting the vehicle. hills, or in deep snow or mud. 2-26 Features and Controls

Electronic Range page 3-42 and DIC Operation and both normal and Tow/Haul mode. Select (ERS) Mode Displays on page 3-43 for more While using the ERS, cruise control information. The number displayed in and the tow/haul mode can be ERS mode allows you to choose the the DIC is the highest gear that the used. See Tow/Haul Mode following. top-gear limit of the transmission transmission will be allowed to and the vehicle’s speed while driving operate in. This means that all gears Tow/Haul Mode down hill or towing a trailer. The below that number are available. For vehicle has an electronic shift example, when 4 (Fourth) is shown _ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle may position indicator within the next to the L, 1 (First) through have a Tow/Haul mode. instrument panel cluster. When 4 (Fourth) gears are automatically using the ERS Mode a number will shifted by the vehicle. The The button is located on the display next to the L, indicating transmission will not shift into instrument panel under the climate the current gear that has been 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is controls. selected. used or you shift back into D (Drive). Push the button to activate the To use this feature: While in L (Low), the transmission system. Push it again to deactivate 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low). will prevent shifting to a lower the system. You can use this feature gear range if the engine speed is to assist when towing or hauling a 2. Press the plus/minus button heavy load. located on the shift lever, to too high. You have a brief period of increase or decrease the gear time to slow the vehicle. If vehicle When Tow/Haul is activated the range available. speed is not reduced within the time Tow/Haul symbol will come on the allowed, the lower gear range instrument panel cluster. See When you shift from D (Drive) to shift will not be completed. You must “Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing a L (Low), the transmission will shift to further slow the vehicle, then Trailer on page 4-24 for more a pre-determined lower gear range. press the − (Minus) button to the information. The highest gear available for this desired lower gear range. pre-determined range is displayed next to the L in the DIC. See Driver Automatic Engine Grade braking is Information Center (DIC) on not available when the ERS is active. It is available in D (Drive) for Features and Controls 2-27

Automatic Engine Grade Parking Brake Make sure that the parking brake Braking is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving. Automatic Engine Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill To release the parking brake, hold grade. It maintains vehicle speed by the regular brake pedal down, automatically implementing a shift then push down momentarily on the schedule that uses the engine and parking brake pedal until you feel the transmission to slow the vehicle. the pedal release. Slowly pull The system will automatically your foot up off the park brake command downshifts to reduce pedal. If the parking brake is vehicle speed, until the brake pedal not released when you begin to is no longer being pressed. drive, the brake system warning light will be on and a chime will sound While in the Electronic Range warning you that the parking Select (ERS) mode, grade braking brake is still on. is deactivated, allowing the To set the parking brake, hold the driver to select a range and limiting regular brake pedal down, then push If you are towing a trailer and are the highest gear available. Grade the parking brake pedal down. parking on a hill, see Towing a braking is available for normal If the ignition is on, the brake system Trailer on page 4-24. driving and in Tow/Haul mode. warning light will come on. See See Automatic Transmission Brake System Warning Light Operation on page 2-24. on page 3-34. Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. 2-28 Features and Controls

Shifting Into Park 3. Turn the ignition key to If you have to leave the vehicle with LOCK/OFF. the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking { CAUTION 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have moved the shift lever It can be dangerous to get out of with the ignition key in your hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). into P (Park), hold the regular brake the vehicle if the shift lever is not pedal down. Then, see if you can fully in P (Park) with the parking Leaving the Vehicle with the move the shift lever away from brake firmly set. The vehicle can Engine Running P (Park) without first pushing the roll. If you have left the engine button. running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be { CAUTION If you can, it means that the shift injured. To be sure the vehicle will lever was not fully locked in P (Park). It can be dangerous to leave the not move, even when you are on Torque Lock fairly level ground, use the steps vehicle with the engine running. that follow. If you are pulling a The vehicle could move suddenly Torque lock is when the weight of the trailer, see Towing a Trailer on if the shift lever is not fully in vehicle puts too much force on the page 4-24. P (Park) with the parking brake parking pawl in the transmission. firmly set. And, if you leave the This happens when parking on a hill vehicle with the engine running, it and shifting the transmission into 1. Hold the brake pedal down and could overheat and even catch P (Park) is not done properly and set the parking brake. See fire. You or others could be then it is difficult to shift out of Parking Brake on page 2-27 for P (Park). To prevent torque lock, set more information. injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running. the parking brake and then shift into 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) P (Park). To find out how, see by holding in the button on the “Shifting Into Park” listed previously. shift lever and pushing the shift lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle. Features and Controls 2-29

If torque lock does occur, your If the vehicle has an uncharged Parking Over Things vehicle may need to be pushed battery or a battery with low voltage, uphill by another vehicle to relieve try charging or jump starting the That Burn the parking pawl pressure, so battery. See Jump Starting on you can shift out of P (Park). page 5-29 for more information. { CAUTION To shift out of P (Park): Shifting Out of Park Things that can burn could touch 1. Apply the brake pedal. hot exhaust parts under the The vehicle is equipped with 2. Press the shift lever button. vehicle and ignite. Do not park an electronic shift lock release over papers, leaves, dry grass, or system. The shift lock release is 3. Move the shift lever to the other things that can burn. designed to: desired position. • Prevent ignition key removal If you still are unable to shift out of unless the shift lever is in P (Park): P (Park) with the shift lever 1. Fully release the shift lever button fully released, and button. • Prevent movement of the shift 2. While holding down the brake lever out of P (Park), unless pedal, press the shift lever the ignition is in ON/RUN button again. or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied. 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position. The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an If you still cannot move the shift uncharged or low voltage (less lever from P (Park), see your than 9 volt) battery. dealer/retailer. 2-30 Features and Controls

Engine Exhaust Running the Vehicle CAUTION (Continued) { While Parked CAUTION • There are holes or openings It is better not to park with the in the vehicle body from engine running. But if you ever have Engine exhaust contains Carbon damage or after-market to, here are some things to know. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed. can cause unconsciousness and { CAUTION even death. If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is Idling a vehicle in an enclosed Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle: area with poor ventilation is • The vehicle idles in areas • Drive it only with the windows dangerous. Engine exhaust may with poor ventilation (parking completely down. enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust garages, tunnels, deep snow • Have the vehicle repaired contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) that may block underbody immediately. which cannot be seen or smelled. airflow or tail pipes). It can cause unconsciousness Never park the vehicle with the • The exhaust smells or and even death. Never run the engine running in an enclosed sounds strange or different. engine in an enclosed area that area such as a garage or a • The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air has no fresh air ventilation. For due to corrosion or damage. ventilation. more information, see Engine • The vehicle’s exhaust system Exhaust on page 2-30. has been modified, damaged or improperly repaired. (Continued) Features and Controls 2-31

Mirrors Automatic Dimming Mirror { CAUTION Operation It can be dangerous to get out of Automatic Dimming Automatic dimming reduces the the vehicle if the automatic Rearview Mirror glare from the headlamps of transmission shift lever is not fully the vehicle behind you. The dimming The vehicle has an automatic feature comes on and the indicator in P (Park) with the parking brake dimming inside rearview mirror. ﬁrmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do light illuminates each time the ® not leave the vehicle when the Vehicles with OnStar have three ignition is turned to start. additional control buttons located at engine is running unless you have Cleaning the Mirror to. If you have left the engine the bottom of the mirror. See your running, the vehicle can move dealer/retailer for more information Do not spray glass cleaner directly about OnStar® and how to subscribe on the mirror. Use a soft towel suddenly. You or others could be ¨ injured. To be sure the vehicle will to it. See OnStar System on dampened with water. not move, even when you are on page 2-41 for more information about the services OnStar® provides. fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift O (On/Off): Press to turn the lever to P (Park). dimming feature on or off.

Follow the proper steps to be sure The vehicle may also have a Rear the vehicle will not move. See Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear Shifting Into Park on page 2-28. Vision Camera (RVC) on page 2-37 for more information. If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on If the vehicle has RVC, the page 4-24. O (On/Off) button for turning the automatic dimming feature on or off will not be available. 2-32 Features and Controls

Outside Power Mirrors 3. Adjust each outside mirror so Outside Power Foldaway that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen. Mirrors 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return it to the original position. Using hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on convex mirror Controls for the outside power attachments could decrease mirror performance. mirrors are located on the driver Vehicles with outside power door armrest. Turn Signal Indicator foldaway mirrors have the controls To adjust each mirror: located on the driver door The vehicle may have a turn signal armrest. 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the indicator lamp that is built into driver or passenger side the mirror housing. The turn signal Mirror Adjustment mirror. lamp flashes with the use of the 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out vehicle’s turn signal and hazard 2. Press one of the four arrows to the driving position. located on the control pad to flashers. 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to adjust the mirror. the folded position. Features and Controls 2-33

Resetting the Power Foldaway Automatic Dimming Feature Park Tilt Mirrors Mirrors The driver outside mirror adjusts for If the vehicle has the memory Reset the power foldaway mirrors if: the glare of the headlamps behind package, the outside mirrors have a you. See Automatic Dimming • The mirrors are accidentally park tilt feature. This feature tilts the Rearview Mirror on page 2-31 for obstructed while folding. outside mirrors to a preselected information on how to turn this position when the vehicle is in • They are accidentally manually feature on. R (Reverse). This allows the driver to folded/unfolded. view the curb for parallel parking. Turn Signal Indicator • The mirrors vibrate at normal The passenger and/or driver mirror The vehicle may have a turn signal driving speeds. returns to its original position indicator lamp that is built into when the vehicle is shifted out of Fold and unfold the mirrors one time the mirror housing. The turn signal R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned using the mirror controls to reset lamp ﬂashes with the use of the off or to OFF/LOCK. them to their normal position. vehicle’s turn signal and hazard A popping noise may be heard ﬂashers. This feature can be turned on or off during the resetting of the power through the Driver Information foldaway mirrors. This sound Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle is normal after a manual folding Customization on page 3-59 operation. and Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-5 for more information. 2-34 Features and Controls

Outside Convex Mirror Object Detection { CAUTION Systems { CAUTION The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system does not A convex mirror can make things Assist (URPA) replace driver vision. It cannot (like other vehicles) look farther detect: away than they really are. If you For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear • objects that are below the cut too sharply into the right lane, Parking Assist (URPA) system, it bumper, underneath the you could hit a vehicle on the operates at speeds less than 5 mph vehicle, or if they are too right. Check the inside mirror or (8 km/h), and assists the driver with close or far from the vehicle parking and avoiding objects while in glance over your shoulder before • children, pedestrians, changing lanes. R (Reverse). The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect the bicyclists, or pets. The passenger side mirror is convex distance to an object up to 8 feet If you do not use proper care shaped. A convex mirror’s surface (2.5 m) behind the vehicle, and at before and while backing; vehicle is curved so more can be seen from least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the damage, injury, or death could the driver seat. ground. occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the vehicle before backing up. While backing, be Outside Heated Mirrors sure to look for objects and check < (Rear Window Defogger): the vehicle’s mirrors. Press to heat the mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-20 for more information. Features and Controls 2-35

How the System Works To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the URPA comes on automatically ground and below liftgate level. when the shift lever is moved into Objects must also be within 8 feet R (Reverse). The rear display briefly (2.5 m) from the rear bumper. illuminates to indicate the system This distance may be less during is working. warmer or humid weather. URPA operates only at speeds less A single beep sounds the first time than 5 mph (8 km/h). If the vehicle an object is detected. Beeping is above this speed, the red light on may occur beginning at 23 inches the rear display flashes. (0.6 m). Beeping occurs for a short time when the vehicle is closer than 23 inches (0.6 m) and again The display is located in the at 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object. headliner and can be seen by looking over your right shoulder. URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance and system information. 2-36 Features and Controls

The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehicle • A tow bar is attached to the gets closer to a detected object: vehicle. • The vehicle’s bumper is Description English Metric damaged. Take the vehicle to amber light 8 ft 2.5 m your dealer/retailer to repair the amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 m system. amber/amber/red lights 23 in 0.6 m • Other conditions may affect amber/amber/red lights ﬂashing 1 ft 0.3 m system performance, such as vibrations from a jackhammer or The system can be disabled through This may occur under the following the compression of air brakes on the Driver Information Center conditions: a very large truck. (DIC). See “Park Assist” under DIC • The driver disables the system. If the system is still disabled, after Operation and Displays on • The ultrasonic sensors are driving forward at least 15 mph page 3-43 for more information. (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your not clean. Keep the vehicle’s rear dealer/retailer. When the System Does bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, Not Seem to Work Properly ice and slush. For cleaning If the URPA system does not instructions, see Washing Your activate due to a temporary Vehicle on page 5-83. condition, the message PARK • A trailer was attached to the ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC vehicle, or a bicycle or an object and a red light will be shown on the was hanging out of the liftgate rear URPA display when the shift during the last drive cycle, the red lever is moved into R (Reverse). light may illuminate in the rear display. Once theattached object is removed, URPA will return to normal operation. Features and Controls 2-37

Rear Vision on the inside rear view mirror. Once CAUTION (Continued) the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), Camera (RVC) the video image automatically The vehicle may have a Rear Vision maneuvers or where there could disappears from the inside rear view Camera system. Read this entire be cross-traffic. Your judged mirror. section before using it. distances using the screen will differ from actual distances. Turning the Rear Vision Camera System Off or On { CAUTION So if you do not use proper care before backing up, you could hit a To turn off the rear vision camera The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) vehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist, system, press and hold z, located system does not replace driver or pet, resulting in vehicle on the inside rearview mirror, vision. RVC does not: damage, injury, or death. Even until the left indicator light turns off. • Detect objects that are though the vehicle has the RVC The rear camera vision display outside the camera’s ﬁeld of system, always check carefully is now disabled. view, below the bumper, or before backing up by checking To turn the rear vision camera underneath the vehicle. behind and around the vehicle. system on again, press and hold z • Detect children, pedestrians, until the left indicator light bicyclists, or pets. Vehicles Without Navigation illuminates. The rear vision camera Do not back the vehicle by only System system display is now enabled looking at the rear vision camera and the display will appear in the The rear vision camera system is mirror normally. screen, or use the screen during designed to help the driver longer, higher speed backing when backing up by displaying a (Continued) view of the area behind the vehicle. When the key is in the ON/RUN position and the driver shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse), the video image automatically appears 2-38 Features and Controls

Vehicles With Navigation 3. Select the Rear Camera Options The delay that is received after System screen button. The Rear Camera shifting out of R (Reverse) is Options screen displays. approximately 10 seconds. The The rear vision camera system is delay can be cancelled by designed to help the driver when performing one of the following: backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle. When • Pressing a hard key on the the driver shifts the vehicle into navigation system. R (Reverse), the video image • Shifting in to P (Park). automatically appears on the navigation screen. Once the driver • Reach a vehicle speed of shifts out of R (Reverse), the 5 mph (8 km/h). navigation screen will go back to the There is a message on the rear last screen that had been displayed, vision camera screen that states after a delay. “Check Surroundings for Safety”. Turning the Rear Vision Camera Adjusting the Brightness and System On or Off 4. Select the Video screen button. Contrast of the Screen To turn the rear vision camera When the Video screen button To adjust the brightness and system on or off: is highlighted the RVC system contrast of the screen, press the is on. 1. Shift into P (Park). MENU button while the rear vision camera image is on the display. 2. Press the MENU button to enter Any adjustments made will the conﬁgure menu options, then only affect the rear vision camera press the MENU hard key to screen. select Display or touch the Display screen button. Features and Controls 2-39

](Brightness): Touch the + (plus) The symbols appear when an object Rear Vision Camera Error or – (minus) screen buttons to has been detected by the URPA Messages system. The symbol may cover the increase or decrease the brightness Service Rear Vision Camera object when viewing the navigation of the screen. System: This message can display screen. _ when the system is not receiving (Contrast): Touch the + (plus) To turn the symbols on or off: information it requires from or – (minus) screen buttons to other vehicle systems. increase or decrease the contrast of 1. Make sure that URPA has not the screen. been disabled. If any other problem occurs or if a 2. Shift into P (Park). problem persists, see your Symbols dealer/retailer. 3. Press the MENU hard key to The navigation system may have a enter the conﬁgure menu feature that lets the driver view options, then press the MENU symbols on the navigation screen hard key repeatedly until Display while using the rear vision camera. is selected or touch the Display The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist screen button. (URPA) system must not be disabled to use the caution symbols. If URPA 4. Select the Rear Camera Options has been disabled and the symbols screen button. The Rear Camera have been turned on, the Rear Options screen will display. Parking Assist Symbols Unavailable 5. Touch the Symbols screen error message may display. See button. The screen button will be Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist highlighted when on. (URPA) on page 2-34. 2-40 Features and Controls

Rear Vision Camera Location The following illustration shows the When the System Does Not ﬁeld of view that the camera Seem To Work Properly provides. The rear vision camera system might not work properly or display a clear image if: • The RVC is turned off. See “Turning the Rear Camera System On or Off” earlier in this section. • It is dark. • The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens. The camera is located above the license plate. • Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens. The area displayed by the camera Clean the lens, rinse it with water, is limited and does not display and wipe it with a soft cloth. objects that are close to either corner or under the bumper. The area displayed can vary depending on vehicle orientation or road conditions. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. Features and Controls 2-41

• The back of the vehicle is in an The fast flash conditions are used OnStar® System accident, the position and to protect the video device from mounting angle of the camera can high temperature conditions. change or the camera can be Once conditions return to normal affected. Be sure to have the the device will reset and the camera and its position and green indicator will stop flashing. mounting angle checked at your During any of these fault conditions, dealer/retailer. the display will be blank and the • There are extreme temperature indicator will continue to flash as long OnStar uses several innovative changes. as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or technologies and live advisors to until the conditions return to normal. The rear vision camera system provide a wide range of safety, display in the rearview mirror may Pressing and holding z when the security, information, and turn off or not appear as expected left indicator light is flashing will turn convenience services. If the airbags due to one of the following off the video display along with deploy, the system is designed to conditions. If this occurs the left the left indicator light. make an automatic call to OnStar indicator light on the mirror will flash. Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent • A slow flash may indicate a loss of to your location. If the keys are video signal, or no video signal locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at present during the reverse cycle. 1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a • A fast flash may indicate that the signal sent to unlock the doors. display has been on for the OnStar Hands-Free Calling, maximum allowable time during a including 30 trial minutes good for reverse cycle, or the display has 60 days, is available on most reached an Over Temperature vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn limit. Navigation service, with one trial route, is available on most vehicles. 2-42 Features and Controls

Press the OnStar button to have an Not all OnStar services are available • Stolen Vehicle Location OnStar advisor contact Roadside on all vehicles. To check if this Assistance Service. vehicle is able to provide the services • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle described below, or for a full OnStar service is provided subject Alert description of OnStar services and to the OnStar Terms and Conditions system limitations, see the OnStar • OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email included in the OnStar Subscriber Owner’s Guide in the glove box or glove box literature. • GM Goodwrench On Demand visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca Diagnostics Some services such as Remote (Canada), contact OnStar at Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) • OnStar Hands-Free Calling with Location Assistance may not be or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the 30 trial minutes available until the owner of the OnStar button to speak with an • OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only) vehicle registers with OnStar. After OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, the first prepaid year, contact 7 days a week. OnStar Services Included with OnStar to select a monthly or annual Directions & Connections Plan OnStar Services Available subscription payment plan. If a • All Safe and Sound Plan Services payment plan is not selected, the with the Safe & Sound Plan • OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation OnStar system and all services, • Automatic Notification of (If equipped) or Driving including airbag notification Airbag Deployment and emergency services, may be Directions - Advisor delivered • Advanced Automatic Crash deactivated and no longer available. • RideAssist Notification (AACN) (If equipped) For more information visit • Information and Convenience • Link to Emergency Services onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca Services (Canada), or press the OnStar • Roadside Assistance button to speak with an advisor. Features and Controls 2-43

OnStar Hands-Free Calling OnStar Turn-by-Turn OnStar Steering Wheel OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows Navigation Controls eligible OnStar subscribers to Vehicles with the OnStar This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute make and receive calls using voice Turn-by-Turn Navigation system button that can be used to commands. Hands-Free Calling can provide voice-guided driving interact with OnStar Hands-Free is fully integrated into the vehicle, directions. Press the OnStar button Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel and can be used with OnStar to have an OnStar advisor locate a Controls on page 3-119 for more Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Most business or address and download information. vehicles include 30 trial minutes driving directions to the vehicle. On some vehicles, the mute button good for 60 days. Hands-Free Voice-guided directions to the can be used to dial numbers Calling can also be linked to a desired destination will play through into voice mail systems, or to dial Verizon Wireless service plan in the the audio system speakers. See the phone extensions. See the OnStar U.S. or a Bell Mobility service OnStar Owner’s Guide for more Owner’s Guide for more plan in Canada, depending on information. eligibility. To ﬁnd out more, refer to information. the OnStar Owner’s Guide in OnStar Virtual Advisor How OnStar Service Works the vehicle’s glove box, visit OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of The OnStar system can record and onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak OnStar Hands-Free Calling that uses transmit vehicle information. This with an OnStar advisor by pressing minutes to access location-based information is automatically sent to the OnStar button or calling weather, local traffic reports, and an OnStar Call Center when the 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827). stock quotes. Press the phone button OnStar button is pressed, the and give a few simple voice emergency button is pressed, or if commands to browse through the the airbags or AACN system deploy. various topics. See the OnStar This information usually includes Owner’s Guide for more information. the vehicle’s GPS location and, in This feature is only available in the the event of a crash, additional continental U.S. information regarding the crash that 2-44 Features and Controls the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the The vehicle must have a working Universal Home direction from which the vehicle electrical system, including adequate was hit). When the Virtual Advisor battery power, for the OnStar Remote System feature of OnStar Hands-Free equipment to operate. There are The Universal Home Remote Calling is used, the vehicle also other problems OnStar cannot System provides a way to replace sends OnStar the vehicle’s control that may prevent OnStar up to three hand-held GPS location so they can provide from providing OnStar service at any Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters services where it is located. particular time or place. Some used to activate devices such examples are damage to important OnStar service cannot work unless as garage door openers, security parts of the vehicle in a crash, the vehicle is in a place where systems, and home lighting. hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather OnStar has an agreement with a or wireless phone network This device complies with Part 15 of wireless service provider for service congestion. the FCC Rules. Operation is in that area. OnStar service also subject to the following two cannot work unless the vehicle is in Your Responsibility conditions: a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for Increase the volume of the radio if 1. This device may not cause that area has coverage, network the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. harmful interference. capacity and reception when If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system may not be 2. This device must accept any the service is needed, and interference received, including technology that is compatible with functioning properly. Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle interference that may cause the OnStar service. Not all services undesired operation. are available everywhere, diagnostic. If the light appears clear particularly in remote or enclosed (no light is appearing), your OnStar areas, or at all times. subscription has expired and all services have been deactivated. Location information about the Press the OnStar button to conﬁrm vehicle is only available if the GPS that the OnStar equipment is active. satellite signals are unobstructed and available. Features and Controls 2-45

This device complies with RSS-210 Universal Home Remote Read the instructions completely of Industry Canada. Operation is before attempting to program subject to the following two System Operation the Universal Home Remote. conditions: Because of the steps involved, it 1. This device may not cause may be helpful to have another interference. person available to assist you in the programming the Universal Home 2. This device must accept any Remote. interference received, including interference that may cause Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles undesired operation of the If there is one triangular Light as well as for future Universal device. Emitting Diode (LED) indicator light Home Remote programming. It is above the Universal Home Changes or modiﬁcations to also recommended that upon Remote buttons, follow the this system by other than an the sale of the vehicle, the instructions below. authorized service facility could void programmed Universal Home authorization to use this equipment. This system provides a way to Remote buttons should be erased replace up to three remote control for security purposes. See “Erasing transmitters used to activate devices Universal Home Remote Buttons” such as garage door openers, later in this section. security systems, and home When programming a garage door, automation devices. park outside of the garage. Park Do not use the Universal Home directly in line with and facing Remote with any garage door the garage door opener motor-head opener that does not have the stop or gate motor-head. Be sure that and reverse feature. This includes people and objects are clear of the any garage door opener model garage door or gate that is being manufactured before April 1, 1982. programmed. 2-46 Features and Controls

It is recommended that a new To program up to three devices: 2. Hold the end of your hand-held battery be installed in your transmitter about 1 to 3 inches hand-held transmitter for quicker (3 to 8 cm) away from the and more accurate transmission of Universal Home Remote buttons the radio-frequency signal. while keeping the indicator light in view. The hand-held transmitter Programming the Universal was supplied by the manufacturer Home Remote System of your garage door opener For questions or help programming receiver (motor head unit). the Universal Home Remote 3. At the same time, press and hold System, call 1-800-355-3515 or go both the Universal Home Remote to www.homelink.com. button to be used to control the Programming a garage door opener garage door and the hand-held involves time-sensitive actions, transmitter button. Do not release so read the entire procedure before 1. From inside the vehicle, press the Universal Home Remote starting. Otherwise, the device and hold down the two outside button or the hand-held will time out and the procedure will buttons at the same time, transmitter button until Step 4 have to be repeated. releasing only when the Universal has been completed. Home Remote indicator light Some entry gates and garage begins to ﬂash, after 20 seconds. door openers may require This step will erase the factory substitution of Step 3 with the settings or all previously procedure noted in “Gate programmed buttons. Operator and Canadian Do not hold down the buttons for Programming” later in this longer than 30 seconds and do section. not repeat this step to program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons. Features and Controls 2-47

4. The indicator light on the It may be helpful to have another 7. Firmly press and release the Universal Home Remote will flash person assist with the remaining “Learn” or “Smart” button. slowly at first and then rapidly steps. After you press this button, you after Universal Home Remote will have 30 seconds to successfully receives the complete Step 8. frequency signal from the 8. Immediately return to the vehicle. hand-held transmitter. Release Firmly press and hold the both buttons. Universal Home Remote button, 5. Press and hold the newly-trained chosen in Step 3 to control the Universal Home Remote button garage door, for two seconds, and observe the indicator light. and then release it. If the garage If the indicator light stays on door does not move, press and continuously, the programming is hold the same button a second complete and the garage door time for two seconds, and then should move when the Universal release it. Again, if the door does Home Remote button is pressed not move, press and hold the and released. There is no need to 6. After Steps 1 through 5 have same button a third time for continue programming Steps 6 been completed, locate inside two seconds, and then release. through 8. the garage the garage door The Universal Home Remote opener receiver (motor-head If the Universal Home Remote should now activate the unit). Locate the “Learn” or garage door. indicator light blinks rapidly “Smart” button. The name and for two seconds and then turns color of the button may vary To program the remaining two to a constant light, continue by manufacturer. Universal Home Remote buttons, with the programming Steps 6 begin with Step 2 of “Programming through 8. the Universal Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1, as 2-48 Features and Controls this will erase all previous you live, replace Step 3 under Erasing Universal Home programming from the Universal “Programming Universal Home Remote Buttons Home Remote buttons. Remote” with the following: The programmed buttons should be Gate Operator and Canadian Continue to press and hold the erased when the vehicle is sold Programming Universal Home Remote button or the lease ends. while you press and release every If you have questions or need help two seconds (cycle) the hand-held To erase all programmed buttons on programming the Universal transmitter button until the frequency the Universal Home Remote device: Home Remote System, call signal has been successfully 1-800-355-3515 or go to accepted by the Universal Home www.homelink.com. Remote. The Universal Home Canadian radio-frequency laws Remote indicator light will flash require transmitter signals to time slowly at first and then rapidly. out or quit after several seconds of Proceed with Step 4 under transmission. This may not be “Programming Universal Home long enough for Universal Home Remote” to complete. Remote to pick up the signal during programming. Similarly, some Using Universal Home Remote U.S. gate operators are Press and hold the appropriate manufactured to time out in the Universal Home Remote button for same manner. at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on while the 1. Press and hold down the If you live in Canada, or you are signal is being transmitted. two outside buttons until having difficulty programming a gate the indicator light begins to operator or garage door opener flash, after 20 seconds. by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote” 2. Release both buttons. procedures, regardless of where Features and Controls 2-49

Reprogramming a Single Storage Areas Center Console Storage Universal Home Remote Button Glove Box To reprogram any of the three Lift the glove box handle up to open Universal Home Remote buttons, it. Use the key to lock and unlock repeat the programming instructions the glove box. earlier in this section, beginning with Step 2. Cupholders For help or information on the Universal Home Remote System, There are two cupholders, with call the customer assistance phone removable liners, located in front of number under Customer Assistance the center console. There may be Offices on page 7-4. cupholders located in the second row seat armrest. To access, pull the armrest down. There are additional Pull up on the lever, located on the cupholders located on each side of front of the center console armrest, the third row seat and in each door. to slide it forward and backward. To There may be cupholders located at open the armrest storage area, press the rear of the center console. To the button located on the front of the access, pull the handle down. armrest. There is additional storage under the armrest. Move the armrest Instrument Panel Storage all the way to the rear position, slide the cover back and remove the tray. This vehicle has an instrument panel storage area located above the radio. To open the cover, press the button. 2-50 Features and Controls

Second Row Center { Console CAUTION Never open more than one of the three latches at a time to help avoid personal injury and damage to the console.

Notice: Slide the front console as far forward as it will go before folding the second row console forward to help prevent damage to the consoles. To access the upper storage area, press the upper button (B) and lift up. To access the lower storage For vehicles with a second row area, press the lower button (C) center console, open each area to and lift up. The top of the console access the storage compartment can be folded forward for increased inside. storage area. Lift up on handle on the rear of the console (A) and pull forward. Features and Controls 2-51

Floor Mats Luggage Carrier The luggage carrier allows the loading of things on top of If the floor mat has a snap retainer, { the vehicle. Crossrails are available a grommet in the driver side CAUTION at your dealer/retailer. floor mat attaches to a hook on the floor of the vehicle to secure the If something is carried on top of Notice: Loading cargo on the floor mat. To remove the floor mat, the vehicle that is longer or wider luggage carrier that weighs more pull the mat towards the rear of than the luggage carrier — like than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs the vehicle until the grommet can be paneling, plywood, or a over the rear or sides of the removed from the hook. mattress— the wind can catch it vehicle can damage the vehicle. while the vehicle is being driven. Load cargo so that it rests as If the floor mat has a knob retainer, far forward as possible and a grommet in the floor mat This can cause a driver to lose control. The item being carried against the side rails, making attaches to a knob on the floor of sure to fasten it securely. the vehicle to secure the floor could be violently torn off, and this mat. To remove the floor mat, turn could cause a collision, and Do not exceed the maximum vehicle the knob till it is aligned with the damage the vehicle. Items may capacity when loading the vehicle. slot in the floor mat grommet be carried inside. Never carry For more information on vehicle and pull the floor mat up. To something longer or wider than capacity and loading, see Loading reinstall, center the slot in the floor the luggage carrier on top of the the Vehicle on page 4-16. mat grommet with the knob on vehicle. To prevent damage or loss of cargo the floor and set the mat in place. while driving, check to make sure Then turn the knob until it is the cargo is still securely fastened. perpendicular to the slot in the grommet to lock the mat in place. 2-52 Features and Controls

Rear Seat Armrest Cargo Management There is an additional storage compartment on each side of the Vehicles with a rear seat armrest, System system. To open, unlatch and lift the have two cupholders. Pull the This vehicle has one of these cargo panel up. armrest down from the rear management systems located in To remove the cargo management seatback to access the cupholders. the rear of the vehicle. system: Cargo Tie Downs 1. Open the cover. It remains open when lifted. Four cargo tie-downs are located in the rear compartment of the 2. Remove the side panels and vehicle. The tie-downs can be used place inside. to secure small loads. 3. Loosen the retaining nuts on each side of the system by turning them counterclockwise. 4. Close the cover. Cargo Management System with 5. Pull up on the system by using a Removable Storage Area the built in handles and remove it from the vehicle. To open, pull the handle toward the rear of the vehicle and lift the cover up. Features and Controls 2-53

To remove the cargo management 1. Open the cover. It remains open cover: when lifted. 2. Pull the cover up making sure to { CAUTION unhook the hinges at the rear of the cover. An improperly latched and closed 3. Remove the cover from the cargo cover, or cargo cover left in vehicle and store outside of the open position, could be the vehicle. thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver. Someone could be injured. Be sure to return the cover to the Cargo Management System with closed position and latch before a Removable Cover driving. If the cover is removed, always store it outside of the vehicle. When it is replaced, always be sure that it is securely reattached. 2-54 Features and Controls

Sunroof Press and hold the rear of the driver side switch to close the sunroof. The vehicle may have a sunroof over the front seats and a rear Express-open/Express-close: From sunroof over the second row seats. the closed position, press and The rear sunroof does not open. release the rear of the driver side The switches to operate the switch to express-open the sunroof. front sunroof and rear sunshade are Press and release the front of located on the headliner above the driver side switch to the rearview mirror. The ignition express-close the sunroof. must be in ON/RUN or The front sunshade must be opened ACC/ACCESSORY to operate the and closed manually. Push up on sunroof. See Ignition Positions the sunshade handle to open on page 2-21. the sunshade. Notice: The rear sunshade could be damaged if you attempt to open or close it manually. Do not manually open or close the rear sunshade. To open the rear sunshade, located over the second row seats, press and release the rear of the passenger side switch. Press and release the front of the switch to close the sunshade. Vent: From the closed position, press and hold the front of the driver side switch to vent the sunroof. Instrument Panel 3-1

Adaptive Forward Warning Lights, Gages, Instrument Panel Lighting System ...... 3-14 and Indicators Fog Lamps ...... 3-14 Warning Lights, Gages, Instrument Panel and Indicators ...... 3-28 Brightness ...... 3-14 Instrument Panel Cluster ...... 3-29 Instrument Panel Overview Dome Lamps ...... 3-14 Speedometer and Instrument Panel Overview .....3-4 Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-15 Odometer ...... 3-30 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 3-5 Entry Lighting ...... 3-15 Tachometer ...... 3-30 Horn ...... 3-5 Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 3-15 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 3-30 Tilt and Telescopic Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 3-16 Airbag Readiness Light ...... 3-31 Steering Wheel ...... 3-6 Parade Dimming ...... 3-16 Passenger Airbag Power Tilt Wheel and Reading Lamps ...... 3-16 Status Indicator ...... 3-32 Telescopic Steering Electric Power Charging System Light ...... 3-33 Column ...... 3-6 Management ...... 3-16 Voltmeter Gage ...... 3-33 Turn Signal/Multifunction Battery Run-Down Brake System Warning Lever ...... 3-6 Protection ...... 3-17 Light ...... 3-34 Turn and Lane-Change Accessory Power Outlet(s) .....3-18 Antilock Brake System Signals ...... 3-7 Power Outlet 115 Volt (ABS) Warning Light ...... 3-35 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Alternating Current ...... 3-19 StabiliTrak® Indicator Changer ...... 3-7 Analog Clock ...... 3-20 Light ...... 3-35 Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-8 Engine Coolant Temperature Windshield Wipers ...... 3-8 Climate Controls Warning Light ...... 3-36 Windshield Washer ...... 3-8 Dual Automatic Climate Engine Coolant Rear Window Wiper/Washer ....3-9 Control System ...... 3-20 ...... 3-36 ...... 3-25 Temperature Gage Cruise Control ...... 3-10 Outlet Adjustment Tire Pressure Light ...... 3-37 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-12 Rear Air Conditioning and ...... 3-26 Malfunction Delayed Headlamps ...... 3-13 Heating System Indicator Lamp ...... 3-37 Daytime Running Rear Air Conditioning Oil Pressure Light ...... 3-40 Lamps (DRL)/Automatic and Heating System Security Light ...... 3-41 Headlamp System ...... 3-13 and Electronic Climate Fog Lamp Light ...... 3-41 Controls ...... 3-27 3-2 Instrument Panel

Cruise Control Light ...... 3-41 Navigation/Radio System ...... 3-98 Highbeam On Light ...... 3-41 Bluetooth® ...... 3-98 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 3-41 Rear Seat Entertainment Fuel Gage ...... 3-42 (RSE) System ...... 3-108 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...... 3-117 Driver Information Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-119 Center (DIC) Audio Steering Wheel Driver Information Controls ...... 3-119 Center (DIC) ...... 3-42 Radio Reception ...... 3-120 DIC Operation and Multi-Band Antenna ...... 3-121 Displays ...... 3-43 DIC Compass ...... 3-48 DIC Warnings and Messages ...... 3-50 DIC Vehicle Customization .....3-59 Audio System(s) Audio System(s) ...... 3-68 Setting the Clock ...... 3-69 Radio(s) ...... 3-70 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD) ...... 3-87 Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and DVD Player) ...... 3-91 XM Radio Messages ...... 3-96 Instrument Panel 3-3

✍ NOTES 3-4 Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview Instrument Panel 3-5

The main components of your J. Cruise Control on page 3-10. S. Heated Seats on page 1-4. instrument panel are listed here: K. Tilt and Telescopic Steering T. Passenger Air Bag Status A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-25. Wheel on page 3-6. Indicator. See Passenger B. Turn Signal/Multifunction L. Horn on page 3-5. Sensing System on page 1-53. Lever on page 3-6. Windshield M. Audio Steering Wheel Controls U. Glove Box on page 2-49. Wipers on page 3-8. on page 3-119. C. Instrument Panel Cluster on N. Hazard Warning Flashers on Hazard Warning Flashers page 3-29. page 3-5. | D. Driver Information Center (DIC) O. Dual Automatic Climate Control Hazard Warning Flasher: Press on page 3-42. System on page 3-20. this button located on the instrument panel below the audio system, to E. Analog Clock on page 3-20. P. Center Console Shift Lever. make the front and rear turn signal F. Audio System(s) on page 3-68. See “Console Shift Lever” lamps flash on and off. This warns Navigation/Radio System on under Shifting Into Park on others that you are having trouble. page 3-98 (If Equipped). page 2-28. Press again to turn the flashers off. G. Exterior Lamps on page 3-12. Q. Rear Window Wiper/Washer Fog Lamps on page 3-14. on page 3-9. Traction Control The turn signals do not work while the hazard warning flashers are on. H. Hood Release on page 5-9. System (TCS) Disable Button (If Equipped). See StabiliTrak¨ I. Dome Lamp Override on System on page 4-5. Horn page 3-15. Instrument Panel Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-26 Brightness on page 3-14. Press near or on the horn symbols (If Equipped). Power Liftgate on the steering wheel pad to Heated Windshield Washer on page 2-11 (If Equipped). Button (If Equipped). See sound the horn. Windshield Washer on page 3-8. R. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-18. 3-6 Instrument Panel

Tilt and Telescopic Power Tilt Wheel and Turn Signal/Multifunction Steering Wheel Telescopic Steering Lever The steering wheel can be adjusted. Column

The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: G : Turn and Lane-Change The power tilt and telescope wheel Signals control is located on the outboard side of the steering column. 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam The adjustment lever is located on Changer the left side of the steering column. Push the control up or down to tilt the steering wheel up or down. N Pull the lever down to move the : Windshield Wipers Push the control forward or rearward steering wheel up or down and in L : Windshield Washer or out. Pull the lever up to lock to move the steering wheel toward the steering wheel in place. the front or rear of the vehicle. Flash-to-Pass Feature. To set the memory position, see DIC Information for these features is on Do not adjust the steering wheel Vehicle Customization on page 3-59 the pages following. while driving. and Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-5. For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lamps on page 3-12. Instrument Panel 3-7

Turn and Lane-Change The lever returns to its starting Headlamp High/ Signals position whenever it is released. Low-Beam Changer If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes rapidly 23Headlamp High/Low Beam or does not come on, a signal bulb Changer: Push the turn signal/ might be burned out. multifunction lever away from you to turn the high beams on. Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out, check the fuse. Pull the lever towards you to return to See Fuses and Circuit Breakers low beams. An arrow on the instrument panel on page 5-88. cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Turn Signal On Chime Move the lever all the way up or If either one of the turn signals are down to signal a turn. left on and the vehicle has been driven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), Raise or lower the lever until the a chime will sound. arrow starts to flash to signal a lane This indicator light turns on in the change. Hold it there until the lane instrument panel cluster when change is completed. If the lever is the high beam headlamps are on. briefly pressed and released, the turn signal flashes three times. 3-8 Instrument Panel

Flash-to-Pass 9 (Off): Turns the wipers off. Windshield Washer With the turn signal lever in the 6 J (Washer Fluid): Press the low-beam position, pull the lever (Delay): Adjusts the delay time. The delay between wiping cycles button located at the end of the turn toward you momentarily to switch signal/multifunction lever, to spray to high-beam, to signal that you becomes shorter as the band is moved to the top of the lever. washer fluid on the windshield. are going to pass. The wipers clear the windshield If the headlamps are on, they will 1 (Low Speed): For steady wiping and either stop or return to the return to low-beam when the lever at low speed. preset speed. The ignition key is released. must be in ACC/ACCESSORY 2 (High Speed): For steady wiping or ON/RUN for this to work. For vehicles with High Intensity at high speed. Discharge (HID) headlamps, the See Windshield Washer Fluid on flash-to-pass feature does not work Clear ice and snow from the wiper page 5-25 Windshield Washer Fluid. while the Daytime Running Lamps blades before using them. If the (DRL) are on. blades are frozen to the windshield, { CAUTION gently loosen or thaw them. If they Windshield Wipers become damaged, install new blades In freezing weather, do not use or blade inserts. See Windshield The windshield wiper/washer lever your washer until the windshield is Wiper Blade Replacement on is located on the right side of the warmed. Otherwise the washer page 5-36. steering column. fluid can form ice on the Turn the band with the wiper symbol Heavy snow or ice can overload windshield, blocking your vision. to control the windshield wipers. the wipers. A circuit breaker stops 8 them until the motor cools. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID (Mist): Turn the band to mist is displayed on the Driver Information for a single wiping cycle and then Center (DIC) when the washer fluid release. The wipers stop after one is low. See DIC Warnings and wipe. Hold the band on 8 longer, Messages on page 3-50. for more wipe cycles. Instrument Panel 3-9

Heated Windshield Washer cycle can take up to 40 seconds Rear Window For vehicles with the heated to occur, depending on outside Wiper/Washer windshield washer fluid system, temperature. After the first wash/ it helps to clear ice, snow, tree sap, wipe cycle, it can take up to The rear wiper and rear wash or bugs from the windshield. This 20 seconds for each of the remaining button is located on the instrument feature only works with the front cycles. The system turns off panel below the climate control wiper system. automatically after four wipe cycles system. or the button can be pressed again to turn it off. Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the rear wiper on and off. The wiper Under certain outside temperature speed cannot be changed. conditions, steam might flow out of the washer nozzles for a short Y (Wash): Press to spray washer period of time before washer fluid fluid on the rear window. The window is sprayed. This is normal. wiper will also come on. Release the The button is located to the left HEATING WASH FLUID WASH button when enough fluid has been of the steering column below the WIPES PENDING is displayed on sprayed on the window. The rear instrument panel brightness the DIC when the washer system is wiper will run a few more cycles control knob. heating the fluid. WASHER FLUID after it is released. If the rear wiper Press the heated washer fluid button LOW ADD FLUID is displayed when function was already on, prior to to activate the heated windshield the washer fluid is low. See DIC pressing the wash button, it stays washer fluid system. This activation Warnings and Messages on on until the wiper button is pressed begins four heated wash/wipe page 3-50. again. cycles. The first heated wash/wipe The rear window washer uses the same fluid that is in the windshield washer reservoir. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-25. 3-10 Instrument Panel

Cruise Control Setting Cruise Control With cruise control, a speed of Cruise control will not work if the about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more parking brake is set, or if the master can be maintained without keeping cylinder brake ﬂuid level is low. your foot on the accelerator. Cruise The cruise control light on the control does not work at speeds instrument panel cluster comes on below about 25 mph (40 km/h). after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed. When the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged. { CAUTION

{ CAUTION If you leave your cruise control on The cruise control buttons are when you are not using cruise, Cruise control can be dangerous located on left side of the steering you might hit a button and go into where you cannot drive safely at wheel. cruise when you do not want to. a steady speed. So, do not use You could be startled and even the cruise control on winding T (On/Off): Press to turn cruise lose control. Keep the cruise roads or in heavy traffic. control on and off. The indicator control switch off until you want Cruise control can be dangerous comes on when cruise control is on. to use cruise control. on slippery roads. On such roads, + RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press fast changes in tire traction can to make the vehicle accelerate or 1. Press the I button. cause excessive wheel slip, and resume to a previously set speed. 2. Get up to the speed desired. you could lose control. Do not use 3. Press and release the SET– cruise control on slippery roads. SET– : Press to set the speed or make the vehicle decelerate. button located on the steering wheel. [ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise 4. Take your foot off the control. accelerator. Instrument Panel 3-11

Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using Using Cruise Control on Hills If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control How well the cruise control will work desired speed and then the brakes There are two ways to reduce the on hills depends upon the vehicle are applied, the cruise control is vehicle speed while using cruise speed, load, and the steepness disengaged. But it does not need control: of the hills. When going up steep to be reset. • Press and hold the SET– button hills, you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the Once the vehicle speed is 25 mph on the steering wheel until the vehicle speed. When going downhill, (40 km/h) or greater, press the +RES lower speed desired is reached, you might have to brake or shift button on the steering wheel. then release it. to a lower gear to keep the vehicle The vehicle returns to the previously • To slow down in very small speed down. When the brakes set speed and stays there. amounts, press the SET– button are applied the cruise control Increasing Speed While Using brieﬂy. Each time this is done, is disengaged. Cruise Control the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. Ending Cruise Control There are two ways to increase the vehicle speed while using cruise Passing Another Vehicle While There are three ways to end cruise control: Using Cruise Control control: • Press and hold the +RES button Use the accelerator pedal to • Step lightly on the brake pedal. on the steering wheel until the increase vehicle speed. When you • Press the [ button. desired speed is reached, take your foot off the pedal, the then release it. vehicle will slow down to the • Press the T button. previously set cruise speed. • To increase vehicle speed in Erasing Speed Memory small increments, press the The cruise control set speed +RES button brieﬂy. Each time memory is erased when the cruise this is done, the vehicle goes control or the ignition is turned off. about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. 3-12 Instrument Panel

Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control has 2 (Headlamps): Turns the four positions: headlamps on together with the following lamps listed below. 9 (Off): Brieﬂy turn to this position A warning chime sounds if the to turn the automatic light control driver’s door is opened when off or on again. the ignition switch is off and AUTO (Automatic): Turns the the headlamps are on. headlamps on automatically at • Parking Lamps normal brightness, together with the following: • Taillamps • Parking Lamps • License Plate Lamps • Taillamps • Instrument Panel Lights • License Plate Lamps # (Fog Lamps): Push the fog The exterior lamps control is located • Instrument Panel Lights lamps control in to turn on the fog on the instrument panel to the left lamps. of the steering wheel. ; (Parking Lamps): Turns the See Fog Lamps on page 3-14. It controls the following systems: parking lamps on together with the following: • Headlamps • Taillamps • Taillamps • License Plate Lamps • Parking Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights • License Plate Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights • Fog Lamps Instrument Panel 3-13

Delayed Headlamps Daytime Running When the DRL are on, only the DRL Lamps (DRL)/Automatic lights will be on. The headlamps, Delayed headlamps provide a taillamps, sidemarker, and other period of exterior lighting as you Headlamp System lamps will not be on. The instrument leave the area around your vehicle. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can panel and cluster will also not be lit. This feature is activated when the make it easier for others to see the headlamps are on due to the When it is dark enough outside, front of your vehicle during the day. automatic headlamps control feature, the DRL lights will turn off and the Fully functional daytime running and when the ignition is turned off. headlamps and parking lamps lamps are required on all vehicles The headlamps remain on until the will turn on. The other lamps that ﬁrst sold in Canada. exterior lamps control is moved to come on with the headlamps the parking lamps position or until A light sensor on top of the will also come on. the pre-selected delayed headlamp instrument panel makes the DRL When it is bright enough outside, lighting period has ended. work, so do not cover the sensor. the headlamps will go off and If the ignition is turned off with the The DRL system’s automatic control the DRL will come on. headlamps switch in the parking makes the DRL lights come on when The regular headlamp system lamps or headlamps position, the the following conditions are met: should be turned on when it is delayed headlamps cycle will not • The ignition is in the ON/RUN needed. occur. position. To disable the delayed headlamps • The exterior lamps control is feature or change the time of delay, in AUTO. see DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-59. • The engine is running. 3-14 Instrument Panel

Adaptive Forward Fog Lamps Instrument Panel Lighting System Use the fog lamps for better vision Brightness in foggy or misty conditions. Vehicles with the Adaptive Forward D (Instrument Panel Brightness): Lighting System (AFS) have The fog lamps button is located on The knob with this symbol on it is headlamps that swivel to the left or the exterior lamps control to the located next to the exterior lamps right when making a turn to provide left of the steering column. control to the left of the steering better lighting. To enable AFS, set # wheel. Push the knob in all the way the exterior lamp switch to the AUTO (Fog Lamps): Press the exterior until it extends out and then turn the position. Move the switch out of the lamps button to turn the fog lamps knob clockwise or counterclockwise AUTO position to turn off the system. on or off. A light comes on in the to brighten or dim the lights. Push the See Exterior Lamps on page 3-12. instrument panel cluster when the knob back in when ﬁnished. AFS operates when the vehicle fog lamps are in use. The ignition speed is greater than 2 mph must be on for the fog lamps to work. Dome Lamps (3 km/h). AFS does not operate When the headlamps are changed The dome lamps automatically when the transmission is in to high-beam, the fog lamps will come on when a door is opened, R (Reverse). AFS is not immediately turn off. The fog lamps come back unless the dome lamp override operable after starting the vehicle; on again when the high-beam button is pressed in. driving a short distance is required headlamps are turned off. to calibrate the AFS. The lamps can also be turned on Some localities have laws that and off by turning the instrument require the headlamps to be panel brightness control clockwise to on along with the fog lamps. the farthest position. Instrument Panel 3-15

Dome Lamp Override If a door is opened, the lamps stay Delayed Entry Lighting on while it is open and then turn The dome lamp override button is off automatically about 20 seconds Delayed entry lighting illuminates the located next to the exterior lamps after the door is closed. If the interior for a period of time after control. unlock symbol is pressed and no all the doors have been closed. The dome lamp override sets the door is opened, the lamps turn The ignition must be off for delayed dome lamps to remain off or come on off after about 20 seconds. entry lighting to work. Immediately automatically when a door is opened. Entry lighting includes a feature after all the doors have been closed, called theater dimming. With theater the delayed entry lighting feature E (Dome Lamp Override): Press dimming, the lamps do not turn off at continues to work until one of the button in and the dome lamps the end of the delay time. Instead, the following occurs: remain off when a door is opened. they slowly dim and then go out. • The ignition is in ON/RUN. Press the button again to return it to The delay time is canceled if the • The doors are locked. the extended position so that the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN dome lamps come on when a door or the power door lock switch is • An illumination period of about is opened. pressed. The lamps will dim 25 seconds has elapsed. right away. Entry Lighting If during the illumination period When the ignition is on, illuminated a door is opened, the timed For vehicles with courtesy lamps, entry is inactive, which means illumination period is canceled they come on and stay on for a set the courtesy lamps will not come and the interior lamps remain on. time whenever the unlock symbol on unless a door is opened. is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one. 3-16 Instrument Panel

Delayed Exit Lighting Parade Dimming When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly to This feature illuminates the interior Parade mode automatically prohibits quickly bring the charge back up. for a period of time after the key the dimming of the instrument panel When the state of charge is high, the is removed from the ignition. displays during the daylight while voltage is lowered slightly to prevent the headlamps are on so that the The ignition must be off for delayed overcharging. If the vehicle has a displays are still able to be seen. exit lighting to work. When the voltmeter gage or a voltage display key is removed, interior illumination on the Driver Information Center activates and remains on until Reading Lamps (DIC), you may see the voltage move one of the following occurs: The vehicle has reading lamps that up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed. • The ignition is in ON/RUN. also act as the dome lamp. Press the button to turn them on and off. The battery can be discharged at • The power door locks are idle if the electrical loads are very activated. Electric Power high. This is true for all vehicles. This • An illumination period of Management is because the generator (alternator) 20 seconds has elapsed. may not be spinning fast enough at The vehicle has Electric Power If during the illumination period idle to produce all the power that is Management (EPM) that estimates needed for very high electrical loads. a door is opened, the timed the battery’s temperature and illumination period will be canceled state of charge. It then adjusts and the interior lamps will remain the voltage for best performance on because a door is open. and extended life of the battery. Instrument Panel 3-17

A high electrical load occurs when Normally, these actions occur Battery Run-Down several of the following are on, such in steps or levels, without being as: headlamps, high beams, fog noticeable. In rare cases at the Protection lamps, rear window defogger, highest levels of corrective action, This feature helps prevent the climate control fan at high speed, this action may be noticeable to the battery from being drained, if the heated seats, engine cooling fans, driver. If so, a Driver Information interior courtesy lamps, reading/ trailer loads, and loads plugged into Center (DIC) message might be map lamps, visor vanity lamps or accessory power outlets. displayed, such as BATTERY trunk lamp are accidentally left on. SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY If any of these lamps are left on, EPM works to prevent excessive VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. they automatically turn off after discharge of the battery. It does If this message is displayed, it is 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. this by balancing the generator’s recommended that the driver reduce The lamps will not come back on output and the vehicle’s electrical the electrical loads as much as again until one of the following needs. It can increase engine possible. See DIC Warnings and occurs: idle speed to generate more power, Messages on page 3-50. whenever needed. It can temporarily • The ignition is turned on. reduce the power demands of • The exterior lamps control is some accessories. turned off, then on again. The headlamps will time-out after 10 minutes, if they are manually turned on with the ignition on or off. 3-18 Instrument Panel

Accessory Power the battery. Power is always not be covered by the vehicle supplied to the outlets. Always warranty. Do not use equipment Outlet(s) unplug electrical equipment when exceeding maximum amperage The vehicle has three 12-volt outlets not in use and do not plug in rating of 20 amperes. Check with which can be used to plug in equipment that exceeds the your dealer/retailer before electrical equipment, such as a maximum 20 ampere rating. adding electrical equipment. cellular telephone, a compact disc Certain accessory plugs may not be When adding electrical equipment, player, etc. compatible to the accessory power be sure to follow the proper The power outlets are located on the outlet and could result in blown installation instructions included instrument panel below the climate vehicle and adapter fuses. If a with the equipment. controls, at the rear of the center problem is experienced, see your console, and in the rear cargo area. dealer/retailer for additional Notice: Improper use of the Lift the cover to access the outlet. information on the power accessory power outlet can cause damage Close the cover when not using the outlets. not covered by the warranty. outlet. Do not hang any type of Notice: Adding any electrical accessory or accessory bracket Notice: Leaving electrical equipment to the vehicle can from the plug because the equipment plugged in for an damage it or keep other power outlets are designed for extended period of time while components from working as accessory power plugs only. the vehicle is off will drain they should. The repairs would Instrument Panel 3-19

Power Outlet 115 Volt An indicator light on the outlet turns The power outlet is not designed for on to show it is in use. The light the following electrical equipment Alternating Current comes on when the ignition is in and may not work properly if these For vehicles with this power outlet, ON/RUN and equipment requiring items are plugged into the power it can be used to plug in electrical less than 150 watts is plugged into outlet: equipment that uses a maximum the outlet, and no system fault is • Equipment with high initial limit of 150 watts. detected. peak wattage such as: The indicator light does not come compressor-driven refrigerators on when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF and electric power tools. or if no equipment is plugged into • Other equipment requiring the outlet. an extremely stable If equipment is connected using power supply such as: more than 150 watts or a system microcomputer-controlled fault is detected, a protection circuit electric blankets, touch sensor shuts off the power supply and the lamps, etc. indicator light turns off. To reset the See High Voltage Devices and circuit, unplug the item and plug Wiring on page 5-87. it back in or turn the Remote Accessory Power (RAP) off and then back on. See Retained Accessory The power outlet is located on the Power (RAP) on page 2-22. The rear of the center console. power restarts when equipment using 150 watts or less is plugged into the outlet and a system fault is not detected. 3-20 Instrument Panel

Analog Clock Climate Controls The analog clock is located on the instrument panel above the radio. Dual Automatic Climate Control System The clock is not connected with any The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with other vehicle system and runs by this system. itself. To change the clock, do the following: 1. Push and hold the button located directly above the clock to advance the clock hands. Holding the button down will cause the clock to advance faster. Release the button before you get to the desired time. 2. Push and release the button to increase the time by one minute increments until the desired time is reached. A. Fan Control H. Display B. AUTO I. Power (On/Off) C. Defrost J. Rear Window Defogger D. Recirculation K. Air Conditioning E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) L. PASS (Passenger) F. Air Delivery Mode Control M. Passenger Side Temperature G. Driver Side Temperature Control Control Instrument Panel 3-21

Display Function Automatic Operation 2. Set the temperature for the driver and passenger. Each time the temperature, mode, AUTO (Automatic): The system or fan control buttons are pressed, automatically controls the inside To find a comfortable setting, the climate control display shows temperature, the air delivery, start with a 73°F (22°C) that function along with the inside and the fan speed. temperature setting and allow temperature setting. The outside about 20 minutes for the system temperature is displayed on the To use automatic mode: to regulate. Use the driver’s side instrument panel cluster. 1. Press the AUTO button. or passenger side temperature buttons to adjust the temperature When AUTO is selected, O (On/Off): Press to turn the setting as necessary. The system the current temperature(s) climate control system on or off. will remain at the selected setting. selected and AUTO is shown While the system is off, outside air Choosing the warmest or coolest on the display. The current still enters through the floor outlets, temperatures does not cause air delivery mode and fan speed but the air delivery mode can be the vehicle to heat or cool more also appear for approximately adjusted. quickly. five seconds. To avoid blowing cold air in The climate control system will When AUTO is selected, the cold weather, the system delays also turn on if either the fan control, air conditioning and air inlet turning on the fan until warm air is defrost, AUTO, or air conditioning are automatically controlled. available. Press the fan control to buttons are pressed. The air conditioning runs when override this delay and select the the outside temperature is over fan speed. 40°F (4°C). The system is automatically set to outside air, unless it is hot outside and then the air inlet changes to recirculation mode to help quickly cool the vehicle. The recirculation indicator light will come on. 3-22 Instrument Panel

Temperature Control PASS (Passenger): Press to H / G (Air Delivery Mode Control): The driver and passenger side set the passenger temperature to Press to change the direction of temperature buttons are used match the driver temperature setting. the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly The PASS indicator will turn off. to adjust the temperature of the press H or G until the desired air coming through the system. When the passenger temperature setting is different than the driver mode appears on the display. The temperature can be adjusted Pressing a mode button while even if the system is turned off since setting, the PASS indicator comes on. the system is off changes the air outside air still enters the vehicle, delivery mode without turning unless the recirculation mode is Manual Operation the system on. Press a mode button selected. See “Recirculation” later while in automatic control to place in this section. The air delivery mode or fan speed the system into manual control. can be manually adjusted. Driver Side Temperature Control: The air delivery mode setting still Press the + or − buttons to increase D / C (Fan Control): Press to displays, but the word AUTO no or decrease the driver side increase or decrease the fan speed. longer displays, and the AUTO temperature. The driver side button indicator light turns off. temperature display will show Pressing D or C while in automatic the temperature setting. control places the fan speed H (Vent): Air is directed to the under manual control. instrument panel outlets. Passenger Side Temperature − Control: Press the + or buttons to The air delivery mode remains in ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided increase or decrease the passenger automatic control. The fan setting between the instrument panel and side temperature. The passenger still displays, but the word AUTO floor outlets. Some air is directed side display will show the no longer displays, and the AUTO towards the windshield and side temperature setting. button indicator light turns off. window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets. Instrument Panel 3-23

6 (Floor): Air is directed to the 0 (Defrost): Press to turn the Air Conditioning floor outlets, with some of the air defrost on or off. This mode quickly # (Air Conditioning): Press to directed to the windshield, side clears the windshield of fog or frost. window, and second row floor Air is directed to the windshield, turn the air conditioning (A/C) on and outlets. In this mode, the system side window, and floor vents. In this off. An indicator light comes on when uses outside air. mode, outside air is pulled inside the A/C is on. - vehicle. The air conditioning system The A/C does not work when (Defog): This mode clears the runs automatically in this setting, the outside temperature is below windows of fog or moisture. Air is unless the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C). If # is pressed the directed to the windshield, floor less than 40°F (4°C). outlets, and side window vents. indicator flashes three times and When this mode is selected, the Do not drive the vehicle until all the turns off to show that the A/C mode system turns off recirculation and windows are clear. is not available. If the A/C is on and the outside temperature drops below runs the air conditioning compressor While in defrost mode, if the PASS unless the outside temperature is a temperature which is too cool for button is pressed, the PASS button air conditioning to be effective, the less than 40°F (4°C). Do not drive indicator flashes three times to show the vehicle until all the windows A/C indicator turns off to show that that the passenger climate control the A/C mode has been canceled. are clear. system cannot be activated. If the passenger temperature buttons On hot days, open the windows are adjusted while in defrost mode, briefly to let hot inside air escape. the driver temperature indicator will This helps reduce the time it change. The passenger temperature takes for the interior of the vehicle will not be displayed. to cool down. 3-24 Instrument Panel

The air conditioning system The recirculation mode cannot be Rear Window Defogger removes moisture from the air, so a used with ﬂoor, defog, or defrosting The rear window defogger uses a small amount of water might drip modes. If recirculation is selected in warming grid to remove fog from the under the vehicle while idling or after these modes, the indicator ﬂashes rear window. turning off the engine. This is normal. three times and turns off. The air conditioning compressor also comes < (Rear Window Defogger): @ (Recirculation): Press to turn on when this mode is activated. Press to turn the rear window the recirculation mode on or off. While in recirculation mode the defogger on or off. The rear An indicator light comes on when windows can fog when the weather window defogger stays on for recirculation is on. When the engine is cold and damp. To clear the fog, about 10 minutes, before turning off. is turned off, the recirculation mode select either the defog or defrost The defogger also turns off when automatically turns off and must be mode and increase the fan speed. the engine is turned off. Do not drive re-selected when the engine is the vehicle until all the windows turned on again. REAR: Press to turn the rear heating and air conditioning on are clear. This mode recirculates and helps to or off. See Rear Air Conditioning For vehicles with heated outside quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. and Heating System on page 3-26 rearview mirrors, fog or frost is It can be used to prevent outside air or Rear Air Conditioning and cleared from the surface of the mirror and odors from entering the vehicle. Heating System and Electronic when the rear window defog button Climate Controls on page 3-27. is pressed. Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Instrument Panel 3-25

Sensors The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain comfort settings by adjusting the temperature, fan speed, and the air delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be used as needed to maintain cool outlet temperatures. Outlet Adjustment The solar sensor, located in the Use the slider switch in the center of defrost grille in the middle of the The interior temperature sensor the outlet, to change the direction of instrument panel, monitors the solar located on the instrument panel to the air flow. Use the thumbwheel heat. Do not cover the solar sensor the right of the steering column, near the outlet to control the amount or the system will not work properly. measures the temperature of the air inside the vehicle. of air flow or to shut off the airflow. There is also an exterior Keep all outlets open whenever temperature sensor located behind possible for best system the front grille. This sensor reads performance. the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature. 3-26 Instrument Panel

Operation Tips Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System • Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the windshield that can block the flow of air into the vehicle. • Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. • Keep the path under all seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside the vehicle more effectively. • If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-level modes with A. Fan Control An indicator comes on when the mild temperature throughout the B. Temperature Control rear system is on. The system also vehicle, turn on the air conditioner turns on if any of the rear controls to reduce windshield fogging. C. Air Delivery Mode Control are adjusted. Mimic Mode: This mode matches For vehicles with the rear climate the rear climate control to the front control system, the controls climate control settings. It comes on are located on the rear of the center when REAR is pressed. console. The system can also be controlled with the front controls. Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating airflow according Press the REAR button on the front to the settings of the rear controls. climate control system to turn the It comes on when any rear control is rear climate control system on or off. adjusted. Instrument Panel 3-27

Fan Control: Turn clockwise or Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the Electronic Climate Controls knob to 9 to turn the fan off. Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the airﬂow temperature. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn to the desired mode to change the airﬂow direction.

H (Vent): Air is directed through the overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directed Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls through the rear floor outlets, as A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front well as the overhead outlets. B. Air Delivery Mode Control climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or off. 6 (Floor): Air is directed through C. Temperature Control The system also turns on if any of the the floor outlets. The rear system rear controls, except for the C are floor outlets are located under For vehicles with the rear climate pressed. An indicator comes on the third row seats. control system, the controls are located on the rear of the center when the rear system is on. console. The system can also be turned off, by pressing and holding the C button. 3-28 Instrument Panel

Mimic Mode: This mode matches N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Warning Lights, the rear climate control to the front Press to manually change the climate control settings. It comes on direction of the airflow. Repeatedly Gages, and Indicators when REAR is pressed. press the button until the desired Warning lights and gages can signal Independent Mode: This mode mode appears on the display. that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause directs rear seating airflow according H (Vent): Air is directed through an expensive repair or replacement. to the settings of the rear controls. the overhead outlets. Paying attention to the warning lights It comes on when any rear control is and gages could prevent injury. adjusted. ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed Warning lights come on when there DC(Fan Control): Press the fan through the rear floor outlets, as may be or is a problem with one up or down buttons to increase well as the overhead outlets. of the vehicle’s functions. Some or decrease the fan speed. warning lights come on briefly when 6 (Floor): Air is directed through the engine is started to indicate they Temperature Control: Press + the floor outlets. The rear system are working. − floor outlets are located under or to increase or decrease the Gages can indicate when there may the third row seats. air temperature. The temperature be or is a problem with one of the settings will display in 0-12 vehicle’s functions. Often gages and increments, going from the warning lights work together to coolest (0) to the warmest (12) indicate a problem with the vehicle. setting. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous. Instrument Panel 3-29

Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument cluster is designed to show at a glance how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel has been used, and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar 3-30 Instrument Panel

Speedometer and Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Odometer Driver Safety Belt Reminder The speedometer shows the Light vehicle’s speed in both miles The driver safety belt reminder light per hour (mph) and kilometers on the instrument panel cluster. per hour (km/h). The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either miles or kilometers. When the engine is started this light and the chime come on and stay This vehicle has a tamper-resistant on for several seconds to remind odometer. If the vehicle needs a new the passenger to fasten their safety odometer installed, the new one is belt. The light also begins to ﬂash. set to the mileage total of the old When the engine is started this light odometer. If this is not possible, it is and the chime come on and stay on This cycle repeats if the passenger set at zero and a label is put on the for several seconds to remind the remains unbuckled and the vehicle is driver’s door to show the old mileage driver to fasten the safety belt. moving. The light also begins to ﬂash. reading when the new odometer was If the passenger safety belt is installed. If the mileage is unknown, This cycle repeats if the driver buckled, neither the chime nor the label should then indicate remains unbuckled and the vehicle the light comes on. “previous mileage unknown”. is moving. If the driver safety belt is already Tachometer buckled, neither the light nor chime The tachometer displays the comes on. engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Instrument Panel 3-31

The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn { CAUTION on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, If the airbag readiness light stays grocery bag, laptop or other on after the vehicle is started or electronic device. To turn off the comes on while driving, it means warning light and or chime, remove the airbag system might not be the object from the seat or buckle This light will come on and stay working properly. The airbags in the safety belt on for several seconds when the vehicle might not inﬂate in a the vehicle is started. Then the crash, or they could even inﬂate Airbag Readiness Light light should go out. without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced This light shows if there is an If the airbag readiness light stays right away. electrical problem. The system on after the vehicle has been started check includes the airbag sensor, or comes on when while driving, the pretensioners, the airbag the airbag system may not work modules, the wiring and the crash properly. Have the vehicle serviced sensing and diagnostic module. right away. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-45. 3-32 Instrument Panel

Passenger Airbag Status When the vehicle is started, the If, after several seconds, both passenger airbag status indicator status indicator lights remain on, Indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol or if there are no lights at all, there The vehicle has a passenger for on and off, for several seconds may be a problem with the lights sensing system. See Passenger as a system check. If you are using or the passenger sensing system. Sensing System on page 1-53 remote start to start the vehicle from See your dealer/retailer for service. for important safety information. a distance, if equipped, you may not The instrument panel has a see the system check. Then, after { CAUTION passenger airbag status indicator. several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, If the airbag readiness light ever or either the on or off symbol to let comes on and stays on, it means you know the status of the right front that something may be wrong with passenger frontal airbag. the airbag system. To help avoid If the word ON or the on symbol is injury to yourself or others, have lit on the passenger airbag status the vehicle serviced right away. indicator, it means that the right front United States See Airbag Readiness Light on passenger frontal airbag is enabled page 3-31 for more information, (may inﬂate). including important safety If the word OFF or the off symbol information. is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger Canada frontal airbag. Instrument Panel 3-33

Charging System Light See DIC Warnings and Messages This is normal. Readings between on page 3-50 for more information. the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range. If a short distance must be driven with the light on, be sure to turn Readings in the low warning zone off all accessories, such as the may occur when a large number of radio and air conditioner. electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left Voltmeter Gage idling for an extended period. The charging system light comes on brieﬂy when the ignition is turned If there is a problem with the on, but the engine is not running, battery charging system, a SERVICE as a check to show the light is BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM working. It should go out when message appears in the Driver the engine is started. Information Center (DIC) and/or the charging system light comes on. If the light stays on, or comes See DIC Warnings and Messages on while driving, there may be a When the engine is not running, but on page 3-50 and Charging System problem with the electrical charging the ignition is on, this gage shows Light on page 3-33 for more system. Have it checked by your the battery’s state of charge in information. dealer/retailer. Driving while this light DC volts. is on could drain the battery. However, readings in either warning When the engine is running, this zone can indicate a possible problem When this light comes on, the gage shows the condition of the in the electrical system. Have the Driver Information Center (DIC) also charging system. The vehicle’s vehicle serviced as soon as possible. displays the SERVICE BATTERY charging system regulates voltage CHARGING SYSTEM message. based on the state of charge of the battery. The voltmeter may ﬂuctuate. 3-34 Instrument Panel

Brake System Warning This light should come on briefly If the light comes on while driving, when the ignition key is turned to pull off the road and stop carefully. Light ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, Make sure the parking brake is fully This vehicle’s hydraulic brake have it fixed so it will be ready to released. The pedal may be harder system is divided into two parts. warn if there is a problem. to push or, the pedal may go closer If one part is not working, the other to the floor. It may take longer to This light may also come on due to part can still work and stop the stop. If the light is still on, have the low brake fluid. See Brakes on vehicle. For good braking both vehicle towed for service. See page 5-26 for more information. parts need to be working. Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-20. When the ignition is on, the brake If the warning light comes on, system warning light will also come there is a brake problem. Have the { CAUTION on when the parking brake is set. brake system inspected right away. The light will stay on if the parking The brake system might not be brake does not release fully. If it working properly if the brake stays on after the parking brake is system warning light is on. Driving fully released, it means there is a with the brake system warning brake problem. light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and United States Canada carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service. Instrument Panel 3-35

Antilock Brake System A chime may also sound when the StabiliTrak® Indicator light comes on steady. Then start (ABS) Warning Light the engine again to reset the system. Light If the ABS light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, For vehicles with the Antilock Brake the vehicle does not have antilock This light comes on briefly while System (ABS), this light comes brakes and there is a problem with starting the engine. If it does on briefly when the engine is started. the regular brakes. See Brake not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system If the light does not come on, System Warning Light on page 3-34. is working normally the indicator have it fixed so it will be ready to For vehicles with a Driver light goes off. warn if there is a problem. Information Center (DIC), see If it stays on, or comes on while If the ABS light stays on, turn the DIC Warnings and Messages on driving, there could be a problem ignition off. If the light comes on while page 3-50 for all brake related DIC with the StabiliTrak system and the driving, stop as soon as it is safely messages. vehicle might need service. When possible and turn the ignition off. this warning light is on, the system is off and will not limit wheel spin. 3-36 Instrument Panel

This light ﬂashes when the If this happens pull over and turn off Engine Coolant StabiliTrak system is active. the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on Temperature Gage If the StabiliTrak system warning page 5-22 for more information. light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when Notice: Driving with the engine the system is turned on, the vehicle coolant temperature warning light needs service. See StabiliTrak¨ on could cause the vehicle to System on page 4-5 for more overheat. See Engine Overheating information. on page 5-22. The vehicle’s engine could be damaged, and it might United States Canada Engine Coolant not be covered by the vehicle This gage shows the engine coolant Temperature Warning warranty. Never drive with the temperature. Under normal driving Light engine coolant temperature conditions the gage will read warning light on. 210°F (100 °C) or less. If the gage This light also comes on brieﬂy pointer is near 260°F (125 °C), when starting the vehicle. If it does the engine is too hot. not, see your dealer/retailer. It means that the engine coolant has overheated. If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving conditions, pull off the The engine coolant temperature road, stop the vehicle and turn off warning light comes on when the engine as soon as possible. the engine has overheated. See Engine Overheating on page 5-22 for more information. Instrument Panel 3-37

Tire Pressure Light When the Light is On Steady Malfunction This indicates that one or more Indicator Lamp of the tires are significantly underinflated. Check Engine Light A tire pressure message in the A computer system called OBD II Driver Information Center (DIC), (On-Board Diagnostics-Second can accompany the light. See DIC Generation) monitors operation of Warnings and Messages on the fuel, ignition, and emission If the vehicle has a tire pressure page 3-50 for more information. control systems. It ensures monitoring system, the tire pressure Stop and check the tires as soon that emissions are at acceptable light provides information about tire as it is safe to do so. If underinflated, levels for the life of the vehicle, pressures and the Tire Pressure inflate to the proper pressure. helping to produce a cleaner Monitoring System. The light should See Tires on page 5-37 for more environment. come on briefly as the engine is information. started. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/ When the Light Flashes First and retailer. Then is On Steady This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady This light comes on when the for the remainder of the ignition ignition is on, but the engine is not cycle. This sequence repeats with running, as a check to show it is every ignition cycle. See Tire working. If it does not, have the Pressure Monitor System on vehicle serviced by your dealer/ page 5-44 for more information. retailer. 3-38 Instrument Panel

If the check engine light comes on Notice: Modifications made to The following can prevent more and stays on, while the engine the engine, transmission, exhaust, serious damage to the vehicle: is running, this indicates that there intake, or fuel system of the • Reduce vehicle speed. is an OBD II problem and service vehicle or the replacement of the is required. original tires with other than those • Avoid hard accelerations. of the same Tire Performance Malfunctions often are indicated by • Avoid steep uphill grades. Criteria (TPC) can affect the the system before any problem is vehicle’s emission controls and • If towing a trailer, reduce the apparent. Being aware of the light can cause this light to come on. amount of cargo being hauled can prevent more serious damage Modifications to these systems as soon as it is possible. to the vehicle. This system assists could lead to costly repairs not the service technician in correctly If the light continues to flash, covered by the vehicle warranty. diagnosing any malfunction. when it is safe to do so, stop the This could also result in a failure vehicle. Find a safe place to park the Notice: If the vehicle is to pass a required Emission vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least continually driven with this Inspection/Maintenance test. 10 seconds, and restart the engine. light on, after a while, the See Accessories and If the light is still flashing, follow the emission controls might not Modifications on page 5-3. previous steps and see your dealer/ work as well, the vehicle’s fuel This light comes on during a retailer for service as soon as economy might not be as good, malfunction in one of two ways: possible. and the engine might not run as smoothly. This could lead to Light Flashing: A misfire condition costly repairs that might not be has been detected. A misfire covered by the vehicle warranty. increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. Instrument Panel 3-39

Light On Steady: An emission • If the vehicle has been driven If one or more of these conditions control system malfunction has been through a deep puddle of water, occurs, change the fuel brand detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis the vehicle’s electrical system used. It will require at least one and service might be required. might be wet. The condition is full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. An emission system malfunction usually corrected when the might be corrected by checking the electrical system dries out. See Gasoline Octane on following items: A few driving trips should turn page 5-5. the light off. • Make sure the fuel cap is fully If none of the above have made the installed. See Filling the Tank • Make sure to fuel the vehicle light turn off, your dealer/retailer can on page 5-7. The diagnostic with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer system can determine if the fuel causes the engine not to run as has the proper test equipment and cap has been left off or improperly efficiently as designed and may diagnostic tools to ﬁx any mechanical installed. A loose or missing fuel cause: stalling after start-up, or electrical problems that might cap allows fuel to evaporate into stalling when the vehicle is have developed. the atmosphere. A few driving changed into gear, misﬁring, trips with the cap properly hesitation on acceleration, or installed should turn the light off. stumbling on acceleration. These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up. 3-40 Instrument Panel

Emissions Inspection and inspection. This can happen Notice: Lack of proper engine Maintenance Programs if the battery has recently been oil maintenance can damage replaced or if the battery has run the engine. The repairs would Some state/provincial and local down. The diagnostic system not be covered by the vehicle governments have or might begin is designed to evaluate critical warranty. Always follow the programs to inspect the emission emission control systems during maintenance schedule in this control equipment on the vehicle. normal driving. This can take manual for changing engine oil. Failure to pass this inspection several days of routine driving. could prevent getting a vehicle If this has been done and the registration. vehicle still does not pass the Here are some things to know to inspection for lack of OBD II help the vehicle pass an inspection: system readiness, your dealer/ retailer can prepare the vehicle • The vehicle will not pass this for inspection. inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine The oil pressure light should come running, or if the key is in Oil Pressure Light on briefly as the engine is started. If it ON/RUN and the light is not on. does not come on have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. • The vehicle will not pass { CAUTION this inspection if the OBD II If the light comes on and stays on, it (on-board diagnostic) system Do not keep driving if the oil means that oil is not flowing through determines that critical emission pressure is low. The engine can the engine properly. The vehicle control systems have not been become so hot that it catches fire. could be low on oil and might have completely diagnosed by the Someone could be burned. Check some other system problem. system. The vehicle would be the oil as soon as possible and considered not ready for have the vehicle serviced. Instrument Panel 3-41

Security Light Cruise Control Light See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-7 for more information. Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light ﬂashes when the security system is activated. This light comes on whenever the For more information, see cruise control is set. Theft-Deterrent Systems on The light goes out when the cruise page 2-16. control is turned off. See Cruise This light comes on when the Control on page 3-10 for more Tow/Haul mode has been activated. Fog Lamp Light information. For more information, see Highbeam On Light Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-26.

The fog lamp light comes on when the fog lamps are in use. The light goes out when the fog The highbeam on light comes on lamps are turned off. See Fog when the high-beam headlamps Lamps on page 3-14 for more are in use. information. 3-42 Instrument Panel

Fuel Gage When the fuel tank is low on fuel, Driver Information the FUEL LEVEL LOW message appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC) Center (DIC). For more information Your vehicle has a Driver see DIC Warnings and Messages Information Center (DIC). on page 3-50. The DIC displays information Here are some situations that can about your vehicle. It also displays United States Canada occur with the fuel gage. None of warning messages if a system these indicate a problem with the problem is detected. When the ignition is on, the fuel fuel gage. All messages will appear in the DIC gage shows about how much fuel • At the gas station, the fuel display located at the top of the the vehicle has left in the fuel tank. pump shuts off before the gage instrument panel cluster. An arrow on the fuel gage indicates reads full. the side of the vehicle the fuel door • It takes a little more or less fuel to The DIC comes on when the is on. fill up than the fuel gage indicated. ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information The gage will first indicate empty For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, that was last displayed before before the vehicle is out of fuel, but the engine was turned off. the vehicle’s fuel tank should be but it actually took a little more or filled soon. less than half the tank’s capacity The DIC also displays a shift lever to fill the tank. position indicator on the bottom • The gage goes back to empty line of the display. See Automatic when the ignition is turned off. Transmission Operation on page 2-24 for more information. Instrument Panel 3-43

The outside air temperature and DIC Operation and DIC Buttons compass, if equipped, also display on the DIC when viewing the trip Displays and fuel information. The outside air The DIC has different displays temperature automatically appears which can be accessed by pressing in the top right corner of the DIC the DIC buttons located on the display. If there is a problem with the instrument panel. See Instrument system that controls the temperature Panel Overview on page 3-4 display, the numbers will be replaced for more information. The buttons are the set/reset, with dashes. If this occurs, have the The DIC displays trip, fuel, and customization, vehicle information, vehicle serviced. The compass will vehicle system information, and and trip/fuel buttons. The button be shown in the bottom right corner warning messages if a system functions are detailed in the of the DIC display. See DIC problem is detected. following pages. Compass on page 3-48 for more information. The DIC also allows some features V (Set/Reset): Press this button to be customized. See DIC Vehicle See DIC Operation and Displays to set or reset certain functions Customization on page 3-59 for more on page 3-43 and DIC Vehicle and to turn off or acknowledge information. Customization on page 3-59 for messages on the DIC. the displays available. 3-44 Instrument Panel

U (Customization): Press this Vehicle Information Menu on page 3-50. You should change button to customize the feature Items the oil as soon as you can. settings on your vehicle. See DIC T See Engine Oil on page 5-12. Vehicle Customization on page 3-59 (Vehicle Information): Press In addition to the engine oil life for more information. this button to scroll through the system monitoring the oil life, following menu items: additional maintenance is T (Vehicle Information): Press recommended in the Maintenance OIL LIFE this button to display the oil life, park Schedule in this manual. See assist on vehicles with this feature, Press the vehicle information button Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-3 units, tire pressure readings on until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. for more information. vehicles with this feature, Remote This display shows an estimate of Remember, you must reset the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter the oil’s remaining useful life. If you OIL LIFE display yourself after each programming, and compass see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on oil change. It will not reset itself. calibration and zone setting on the display, that means 99% of the Also, be careful not to reset the vehicles with this feature. current oil life remains. The engine OIL LIFE display accidentally at any oil life system will alert you to change time other than when the oil has just 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this the oil on a schedule consistent with been changed. It cannot be reset button to display the odometer, your driving conditions. accurately until the next oil change. trip odometers, fuel range, average When the remaining oil life is low, To reset the engine oil life system, economy, timer, fuel used, and the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON see Engine Oil Life System on average speed. message will appear on the display. page 5-14. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC Warnings and Messages Instrument Panel 3-45

PARK ASSIST UNITS Press the vehicle information If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, button until UNITS displays. REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## press the vehicle information button This display allows you to select RIGHT ##. until PARK ASSIST displays. between English or Metric units of If a low or high tire pressure This display allows the system to measurement. Once in this display, condition is detected by the system be turned on or off. Once in this press the set/reset button to select while driving, a message advising display, press the set/reset button between ENGLISH or METRIC units. you to check the pressure in a to select between ON or OFF. If you All of the vehicle information will speciﬁc tire will appear in the display. choose ON, the system will be turned then be displayed in the unit of See Inﬂation - Tire Pressure on on. If you choose OFF, the system measurement selected. page 5-43 and DIC Warnings and will be turned off. The URPA system Messages on page 3-50 for more automatically turns back on after FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES information. each vehicle start. When the URPA On vehicles with the Tire Pressure If the tire pressure display shows system is turned off and the vehicle Monitor System (TPMS), the dashes instead of a value, there is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC pressure for each tire can be viewed may be a problem with your vehicle. will display the PARK ASSIST OFF in the DIC. The tire pressure will be If this consistently occurs, see message as a reminder that the shown in either pounds per square your dealer/retailer for service. system has been turned off. inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). See DIC Warnings and Messages Press the vehicle information button on page 3-50 and Ultrasonic Rear until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-34 PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. for more information. 3-46 Instrument Panel

RELEARN REMOTE KEY 4. To match additional transmitters Trip/Fuel Menu Items This display allows you to match at this time, repeat Step 3. 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Each vehicle can have a transmitters to your vehicle. maximum of eight transmitters to scroll through the following This procedure will erase all matched to it. menu items: previously learned transmitters. 5. To exit the programming mode, ODOMETER Therefore, they must be relearned you must cycle the key to as additional transmitters. Press the trip/fuel button until LOCK/OFF. ODOMETER displays. This display To match an RKE transmitter to shows the distance the vehicle your vehicle: COMPASS ZONE SETTING has been driven in either miles (mi) 1. Press the vehicle information This display will be available or kilometers (km). button until PRESS V TO if the vehicle has a compass. To switch between English and RELEARN REMOTE KEY See DIC Compass on page 3-48 metric measurements, see “UNITS” displays. for more information. earlier in this section. 2. Press the set/reset button until COMPASS RECALIBRATION REMOTE KEY LEARNING TRIP A and TRIP B ACTIVE is displayed. This display will be available if the vehicle has a compass. Press the trip/fuel button until 3. Press and hold the lock and See DIC Compass on page 3-48 TRIP A or TRIP B displays. unlock buttons on the ﬁrst for more information. This display shows the current transmitter at the same time distance traveled in either miles (mi) for about 15 seconds. Blank Display or kilometers (km) since the last On vehicles with memory recall This display shows no information. reset for each trip odometer. Both seats, the ﬁrst transmitter learned trip odometers can be used at the will match driver 1 and the same time. second will match driver 2. A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched. Instrument Panel 3-47

Each trip odometer can be reset to As the vehicle begins moving, the For example, if driving in traffic and zero separately by pressing the display will then increase to 5.1 miles making frequent stops, this display set/reset button while the desired (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. may read one number, but if the trip odometer is displayed. vehicle is driven on a freeway, the If the retro-active reset feature is number may change even though The trip odometer has a feature activated after the vehicle is started, the same amount of fuel is in the fuel called the retro-active reset. This can but before it begins moving, the tank. This is because different driving be used to set the trip odometer to display will show the number of conditions produce different fuel the number of miles (kilometers) miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that economies. Generally, freeway driven since the ignition was last were driven during the last ignition driving produces better fuel economy turned on. This can be used if the cycle. than city driving. Fuel range cannot trip odometer is not reset at the be reset. beginning of the trip. RANGE To use the retro-active reset feature, Press the trip/fuel button until AVG (Average) ECONOMY RANGE displays. This display press and hold the set/reset button Press the trip/fuel button until shows the approximate number for at least four seconds. The trip AVG ECONOMY displays. This of remaining miles (mi) or odometer will display the number of display shows the approximate kilometers (km) the vehicle miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven average miles per gallon (mpg) or can be driven without refueling. since the ignition was last turned liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). The display will show LOW if on and the vehicle was moving. This number is calculated based the fuel level is low. Once the vehicle begins moving, on the number of mpg (L/100 km) the trip odometer will accumulate The fuel range estimate is based recorded since the last time mileage. For example, if the vehicle on an average of the vehicle’s fuel this menu item was reset. was driven 5 miles (8 km) before economy over recent driving history To reset AVG ECONOMY, press it is started again, and then the and the amount of fuel remaining in and hold the set/reset button. retro-active reset feature is activated, the fuel tank. This estimate will the display will show 5 miles (8 km). change if driving conditions change. 3-48 Instrument Panel

TIMER FUEL USED DIC Compass Press the trip/fuel button until Press the trip/fuel button until Your vehicle may have a TIMER displays. This display FUEL USED displays. This display compass in the Driver Information can be used as a timer. shows the number of gallons (gal) Center (DIC). or liters (L) of fuel used since To start the timer, press the the last reset of this menu item. Compass Zone set/reset button while TIMER is To reset the fuel used information, displayed. The display will show The zone is set to zone eight press and hold the set/reset the amount of time that has passed upon leaving the factory. Your button while FUEL USED is since the timer was last reset, dealer/retailer will set the correct displayed. not including time the ignition is off. zone for your location. Time will continue to be counted AVG (Average) SPEED Under certain circumstances, as long as the ignition is on, even such as during a long distance if another display is being shown Press the trip/fuel button until AVG SPEED displays. This display cross-country trip or moving to a new on the DIC. The timer will record state or province, it will be necessary up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and shows the average speed of the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) to compensate for compass variance 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which by resetting the zone through the the display will return to zero. or kilometers per hour (km/h). This average is calculated based DIC if the zone is not set correctly. To stop the timer, press the set/ on the various vehicle speeds Compass variance is the difference reset button brieﬂy while TIMER is recorded since the last reset of this between the earth’s magnetic north displayed. value. To reset the value to zero, and true geographic north. If the To reset the timer to zero, press press and hold the set/reset button. compass is not set to the zone where and hold the set/reset button while Blank Display you live, the compass may give false TIMER is displayed. readings. The compass must be set This display shows no information. to the variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling. Instrument Panel 3-49

To adjust for compass variance, Compass Calibration use the following procedure: The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate the Compass Variance (Zone) compass in a magnetically clean Procedure and safe location, such as an 1. Do not set the compass zone open parking lot, where driving the when the vehicle is moving. vehicle in circles is not a danger. Only set it when the vehicle It is suggested to calibrate away from is in P (Park). tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or other industrial structures, Press the vehicle information if possible. button until PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE If CAL should ever appear in the displays. 2. Find the vehicle’s current DIC display, the compass should be location and variance zone calibrated. number on the map. If the DIC display does not show a Zones 1 through 15 are available. heading, for example, N for North, or 3. Press the set/reset button the heading does not change after to scroll through and select the making turns, there may be a strong appropriate variance zone. magnetic ﬁeld interfering with the compass. Such interference may be 4. Press the trip/fuel button until the caused by a magnetic CB or cell vehicle heading, for example, N phone antenna mount, a magnetic for North, is displayed in the DIC. emergency light, magnetic note pad 5. If calibration is necessary, holder, or any other magnetic item. calibrate the compass. Turn off the vehicle, move the See “Compass Calibration magnetic item, then turn on the Procedure” following. vehicle and calibrate the compass. 3-50 Instrument Panel

To calibrate the compass, use the 4. The DIC will display Some messages may not require following procedure: CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN immediate action, but you can CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle press any of the DIC buttons on Compass Calibration Procedure in tight circles at less than the instrument panel to acknowledge 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the that you received the messages 1. Before calibrating the compass, calibration. The DIC will display and to clear them from the display. make sure the compass zone CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a Some messages cannot be cleared is set to the variance zone in few seconds when the calibration from the DIC display because they which the vehicle is located. is complete. The DIC display will are more urgent. These messages See “Compass Variance (Zone) then return to the previous menu. Procedure” earlier in this section. require action before they can be Do not operate any switches DIC Warnings and cleared. You should take any such as window, sunroof, climate messages that appear on the display controls, seats, etc. during the Messages seriously and remember that clearing calibration procedure. Messages are displayed on the DIC the messages will only make the messages disappear, not correct 2. Press the vehicle information to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that the problem. button until PRESS V TO some action may be needed by The following are the possible CALIBRATE COMPASS displays. the driver to correct the condition. messages that can be displayed 3. Press the set/reset button to start Multiple messages may appear one and some information about them. the compass calibration. after another. Instrument Panel 3-51

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF AUTOMATIC LIGHT Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery to recharge. If your vehicle has the All-Wheel CONTROL OFF Drive (AWD) system, this message This message displays when the The normal battery voltage range is displays when there is a compact automatic headlamps are turned off. 11.5 to 15.5 volts. spare tire on the vehicle, when This message clears itself after the Antilock Brake System (ABS) 10 seconds. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON warning light comes on, or when the This message displays when the rear differential ﬂuid is overheating. AUTOMATIC LIGHT engine oil needs to be changed. This message turns off when CONTROL ON When you change the engine oil, the differential ﬂuid cools. This message displays when the be sure to reset the CHANGE The AWD system is disabled until automatic headlamps are turned on. ENGINE OIL SOON message. the compact spare tire is replaced This message clears itself after See Engine Oil Life System on by a full-size tire. If the warning 10 seconds. page 5-14 for information on how message is still on after putting on to reset the message. See Engine the full-size tire, you need to reset BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE Oil on page 5-12 and Scheduled the warning message. To reset the This message displays when the Maintenance on page 6-3 for more warning message, turn the ignition system detects that the battery information. off and then back on again after voltage is dropping below expected 30 seconds. If the message stays on, levels. The battery saver system see your dealer/retailer right away. starts reducing certain features of See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System the vehicle that you may be able to on page 4-7 for more information. notice. At the point that the features are disabled, this message is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in the battery. 3-52 Instrument Panel

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE The DIC also shows the tire pressure ENGINE HOT A/C values. See DIC Operation and On vehicles with the Tire Pressure (Air Conditioning) OFF Displays on page 3-43. If the tire Monitor System (TPMS), this pressure is low, the low tire pressure This message displays when the message displays when the pressure warning light comes on. See Tire engine coolant becomes hotter than in one or more of the vehicle’s tires Pressure Light on page 3-37. the normal operating temperature. needs to be checked. This message See Engine Coolant Temperature also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT CRUISE SET TO XXX Gage on page 3-36. To avoid FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT added strain on a hot engine, REAR to indicate which tire needs to This message displays whenever the air conditioning compressor be checked. You can receive more the cruise control is set. See Cruise automatically turns off. When the than one tire pressure message at a Control on page 3-10 for more coolant temperature returns to time. To read the other messages information. normal, the air conditioning that may have been sent at the same DRIVER DOOR OPEN compressor turns back on. You time, press the set/reset button. If a can continue to drive your vehicle. tire pressure message appears on This message displays and a the DIC, stop as soon as you can. chime sounds if the driver door If this message continues to appear, Have the tire pressures checked is not fully closed and the vehicle have the system repaired by your and set to those shown on the Tire is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and dealer/retailer as soon as possible Loading Information label. See Tires turn off the vehicle, check the door to avoid damage to the engine. on page 5-37, Loading the Vehicle for obstructions, and close the door on page 4-16, and Inﬂation - Tire again. Check to see if the message Pressure on page 5-43. still appears on the DIC. Instrument Panel 3-53

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED ENGINE ENGINE This message displays and a Notice: If you drive your vehicle Notice: If you drive your vehicle chime sounds when the cooling while the engine is overheating, while the engine is overheating, system temperature gets too hot severe engine damage may occur. severe engine damage may occur. and the engine further enters If an overheat warning appears If an overheat warning appears the engine coolant protection on the instrument panel cluster on the instrument panel cluster mode. See Engine Overheating on and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as and/or DIC, stop the vehicle page 5-22 for further information. soon as possible. Do not increase as soon as possible. See Engine This message also displays when the engine speed above normal Overheating on page 5-22 for the vehicle’s engine power is idling speed. See Engine more information. reduced. Reduced engine power Overheating on page 5-22 for This message displays and a can affect the vehicle’s ability to more information. continuous chime sounds if the accelerate. If this message is on, but This message displays when the engine cooling system reaches there is no reduction in performance, engine coolant temperature is too unsafe temperatures for operation. proceed to your destination. hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to Stop and turn off the vehicle as The performance may be reduced idle until it cools down. See Engine soon as it is safe to do so to avoid the next time the vehicle is driven. Coolant Temperature Gage on severe damage. This message The vehicle may be driven at a page 3-36. clears when the engine has cooled reduced speed while this message is to a safe operating temperature. on, but acceleration and speed may See Overheated Engine Protection be reduced. Anytime this message Operating Mode on page 5-24 stays on, the vehicle should be taken for information on driving to a to your dealer/retailer for service as safe place in an emergency. soon as possible. 3-54 Instrument Panel

FUEL LEVEL LOW HEATING WASH (Washer) LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime FLUID WASH (Washer) WIPES This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel PENDING sounds if the driver side rear door is as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage If your vehicle has this feature, this not fully closed and the vehicle is on page 3-42 and Fuel on page 5-5 message displays when you turn on shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn for more information. the heated windshield washer ﬂuid off the vehicle, check the door for system. See “Heated Windshield obstructions, and close the door HEATED WASH (Washer) Washer” under Windshield Washer again. Check to see if the message FLUID SYSTEM OFF on page 3-8 for more information. still appears on the DIC. If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays when HOOD OPEN LIFTGATE OPEN you manually turn off the heated This message displays and a chime This message displays and a chime windshield washer ﬂuid system sounds if the hood is not fully closed. sounds if the liftgate is open while or when the system automatically Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off turns off. See “Heated Windshield the hood for obstructions, and close the vehicle and check the liftgate. Washer” under Windshield Washer the hood again. Check to see if the Restart the vehicle and check for the on page 3-8 for more information. message still appears on the DIC. message on the DIC display. This message clears itself after 10 seconds. ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly. Instrument Panel 3-55

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP PARK ASSIST OFF REMOTE KEY LEARNING ENGINE If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic ACTIVE Notice: If you drive your vehicle Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, This message displays while you are while the engine oil pressure after the vehicle has been started matching a Remote Keyless Entry is low, severe engine damage and shifted out of P (Park), this (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. may occur. If a low oil pressure message displays to remind the See “Matching Transmitter(s) to warning appears on the Driver driver that the URPA system has Your Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Information Center (DIC), stop been turned off. Press the set/reset Entry (RKE) System Operation on the vehicle as soon as possible. button to acknowledge this message page 2-4 and DIC Operation and Do not drive the vehicle until and clear it from the DIC display. Displays on page 3-43 for more the cause of the low oil pressure To turn the URPA system back on, information. is corrected. See Engine Oil see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist on page 5-12 for more (URPA) on page 2-34. REPLACE BATTERY IN information. REMOTE KEY PASSENGER DOOR OPEN This message displays if low oil This message displays if a Remote This message displays and a pressure levels occur. Stop the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter chime sounds if the passenger door vehicle as soon as safely possible battery is low. The battery needs is not fully closed and the vehicle is and do not operate it until the cause to be replaced in the transmitter. shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn of the low oil pressure has been See “Battery Replacement” under off the vehicle, check the door for corrected. Check the oil as soon Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) obstructions, and close the door as possible and have your vehicle System Operation on page 2-4. again. Check to see if the message serviced by your dealer/retailer. still appears on the DIC. See Engine Oil on page 5-12. 3-56 Instrument Panel

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN SERVICE AIR BAG SERVICE BATTERY This message displays and a chime This message displays if there is CHARGING SYSTEM sounds if the passenger side rear a problem with the airbag system. On some vehicles, this message door is not fully closed and the Have your dealer/retailer inspect the displays if there is a problem with vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). system for problems. See Airbag the battery charging system. Under Stop and turn off the vehicle, check Readiness Light on page 3-31 and certain conditions, the charging the door for obstructions, and close Airbag System on page 1-45 for system light may also turn on in the door again. Check to see if the more information. the instrument panel cluster. message still appears on the DIC. See Charging System Light on SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE page 3-33. Driving with this problem SERVICE A/C could drain the battery. Turn off all If your vehicle has the All-Wheel (Air Conditioning) SYSTEM unnecessary accessories. Have the Drive (AWD) system, this message electrical system checked as soon as This message displays when displays if there is a problem possible. See your dealer/retailer. the electronic sensors that control with this system. If this message the air conditioning and heating appears, stop as soon as possible SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM systems are no longer working. and turn off the vehicle. Restart This message displays along with Have the climate control system the vehicle after 30 seconds the brake system warning light if serviced by your dealer/retailer and check for the message on there is a problem with the brake if you notice a drop in heating the DIC display. If the message system. See Brake System Warning and air conditioning efficiency. is still displayed or appears again Light on page 3-34. If this message when you begin driving, the appears, stop as soon as possible AWD system needs service. and turn off the vehicle. Restart the See your dealer/retailer. vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the brake system needs service as soon as possible. See your dealer/retailer. Instrument Panel 3-57

SERVICE PARK ASSIST SERVICE STABILITRAK SERVICE TIRE MONITOR If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic This message displays if there SYSTEM Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, is a problem with the StabiliTrak® On vehicles with the Tire Pressure this message displays if there is a system. If this message appears, Monitor System (TPMS), this problem with the URPA system. try to reset the system. Stop; turn off message displays if a part on the Do not use this system to help you the engine for at least 15 seconds; TPMS is not working properly. park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking then start the engine again. If this The tire pressure light also ﬂashes Assist (URPA) on page 2-34 message still comes on, it means and then remains on during the for more information. See your there is a problem. See your dealer/ same ignition cycle. See Tire dealer/retailer for service. retailer for service. The vehicle is Pressure Light on page 3-37. safe to drive, however, you do not Several conditions may cause SERVICE POWER STEERING have the beneﬁt of StabiliTrak, this message to appear. See Tire This message displays when a so reduce your speed and drive Pressure Monitor Operation on problem is detected with the power accordingly. page 5-46 for more information. If the warning comes on and stays steering system. When this message SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT is displayed, you may notice that the on, there may be a problem with the effort required to steer the vehicle SYSTEM TPMS. See your dealer/retailer. increases or feels heavier, but you This message displays when there will still be able to steer the vehicle. is a problem with the theft-deterrent SERVICE TRACTION Have your vehicle serviced by your system. The vehicle may or may CONTROL dealer/retailer immediately. not restart so you may want to take This message displays when there the vehicle to your dealer/retailer is a problem with the Traction Control before turning off the engine. System (TCS). When this message See PASS-Key¨ III+ Electronic is displayed, the system will not limit Immobilizer Operation on page 2-18 wheel spin. Adjust your driving for more information. accordingly. See your dealer/retailer for service. See StabiliTrak¨ System on page 4-5 for more information. 3-58 Instrument Panel

SERVICE TRANSMISSION STARTING DISABLED allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with This message displays when there SERVICE THROTTLE the cap properly installed should is a problem with the transmission. This message displays when your turn this light and message off. See your dealer/retailer for service. vehicle’s throttle system is not functioning properly. Have your TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE SERVICE VEHICLE SOON vehicle serviced by your dealer/ This message displays when the This message displays when retailer. Tire Pressure Monitor System a non-emissions related malfunction (TPMS) is re-learning the tire occurs. Have the vehicle serviced THEFT ATTEMPTED positions on your vehicle. The tire by your dealer/retailer as soon This message displays if the content positions must be re-learned after as possible. theft-deterrent system has detected rotating the tires or after replacing a a break-in attempt while you tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection SPEED LIMITED TO were away from your vehicle. XXX MPH (KM/H) and Rotation on page 5-49, Tire See Content Theft-Deterrent on Pressure Monitor System on This message displays when your page 2-16 for more information. page 5-44, and Inﬂation - Tire vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph TIGHTEN GAS CAP Pressure on page 5-43 for more (128 km/h) because the vehicle information. detects a problem in the speed This message may display along variable assist steering system. with the check engine light on TRACTION CONTROL OFF Have your vehicle serviced by the instrument panel cluster if the This message displays when your dealer/retailer. vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened the Traction Control System (TCS) properly. See Malfunction Indicator is turned off. Adjust your driving Lamp on page 3-37. Reinstall accordingly. See StabiliTrak¨ the fuel cap fully. See Filling the System on page 4-5 for more Tank on page 5-7. The diagnostic information. This message clears system can determine if the fuel itself after 10 seconds. cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap Instrument Panel 3-59

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE TURN SIGNAL ON DIC Vehicle ENGINE This message displays and a chime Customization sounds if a turn signal is left on Notice: If you drive your vehicle Your vehicle may have for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the while the transmission fluid is customization capabilities that turn signal/multifunction lever to overheating and the transmission allow you to program certain the off position. temperature warning is displayed features to one preferred setting. on the instrument panel cluster WASHER FLUID LOW ADD Customization features can only be and/or DIC, you can damage the FLUID programmed to one setting on the transmission. This could lead to vehicle and cannot be programmed costly repairs that would not be This message displays when to a preferred setting for two different covered by your warranty. Do not the windshield washer fluid is low. drivers. drive your vehicle with overheated Fill the windshield washer fluid transmission fluid or while the reservoir as soon as possible. See All of the customization options may transmission temperature warning Engine Compartment Overview on not be available on your vehicle. is displayed. page 5-10 for the location of the Only the options available will windshield washer fluid reservoir. be displayed on the DIC. This message displays and a chime Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid sounds if the transmission fluid in the The default settings for the on page 5-25 for more information. vehicle gets hot. Driving with the customization features were set transmission fluid temperature high when your vehicle left the factory, can cause damage to the vehicle. but may have been changed Stop the vehicle and let it idle to from their default state since then. allow the transmission to cool. The customization preferences This message clears when the fluid are automatically recalled. temperature reaches a safe level. To change customization preferences, use the following procedure. 3-60 Instrument Panel

Entering the Feature Feature Settings Menu Items Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen Settings Menu The following are customization appears on the DIC display. Press 1. Turn the ignition on and place features that allow you to program the set/reset button once to access the vehicle in P (Park). settings to the vehicle: the settings for this feature. Then To avoid excessive drain on the DISPLAY IN ENGLISH press the customization button to battery, it is recommended that scroll through the following settings: the headlamps are turned off. This feature will only display if a language other than English has ENGLISH (default): All messages 2. Press the customization button been set. This feature allows you to will appear in English. to enter the feature settings change the language in which the menu. If the menu is not DIC messages appear to English. FRANCAIS: All messages will available, FEATURE SETTINGS appear in French. AVAILABLE IN PARK will display. Press the customization button until ESPANOL: All messages will Before entering the menu, make the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN appear in Spanish. sure the vehicle is in P (Park). ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset NO CHANGE: No change will be button once to display all DIC made to this feature. The current messages in English. setting will remain. DISPLAY LANGUAGE To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired This feature allows you to select setting is displayed on the DIC. the language in which the DIC messages will appear. Instrument Panel 3-61

AUTO DOOR LOCK NO CHANGE: No change will be DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the This feature allows you to made to this feature. The current driver’s door will unlock when select when the vehicle’s doors setting will remain. the key is taken out of the ignition. will automatically lock. See To select a setting, press the DRIVER IN PARK: Only the Programmable Automatic Door set/reset button while the desired driver’s door will unlock when the Locks on page 2-9 for more setting is displayed on the DIC. vehicle is shifted into P (Park). information. AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors Press the customization button until This feature allows you to select will unlock when the key is taken AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on out of the ignition. the DIC display. Press the set/reset whether or not to turn off the button once to access the settings automatic door unlocking feature. ALL IN PARK (default): All of for this feature. Then press the It also allows you to select which the doors will unlock when customization button to scroll doors and when the doors will the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). through the following settings: automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic Door NO CHANGE: No change will SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): Locks on page 2-9 for more be made to this feature. The current The doors will automatically lock information. setting will remain. when the vehicle is shifted out of To select a setting, press the P (Park). Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on set/reset button while the desired AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. will automatically lock when the button once to access the settings vehicle speed is above 8 mph for this feature. Then press the (13 km/h) for three seconds. customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock. 3-62 Instrument Panel

REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN & LIGHTS (default): Press the customization button until This feature allows you to select The exterior lamps will flash when REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears the type of feedback you will receive you press the lock button on on the DIC display. Press the when locking the vehicle with the the RKE transmitter, and the horn set/reset button once to access the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) will sound when the lock button settings for this feature. Then press transmitter. You will not receive is pressed again within five seconds the customization button to scroll feedback when locking the vehicle of the previous command. through the following settings: with the RKE transmitter if the doors NO CHANGE: No change will be LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps are open. See Remote Keyless made to this feature. The current will not flash when you press Entry (RKE) System Operation on setting will remain. the unlock button on the RKE page 2-4 for more information. transmitter. To select a setting, press the Press the customization button until set/reset button while the desired LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on setting is displayed on the DIC. lamps will flash when you press the DIC display. Press the set/reset the unlock button on the RKE button once to access the settings REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK transmitter. for this feature. Then press the This feature allows you to select customization button to scroll the type of feedback you will receive NO CHANGE: No change will be through the following settings: when unlocking the vehicle with made to this feature. The current OFF: There will be no feedback the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) setting will remain. when you press the lock button on transmitter. You will not receive To select a setting, press the the RKE transmitter. feedback when unlocking the vehicle set/reset button while the desired LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps with the RKE transmitter if the doors setting is displayed on the DIC. will flash when you press the lock are open. See Remote Keyless button on the RKE transmitter. Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for more information. HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. Instrument Panel 3-63

DELAY DOOR LOCK Then press the customization button Press the customization button until This feature allows you to select to scroll through the following EXIT LIGHTING appears on the whether or not the locking of the settings: DIC display. Press the set/reset vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be button once to access the settings OFF: There will be no delayed for this feature. Then press the delayed. When locking the doors locking of the vehicle’s doors. and liftgate with the power door customization button to scroll lock switch and a door or the liftgate ON (default): The doors will not through the following settings: is open, this feature will delay lock until ﬁve seconds after the last OFF: The exterior lamps will not locking the doors and liftgate until door or the liftgate is closed. turn on. ﬁve seconds after the last door is NO CHANGE: No change will be closed. You will hear three chimes 30 SECONDS (default): The made to this feature. The current exterior lamps will stay on for to signal that the delayed locking setting will remain. feature is in use. The key must be 30 seconds. To select a setting, press the out of the ignition for this feature to 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will set/reset button while the desired work. You can temporarily override stay on for one minute. delayed locking by pressing the setting is displayed on the DIC. power door lock switch twice or the 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will lock button on the RKE transmitter EXIT LIGHTING stay on for two minutes. twice. See Delayed Locking on This feature allows you to select the page 2-8 for more information. amount of time you want the exterior NO CHANGE: No change will be lamps to remain on when it is dark made to this feature. The current Press the customization button enough outside. This happens after setting will remain. until DELAY DOOR LOCK appears the key is turned from ON/RUN to on the DIC display. Press the To select a setting, press the LOCK/OFF. set/reset button once to access set/reset button while the desired the settings for this feature. setting is displayed on the DIC. 3-64 Instrument Panel

APPROACH LIGHTING ON (default): If it is dark enough CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select outside, the exterior lights will This feature allows you to select the whether or not to have the exterior turn on brieﬂy when you unlock the volume level of the chime. lights turn on brieﬂy during low light vehicle with the RKE transmitter. Press the customization button until periods after unlocking the vehicle The lights will remain on for CHIME VOLUME appears on the using the Remote Keyless Entry 20 seconds or until the lock button DIC display. Press the set/reset (RKE) transmitter. on the RKE transmitter is pressed, button once to access the settings Press the customization button until or the vehicle is no longer off. for this feature. Then press the APPROACH LIGHTING appears on See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) customization button to scroll the DIC display. Press the set/reset System Operation on page 2-4 through the following settings: button once to access the settings for more information. for this feature. Then press the NORMAL: The chime volume will NO CHANGE: No change will be be set to a normal level. customization button to scroll made to this feature. The current through the following settings: setting will remain. LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level. OFF: The exterior lights will not To select a setting, press the turn on when you unlock the vehicle set/reset button while the desired NO CHANGE: No change will be with the RKE transmitter. setting is displayed on the DIC. made to this feature. The current setting will remain. There is no default for chime volume. The volume will stay at the last known setting. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. Instrument Panel 3-65

PARK TILT MIRRORS DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s EASY EXIT SEAT If your vehicle has this feature, outside mirror will be tilted If your vehicle has this feature, it it allows you to select whether down when the vehicle is shifted allows you to select your preference or not the outside mirror(s) into R (Reverse). for the automatic easy exit seat will automatically tilt down when the PASSENGER MIRROR: The feature. See Memory Seat and vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). passenger’s outside mirror will be Mirrors on page 1-5 for more See Outside Power Foldaway tilted down when the vehicle is information. Mirrors on page 2-32 for more shifted into R (Reverse). Press the customization button until information. BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and EASY EXIT SEAT appears on Press the customization button until passenger’s outside mirrors will the DIC display. Press the set/reset PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on be tilted down when the vehicle is button once to access the settings the DIC display. Press the set/reset shifted into R (Reverse). for this feature. Then press the button once to access the settings customization button to scroll for this feature. Then press the NO CHANGE: No change will be through the following settings: customization button to scroll made to this feature. The current through the following settings: setting will remain. OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will occur. OFF (default): Neither outside To select a setting, press the mirror will be tilted down when the set/reset button while the desired ON: The driver’s seat will move vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). setting is displayed on the DIC. back when the key is removed from the ignition. The steering column will also move up and forward on vehicles with the power tilt and telescopic steering feature. See Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering Column on page 3-6 for more information. 3-66 Instrument Panel

The automatic easy exit seat MEMORY SEAT RECALL ON: The driver’s seat and outside movement will only occur one time If your vehicle has this feature, it mirrors will automatically move after the key is removed from the allows you to select your preference to the stored driving position when ignition. If the automatic movement for the remote memory seat recall the unlock button on the Remote has already occurred, and you put feature. See Memory Seat and Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is the key back in the ignition and Mirrors on page 1-5 for more pressed. The steering column remove it again, the seat and information. will also move on vehicles with the steering column will stay in the power tilt and telescopic steering original exit position, unless a Press the customization button until feature. See Power Tilt Wheel and memory recall took place prior MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears Telescopic Steering Column on to removing the key again. on the DIC display. Press the page 3-6 for more information. set/reset button once to access the See “Relearn Remote Key” under NO CHANGE: No change will be settings for this feature. Then press DIC Operation and Displays on made to this feature. The current the customization button to scroll page 3-43 for more information setting will remain. through the following settings: on matching transmitters to driver ID numbers. To select a setting, press the OFF (default): No remote memory set/reset button while the desired seat recall will occur. NO CHANGE: No change will be setting is displayed on the DIC. made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. Instrument Panel 3-67

REMOTE START ON (default): The remote start DO NOT RESTORE: The If your vehicle has this feature, feature will be enabled. customization features will not be set to their factory default settings. it allows you to turn the remote start NO CHANGE: No change will be off or on. The remote start feature made to this feature. The current To select a setting, press the allows you to start the engine from setting will remain. set/reset button while the desired outside of the vehicle using the setting is displayed on the DIC. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) To select a setting, press the transmitter. See Remote Vehicle set/reset button while the desired EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS setting is displayed on the DIC. Start on page 2-5 for more This feature allows you to exit the information. FACTORY SETTINGS feature settings menu. Press the customization button until This feature allows you to set all of Press the customization button until REMOTE START appears on the the customization features back FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V TO DIC display. Press the set/reset to their factory default settings. EXIT appears in the DIC display. button once to access the settings Press the set/reset button once to for this feature. Then press the Press the customization button exit the menu. customization button to scroll until FACTORY SETTINGS appears through the following settings: on the DIC display. Press the If you do not exit, pressing the set/reset button once to access the customization button again will return OFF: The remote start feature will settings for this feature. Then press you to the beginning of the feature be disabled. the customization button to scroll settings menu. through the following settings: RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features will be set to their factory default settings. 3-68 Instrument Panel

Exiting the Feature Audio System(s) For more information, see Defensive Settings Menu Driving on page 4-2. Determine which radio the vehicle The feature settings menu will be has and read the following pages to Notice: Contact your dealer/ exited when any of the following become familiar with its features. retailer before adding any occurs: equipment. • The vehicle is shifted out of { CAUTION Adding audio or communication P (Park). equipment could interfere • The vehicle is no longer in Taking your eyes off the road with the operation of the vehicle’s ON/RUN. for extended periods could cause engine, radio, or other systems, and could damage them. • The trip/fuel or vehicle a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others. Do not Follow federal rules covering information DIC buttons mobile radio and telephone give extended attention to are pressed. equipment. entertainment tasks while driving. • The end of the feature settings The vehicle has Retained Accessory menu is reached and exited. This system provides access to Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio • A 40 second time period has many audio and non audio listings. system can be played even after the elapsed with no selection made. ignition is turned off. See Retained To minimize taking your eyes Accessory Power (RAP) on off the road while driving, do the page 2-22 for more information. following while the vehicle is parked: • Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. • Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. Instrument Panel 3-69

Setting the Clock the radio clock display is disabled Adjusting the Time and Date and the OFF display indicates the 1. Turn the ignition key to The vehicle has an analog clock radio clock display is enabled. and a digital radio clock. The digital ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, radio clock can be enabled or • If the radio clock display then press O, to turn the disabled. is turned on, the screen radio on. displays Radio Clock ON Enabling/Disabling the Digital for 10 seconds, then returns 2. Press G to display HR, MIN, Radio Clock to the original clock MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, display menu. month, day, and year). To enable or disable the radio clock display: • If the radio clock display 3. Press the pushbutton located H is turned off, the screen under any one of the labels to 1. Press until the clock and date displays Radio Clock OFF for be changed. setting menus appear. 10 seconds. The menus for 4. To increase the time or date, do 2. Press the pushbutton located clock and date settings are one of the following: under the forward arrow label removed, and ON displays as a current status indicating • Press the pushbutton below until the menu for default the selected label. clock and date settings appear. that the clock display can be turned on. • Press ¨SEEK. 3. Press the pushbutton located \ under the currently displayed If the radio clock and analog clock • Press FWD. status of either ON or OFF to are not synchronized. Use the • Turn f clockwise. toggle the radio clock display on procedure below to synchronize or off. The ON display indicates both clocks. 5. To decrease the time or date, do one of the following: • Press ©SEEK. • Press s REV. • Turn f counter-clockwise. 3-70 Instrument Panel

Changing the Time and Date Radio(s) Default Setting To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year: 1. Press G and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that displays on the radio screen until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) displays. 2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired option. 3. Press G again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out. Radio with CD Instrument Panel 3-71

The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Radio Data System (RDS) The Radio Data System (RDS) feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon Radio with CD and DVD receiving speciﬁc information from these stations and only works when The vehicle may have one of these If the vehicle has a Rear Seat the information is available. While the radios as its audio system. Entertainment (RSE) system, radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear the station name or call letters Radios with CD and DVD Seat Entertainment (RSE) System display. In rare cases, a radio station Radios with CD and DVD have a on page 3-108 for more information could broadcast incorrect information ® Bose Surround Sound System. on the vehicle’s RSE system. that causes the radio features to Some of its features are explained work improperly. If this happens, later in this section under, “Adjusting contact the radio station. the Speakers (Balance/Fade)”. 3-72 Instrument Panel

Playing the Radio 4 (Information): Press to switch the To activate SCV: display between the radio station O (Power/Volume): Press to turn 1. Set the radio volume to the frequency and the time. When the desired level. the system on and off. Turn to ignition is in the OFF position, increase or decrease the volume. 4 2. Press the MENU button to press to display the time. For display the radio setup menu. For vehicles with a Rear vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA or 3. Press the pushbutton under Entertainment System (RSE), press RDS features, press 4 to display and hold for more than two seconds the AUTO VOLUM (automatic additional text information related to to turn off the entire radio and RSE volume) label on the radio the current FM-RDS or XM station; system and to start the parental display. or CD, MP3 or WMA song. If control feature. Parental control information is available during XM, 4. Press the pushbutton under the prevents the rear seat occupant from CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the desired Speed Compensated operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) song title information displays on Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, system or remote control. the top line of the display and artist or High) to select the level of radio A lock symbol displays next to information displays on the bottom volume compensation. Press the the clock display while the parental line. When information is not pushbutton located below the control feature is being used. available, “NO INFO” is displayed. BACK label on the MENU SETUP display or let the display time out The feature remains on until O is Speed Compensated Volume after approximately 10 seconds. pressed and held for more than (SCV): The Speed Compensated Each higher setting allows for two seconds, or the driver turns the Volume (SCV) feature automatically more radio volume compensation ignition off and exits the vehicle. adjusts the radio volume to at faster vehicle speeds. compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down, so that the volume level is consistent. Instrument Panel 3-73

Finding a Station Storing a Radio Station as a The balance/fade and tone settings Favorite that were previously adjusted, BAND: Press to switch between are stored with the favorite stations. AM, FM, or XM. The selection Drivers are encouraged to set up displays. their radio station favorites while the To store a station as a favorite: vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to favorite 1. Tune to the desired radio station. f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations using the presets, favorites stations. button, and steering wheel controls. 2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the station. © ¨ See Defensive Driving on page 4-2. SEEK : Press to go to the 3. Press and hold one of the FAV (Favorites): A maximum of previous or to the next station six pushbuttons until a beep 36 stations can be programmed as and stay there. sounds. When that pushbutton favorites using the six pushbuttons is pressed and released, the To scan stations, press and positioned below the radio station station that was set, returns. hold © or ¨ until a beep sounds. frequency labels and by using the The radio goes to a station, plays for radio favorites page button (FAV 4. Repeat the steps for each radio a few seconds, then goes to the next button). Press to go through up to station to be stored as a favorite. station. Press either arrow again to six pages of favorites, each having stop scanning. six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can The radio only seeks and scans contain any combination of AM, FM, stations with a strong signal that are or XM stations. in the selected band. 3-74 Instrument Panel

To setup the number of favorites Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, Setting the Tone pages: CD, MP3, and WMA features): If (Bass/Midrange/Treble) additional information is available for 1. Press MENU to display the radio BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, setup menu. the current song being played, Auto Text will automatically page/scroll the or Treble): To adjust bass, 2. Press the pushbutton located information every ﬁve seconds above midrange, or treble: below the FAV 1-6 label. the FAV presets on the radio display. 1. Press f until the tone control 3. Select the desired number of To activate Auto Text: labels display. favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below 1. Press MENU to display the radio 2. Continue pressing f to highlight the displayed page numbers. setup menu. the desired label, or press the pushbutton under the desired 4. Press FAV, or let the menu 2. Press the pushbutton under label. time out, to return to the original AUTO TXT label on the radio main radio screen showing the display. 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, radio station frequency labels 3. Press the pushbutton under the do one of the following until the and to begin the process of ON label on the radio display. desired levels are obtained. programming favorites for the • Turn f clockwise or chosen amount of numbered If 4 is pressed and the song title counterclockwise. pages. or artist information is longer than what can be displayed, • Press \ FWD, or s REV. the extra information will page every ﬁve seconds when Auto If a station’s frequency is weak or if Text is activated. there is static, decrease the treble. Instrument Panel 3-75

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, Adjusting the Speakers To quickly adjust all speaker and or treble to the middle position, (Balance/Fade) tone controls to the middle position, press the pushbutton positioned press f for more than two seconds BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): under the BASS, MID, or TREB until a beep sounds. label for more than two seconds. To adjust the balance or fade: Radios with CD and DVD fade A beep sounds and the level adjusts 1. Press f until the speaker control to the middle position. differently depending on the DVD labels display. Media type: To quickly adjust all tone and 2. Continue pressing f to highlight speaker controls to the middle • With DVD-A 5.1 Surround the desired label, or press the media, the left front and right position, press f for more than pushbutton under the desired front speakers fade rearward, two seconds until a beep sounds. label. leaving the center front speakers EQ (Equalization): Press to 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, unaffected until the last fade step, choose bass and treble equalization do one of the following until the then all front speakers mute. settings designed for different types desired levels are obtained. • With DVD-V 5.1 Surround media, of music. The choices are pop, rock, • Turn f clockwise or surround sound is maintained country, talk, jazz, and classical. until Step 4 of the Fade control is counterclockwise. Selecting MANUAL or changing reached while fading rearward. bass or treble, returns the EQ to the • Press \ FWD, or s REV. At that point the audio system manual bass and treble settings. output changes to Stereo to To quickly adjust balance or fade prevent the loss of Center Unique EQ settings can be saved for to the middle position, press the each source. channel output when the full pushbutton positioned under the rearward fade position is reached. If the radio has a Bose® audio BAL or FADE label for more than system, the EQ settings are either two seconds. A beep sounds and the If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is MANUAL or TALK. level adjusts to the middle position. turned on, the radio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers. 3-76 Instrument Panel

Finding a Category (CAT) 4. Press either of the two buttons Undesired XM categories can Station below the desired category label be removed through the setup to immediately tune to the first menu. To remove an undesired CAT (Category): The CAT button is XM station associated with that category, perform the following: used to find XM™ stations when the category. radio is in the XM mode. To find XM 1. Press MENU to display the radio channels within a desired category: 5. To go to the next or previous setup menu. XM station within the selected 2. Press the pushbutton located 1. Press BAND until the XM category, do one of the following: frequency displays. below the XM CAT label. • Turn f. 2. Press CAT to display the 3. Turn f to display the category to category labels. • Press the buttons below the be removed. right or left arrows on the 3. Continue pressing CAT until the 4. Press the pushbutton located display. desired category name displays. under the Remove label until • Press either SEEK arrow. • Radios with CD and DVD can the category name along with also navigate the category 6. To exit the category search the word Removed displays. list by pressing s REV mode, press the FAV button 5. Repeat the steps to remove \ or BAND button to display more categories. or FWD. the favorites again. Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label. Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). Instrument Panel 3-77

Radio Messages XM™ Satellite Radio Service Playing a CD Calibration Error: The audio XM is a satellite radio service (Single CD Player) system has been calibrated for the that is based in the 48 contiguous Insert a CD partway into the slot, vehicle from the factory. If Calibration United States and 10 Canadian label side up. The player pulls Error displays, it means that the radio provinces. XM Satellite Radio it in and the CD should begin has not been conﬁgured properly for has a wide variety of programming playing. the vehicle and it must be returned to and commercial-free music, your dealer/retailer for service. coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality Playing a CD (In Either the sound. During your trial or when you DVD or CD Slot) Locked: This message displays subscribe, you will get unlimited ® Insert a CD partway into the slot, when the THEFTLOCK system access to XM Radio Online for when has locked up the radio. Take the label side up. The player pulls it in you are not in the vehicle. A service and the CD should begin playing vehicle to your dealer/retailer for fee is required to receive the XM service. (loading a disc into the system, service. For more information, depending on media type and format If any error occurs repeatedly or if an contact XM at xmradio.com or call ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a error cannot be corrected, contact 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and CD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVD your dealer/retailer. xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 to begin playing). in Canada. If the ignition or radio is turned Radio Messages for XM Only off, while a CD is in the player, See XM Radio Messages on it stays in the player. When the page 3-96 later in this section for ignition or radio is turned on, the CD further detail. starts playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. 3-78 Instrument Panel

The CD is controlled by the buttons Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their Care of the CD and DVD Player on the radio faceplate or by the RSA original cases or other protective Do not add any label to a CD, it unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on cases and away from direct sunlight could get caught in the CD or DVD page 3-117 for more information. and dust. The CD or DVD player player. If a CD is recorded on a The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is scans the bottom surface of the disc. personal computer and a description the DVD deck and the lower slot If the surface of a CD is damaged, label is needed, try labeling the top of is the CD deck) of the radio are such as cracked, broken, or the recorded CD with a marking pen. compatible with most audio CDs, scratched, the CD does not play CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3/WMAs. properly or not at all. Do not touch The use of CD lens cleaners for the bottom side of a CD while CDs is not advised, due to the risk When a CD is inserted, the text label handling it; this could damage the of contaminating the lens of the DVD or CD symbol displays on surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the CD optics with lubricants internal to the left side of the radio display. outer edges or the edge of the hole the CD and DVD player mechanism. As each new track starts to play, and the outer edge. the track number displays. Notice: If a label is added to If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a CD, or more than one CD is Care of CDs and DVDs a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a inserted into the slot at a time, If playing a CD-R, the sound quality clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral or an attempt is made to play can be reduced due to CD-R or detergent solution mixed with water, scratched or damaged CDs, the CD-RW quality, the method of and clean it. Make sure the wiping CD player could be damaged. recording, the quality of the music process starts from the center to While using the CD player, use that has been recorded, and the way the edge. only CDs in good condition the CD-R or CD-RW has been without any label, load one CD at a handled. Handle them carefully. time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris. Instrument Panel 3-79

If an error displays, see “CD f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Messages” later in this section. the CD that is currently playing. and hold to advance playback quickly within a track. Sound will be Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press ©SEEK ¨: Press © to go to the heard at a reduced volume. Release and release to eject the disc that is start of the current track, if more than to resume playing the track. The currently playing. A CD ejecting from ten seconds on the CD have played. elapsed time of the track displays. a radio with CD and DVD, ejects from Press ¨ to go to the next track. the bottom slot. A beep sounds and RDM (Random): CD tracks can be Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc For Radios with CD and DVD, listened to in random, rather than is ejected, Remove Disc displays. press © to go to the start of sequential order with the random The disc can be removed. If the setting. To use random, press the the current track, if more than disc is not removed, after several pushbutton positioned under the five seconds on the CD have played. seconds, the disc automatically RDM label until Random Current If less than five seconds on the CD pulls back into the player. Disc displays. Press the pushbutton have played, the previous track again to turn off random play. Z DVD (Eject): Press and release plays. Press ¨ to go to the next to eject the disc that is currently track. BAND: Press to listen to the playing in the top slot. A beep radio when a CD is playing. The CD If either arrow is held, or pressed sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. remains inside the radio for future multiple times, the player continues listening. If loading and reading of a disc moving backward or forward through cannot be completed, and the the tracks on the CD. For the radio with CD and DVD, disc fails to eject, press and press to listen to the radio when a s REV (Fast Reverse): Press CD or DVD is playing. The CD or hold Z DVD for more than and hold to reverse playback quickly DVD remains inside the radio for five seconds to force the disc within a track. Sound will be heard future listening or for viewing to eject. at a reduced volume. Release to entertainment. resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays. 3-80 Instrument Panel

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to • If an auxiliary input device is not Radios with CD and DVD select between CD, or Auxiliary. connected, and a disc is in both Audio Output the DVD slot and the CD slot the • When a CD is in the player Only one audio source can be heard DVD/CD AUX button only cycles the CD icon and a message through the speakers at one time. An between the two sources and showing the disc and/or track audio source is deﬁned as DVD slot, does not indicate “No Aux Input number displays. CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Device”. • If an auxiliary input device is not Jack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack. connected, “No Input Device • If a front auxiliary input device is Press O to turn the radio on. Found” displays. connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available The radio can be heard through all DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press options. of the vehicle speakers. to select between DVD, CD, or Front seat passengers can listen Auxiliary. If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat operator can turn to the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by • If an auxiliary input device is not on the video screen and use the pressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX to connected, “No Aux Input Device” remote control to only navigate the select the CD slot, DVD slot, front or displays. CD tracks through the remote rear auxiliary input (if available). • When a disc is in either slot, control. If a playback device is plugged into the DVD/CD text label and a See “Using the Auxiliary Input the radio’s front auxiliary input jack or message showing the track or Jack(s)” later in this section, or the rear auxiliary jack, the front seat chapter number displays. “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, passengers are able to listen to Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) playback from this source through System on page 3-108 for more the vehicle speakers. See “Using the information. Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-108 for more information. Instrument Panel 3-81

In some vehicles, depending on Disk Read Error: A disc was If any error occurs repeatedly or if audio options, the rear speakers can inserted with an invalid or unknown an error cannot be corrected, contact be muted when the RSA power is format. your dealer/retailer. If the radio turned on. See Rear Seat Audio displays an error message, write it (RSA) on page 3-117 for more Player Error: There are disc LOAD down and provide it to your dealer/ information. or disc EJECT problems. retailer when reporting the problem. • It is very hot. When the Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or temperature returns to normal, Using the DVD Player CD-RW Disc the CD should play. The DVD player can be controlled The radio has the capability of • The road is very rough. When by the buttons on the remote control, playing an MP3/WMA CD-R the road becomes smoother, the RSA system, or by the buttons on or CD-RW disc. For more the CD should play. the radio faceplate. See “Remote information on how to play an Control”, under Rear Seat MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, Entertainment (RSE) System on see “Using an MP3” in the index. or upside down. page 3-108 and Rear Seat Audio • The air is very humid. If so, wait (RSA) on page 3-117 for more CD Messages about an hour and try again. information. CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single • There could have been a problem The DVD player is only compatible CD player display CHECK DISC while burning the CD. with DVDs of the appropriate and/or ejects the CD if an error • The label could be caught in the region code that is printed on occurs. CD player. the jacket of most DVDs. Radios with a CD and DVD player If the CD is not playing correctly The DVD slot of the radio is may display other messages for any other reason, try a known compatible with most audio CDs, when an error occurs: good CD. CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/ Optical Error: The disc was RW media along with MP3 and WMA inserted upside down. formats. 3-82 Instrument Panel

If an error message displays on the SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD. video screen or the radio, see Press to go to the next track If the DVD is ejected, but not “DVD Display Error Messages” or chapter. This button may not removed, the player automatically under, Rear Seat Entertainment work when the DVD is playing pulls it back in after 15 seconds. (RSE) System on page 3-108 and the copyright information or “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this the previews. If loading and reading of a DVD section for more information. cannot be completed, because of an s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to unknown format, etc., and the disc Playing a DVD quickly reverse the DVD at five times fails to eject, press and hold for more than five seconds to force the disc f (Tune): Turn to change tracks the normal speed. The radio displays to eject. on a CD or DVD, to manually tune the elapsed time while in fast a radio station, or to change clock reverse. To stop fast reversing, DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons or date settings, while in the clock press again. This button may not Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio or date setting mode. See the work when the DVD is playing the display menu shows several icons. information given earlier in this copyright information or the Press the pushbuttons located section specific to the radio, CD, previews. under any desired icon during DVD and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press playback. See the icon list below Clock” in the index, for setting the for more information. clock and date. to fast forward the DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast The rear seat passenger can ©SEEK (Previous Track/ forwards five times the normal navigate the DVD-V menus and Chapter): Press to return to the speed. To stop fast forwarding, controls through the remote control. start of the current track or chapter. press again. This button may not See “Remote Control”, under Rear work when the DVD is playing the Press © again to go to the previous Seat Entertainment (RSE) System copyright information or the on page 3-108 for more information. track or chapter. This button may not previews. work when the DVD is playing the The Video Screen automatically copyright information or the turns on when the DVD-V is inserted previews. into the DVD slot. Instrument Panel 3-83 r / j (Play/Pause): Press either c (Stop): Press to stop playing, DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons the play or pause icon displayed rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Once a DVD-A is inserted, the on the radio system, to toggle r radio display menu shows several between pausing or restarting (Enter): Press to select the icons. Press the pushbuttons located playback of a DVD. choices that are highlighted in under any desired icon during DVD any menu. • If the forward arrow is showing playback. See the icon list below for more information. on display, the system is in y (Menu): Press to access the pause mode. DVD menu. The DVD menu is The rear seat operator can • If the pause icon is showing different on every DVD. Use the navigate the DVD-A menus and on display, the system is in pushbuttons located under the controls through the remote control. playback mode. navigation arrows to navigate the See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System • If the DVD screen is off, press cursor through the DVD menu. After making a selection press this on page 3-108 for more information. the play button to turn the The Video Screen does not screen on. button. This button only operates when using a DVD. automatically power on when the Some DVDs begin playing after DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. the previews have finished, although Nav (Navigate): Press to display It must be manually turned on by there could be a delay of up to directional arrows for navigating the rear seat occupant through the 30 seconds. If the DVD does through the menus. remote control power button. not begin playing the movie q (Return): Press to exit the automatically, press the pushbutton located under the play/pause icon current active menu and return to displayed on the radio. If the DVD the previous menu. This button still does not play, refer to the operates only when a DVD is on-screen instructions, if available. playing and a menu is active. 3-84 Instrument Panel r / j (Play/Pause): Press either Inserting a Disc Stopping and Resuming Playback the play or pause icon displayed To play a disc, gently insert the To stop playing a DVD without on the radio system, to toggle disc, with the label side up, into the turning off the system, do one of the between pausing or restarting loading slot. The DVD player might following: playback of a DVD. not accept some paper labeled • Press c on the remote control. • If the forward arrow is showing media. The player starts loading the on display, the system is in disc into the system and shows • Press the pushbutton located pause mode. “Loading Disc” on the radio display. under the stop or the play/pause At the same time, the radio displays icons displayed on the radio. • If the pause icon is showing a softkey menu of option(s). Some • If the radio head is sourced to on display, the system is in discs automatically play the movie playback mode. something other than DVD-V, while others default to the softkey press the DVD/CD AUX button to menu display, which requires the q Group r: Press to cycle make DVD-V the active source. Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys through musical groupings on the to be pressed; either by the softkey To resume DVD playback, do one DVD-A disc. on the radio or by the rear seat of the following: Nav (Navigate): Press to display passenger using the remote control. • Press r / j on the remote directional arrows for navigating It may take up to 30 seconds for a control. through the menus. DVD to begin playing. • Press the pushbutton located e (Audio Stream): Press to under the play/pause icon cycle through audio stream formats displayed on the radio. located on the DVD-A disc. The DVD should resume play The video screen shows the from where it last stopped if the audio stream changing. disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control. Instrument Panel 3-85

If the disc has been ejected or the DVD Radio Error Messages Using the Auxiliary Input Jack stop button has been pressed twice The radio system has an auxiliary on the remote control, the disc Player Error: This message input jack located on the lower right resumes playing at the beginning displays when there are disc load side of the faceplate. This is not of the disc. or eject problems. an audio output; do not plug a Disc Format Error: This message Ejecting a Disc headphone set into the front auxiliary displays, if the disc is inserted input jack. Connect an auxiliary input Press Z DVD on the radio to eject with the disc label wrong side up, device such as an iPod, laptop the disc. If a disc is ejected from the or if the disc is damaged. computer, MP3 player, CD player, radio, but not removed, the radio Disc Region Error: This message or cassette tape player, etc. to the reloads the disc after a short period displays, if the disc is not from a auxiliary input jack for use as another of time. The disc is stored in the correct region. source for audio listening. radio. The radio does not resume play of the disc automatically. If the No Disc Inserted: This message Drivers are encouraged to set up movie is reloaded and the RSA displays, if no disc is present any auxiliary device while the system is sourced to the DVD, the Z vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive when DVD or DVD/CD AUX is Driving on page 4-2 for more player begins to play again. If loading pressed on the radio. and reading a DVD or CD cannot be information on driver distraction. completed, and the disc fails to eject, To use an auxiliary input device, press and hold Z DVD for more connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to than ﬁve seconds to force the disc the radio’s front auxiliary input jack. to eject. 3-86 Instrument Panel

O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press If a disc is inserted into top DVD or counterclockwise to increase to select between DVD, CD, or slot, the rear seat operator can turn or decrease the volume of the Auxiliary. on the video screen and use the portable player. Additional volume • If an auxiliary input device is not remote control to only navigate adjustments might have to be made connected, “No Aux Input Device” the CD tracks through the remote from the portable device if the displays. control. volume is not loud or soft enough. • When a disc is in either slot, See “Using the Auxiliary Input BAND: Press to listen to the radio the DVD/CD text label and a Jack(s)” later in this section, or when a portable audio device is message showing the track or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, playing. The portable audio device chapter number displays. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) continues playing, so you might System on page 3-108 for more • If an auxiliary input device is not information. want to stop it or turn it off. connected, and a disc is in both CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to the DVD slot and the CD slot the select between CD, or Auxiliary. DVD/CD AUX button only cycles between the two sources and • When a CD is in the player does not indicate “No Aux Input the CD icon and a message Device”. showing the disc and/or track number displays. • If a front auxiliary input device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX • If an auxiliary input device is not button cycles through all available connected, “No Input Device options. Found” displays. Instrument Panel 3-87

Using an MP3 MP3/WMA Format • Make sure playlists have a .mp3 (Radio with CD) Creating an MP3/WMA disc on a or .wpl extension (other file personal computer: extensions might not work). MP3/WMA CD-R or • Make sure the MP3/WMA files • Minimize the length of the file, CD-RW Disc are recorded on a CD-R or folder, or playlist names. Long file, The radio plays MP3/WMA files that CD-RW disc. folder, or playlist names, or a were recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW combination of a large number of • Do not mix standard audio and disc. The files can be recorded with files and folders, or playlists could MP3/WMA files on one disc. the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, cause the player to be unable to 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, • The CD player is able to play up to the maximum number 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, read and play a maximum of of files, folders, playlists, or 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 50 folders, 15 playlists, and a sessions. To play a large number 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable combined total of 512 folders of files, folders, playlists or bit rate. Song title, artist name, and and files. sessions, minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist name. album are available for display by the • Create a folder structure that Long names also take up more radio when recorded using ID3 tags makes it easy to find songs space on the display, potentially version 1 and 2. while driving. Organize songs by getting cut off. Compressed Audio albums using one folder for each album. Each folder or album • Finalize the audio disc before The radio also plays discs that should contain 18 songs or less. burning it. Trying to add music to contain both uncompressed CD an existing disc could cause the • Avoid subfolders. The system audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA disc not to function in the player. files. The radio plays both file formats can support up to eight subfolders in the order in which they were deep, however, keep the total recorded to the disc. number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback. 3-88 Instrument Panel

Change playlists by using S c and If a disc contains both No Folder uncompressed CD audio (.CDA) c T folder buttons, the f knob, When the CD-R or CD-RW disc and MP3/WMA files, a folder contains only compressed files, the or the SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMA under the root directory called CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded files are located under the root CD accesses all of the CD audio folder. The next and previous folder using no file folders can be played. tracks on the disc. If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more function does not display on a than the maximum of 50 folders, Empty Directory or Folder CD-R or CD-RW disc that was 15 playlists, and a combined total recorded without folders or playlists. If a root directory or a folder exists of 512 folders and files, the player somewhere in the file structure that When the CD-R or CD-RW disc accesses and navigates up to the contains only folders/subfolders and contains only playlists and maximum, but all items over the no compressed files directly beneath compressed audio files, but no maximum are not accessible. them, the player advances to the folders, all files are located under Root Directory next folder in the file structure that the root folder. The folder down and contains compressed audio files. up buttons search playlists (Px) The root directory of the CD-R The empty folder does not display. first and then goes to the root folder. or CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files, the directory displays as the CD label. All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always accessed before root folders or files. Instrument Panel 3-89

Order of Play File System and Naming Playing an MP3/WMA Tracks recorded to the CD-R or The song name that displays is the Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc CD-RW disc are played in the song name that is contained in the partway into the slot label side up. following order: ID3 tag. If the song name is not The player pulls it in, and the • Play begins from the first track present in the ID3 tag, then the radio CD-R or CD-RW should begin in the first playlist and continues displays the file name without the playing. extension (such as .mp3) as the sequentially through all tracks in Z EJECT: Press to eject the disc. each playlist. When the last track track name. of the last playlist has played, play Track names longer than f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA continues from the first track of 32 characters or four pages are files on the CD-R or CD-RW the first playlist. shortened. Parts of words on the currently playing. • Play begins from the first track last page of text and the extension in the first folder and continues of the filename does not display. ©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current sequentially through all tracks in Preprogrammed Playlists each folder. When the last track of MP3/WMA file, if more than ten the last folder has played, play Preprogrammed playlists that seconds have played. Press the continues from the first track of were created using WinAmp™, right SEEK arrow to go to the next the first folder. MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow software can be accessed, however, is held or pressed multiple times, the When play enters a new folder, they cannot be edited using the player continues moving backward or the display does not automatically radio. These playlists are treated forward through MP3/WMA files on show the new folder name unless the as special folders containing the CD. folder mode is chosen as the default compressed audio song files. display. The new track name S c (Previous Folder): Press displays. the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder. 3-90 Instrument Panel c T (Next Folder): Press the RDM (Random): With the random CD-R or CD-RW disc. The radio can pushbutton positioned under setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R begin playing while it is scanning the the Folder label to go to the or CD-RW can be listened to in disc in the background. When the first track in the next folder. random, rather than sequential order. scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again. To play MP3/WMA files from the s REV (Reverse): Press and CD-R or CD-RW in random order, Once the disc has scanned, the hold this button to reverse playback press the pushbutton positioned player defaults to playing MP3/WMA quickly within an MP3/WMA file. under the RDM label until Random files in order by artist. The current Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Current Disc displays. Press the artist playing is shown on the second Release this button to resume same pushbutton again to turn off line of the display between the playing the file. The elapsed time random play. arrows. Once all songs by that artist of the file displays. are played, the player moves to the h (Music Navigator): Use \ FWD (Fast Forward): next artist in alphabetical order on the music navigator feature to play the CD-R or CD-RW and begins Press and hold this button to MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or playing MP3/WMA files by that artist. advance playback quickly within CD-RW in order by artist or album. To listen to MP3/WMA files by an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard Press the pushbutton located below another artist, press the pushbutton at a reduced volume. Release this the music navigator label. The player located below either arrow button. button to resume playing the file. scans the disc to sort the files by The player goes to the next or The elapsed time of the file displays. artist and album ID3 tag information. previous artist in alphabetical order. It could take several minutes to scan Continue pressing either button until the disc depending on the number the desired artist is displayed. of MP3/WMA files recorded to the Instrument Panel 3-91

To change from playback by artist Using an MP3 (Radio MP3/WMA Format to playback by album, press the with CD and DVD Player) To create an MP3/WMA disc on a pushbutton located below the Sort personal computer: By label. From the sort screen, push MP3/WMA CD-R or • Make sure the MP3/WMA files one of the buttons below the album CD-RW Disc button. Press the pushbutton below are recorded on a CD-R or Compressed Audio or Mixed the back label to return to the main CD-RW disc. Mode Discs music navigator screen. Now the • Do not mix standard audio and album name is displayed on the The radio also plays discs that MP3/WMA files on one disc. second line between the arrows and contain both uncompressed CD songs from the current album begins audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA • The CD player (lower slot) is to play. Once all songs from that files depending on which slot the disc able to read and play a maximum album are played, the player moves is loaded into. By default the radio combination of 512 files and to the next album in alphabetical reads only the uncompressed audio folders. The DVD player (upper order on the CD-R or CD-RW and (.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMA slot) is able to read 255 folders, begins playing MP3/WMA files from files on the DVD deck. On the CD 15 playlists and 40 sessions. that album. deck, pressing the CAT (category) • Create a folder structure that button toggles between compressed makes it easy to find songs while To exit music navigator mode, press and uncompressed audio format, driving. Organize songs by the pushbutton below the Back label the default being the uncompressed albums using one folder for each to return to normal MP3/WMA format (.CDA). album. Each folder or album playback. should contain 18 songs or less. 3-92 Instrument Panel

• Avoid subfolders. The system can • Finalize the audio disc before No Folder support up to eight subfolders burning it. Trying to add music to When the CD-R or CD-RW disc deep, however, keep the total an existing disc could cause the contains only compressed files, the number of folders to a minimum disc not to function in the player. files are located under the root folder. in order to reduce the complexity Root Directory The next and previous folder function and confusion in trying to locate a does not function on a CD-R or particular folder during playback. The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded without • Make sure playlists have CD-RW disc is treated as a folder. folders or playlists. When displaying a .m3u, .wpl or .pls extension If the root directory has compressed the name of the folder the radio as other file extensions might audio files, the directory is displayed displays ROOT. not work. as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under the root directory are When the CD-R or CD-RW • Minimize the length of the file, accessed prior to any root directory disc contains only playlists and folder or playlist names. Long file, folders. However, playlists (Px) are compressed audio files, but no folder, or playlist names, or a always accessed before root folders folders, all files are located under combination of a large number of or files. the root folder. The folder down files and folders, or playlists could and the folder up buttons search cause the player to be unable to Empty Directory or Folder playlists (Px) first and then goes play up to the maximum number If a root directory or a folder exists to the root folder. When the radio of files, folders, playlists, or somewhere in the file structure that displays the name of the folder the sessions. To play a large number contains only folders/subfolders and radio displays ROOT. of files, folders, playlists, or no compressed files directly beneath sessions, minimize the length of them, the player advances to the the file, folder, or playlist name. next folder in the file structure that Long names also take up more contains compressed audio files. space on the display, potentially The empty folder does not display. getting cut off. Instrument Panel 3-93

Order of Play File System and Naming Playing an MP3/WMA Tracks recorded to the CD-R or The song name that is displayed is (In Either the DVD or CD Slot) CD-RW disc are played in the the song name that is contained in Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc following order: the ID3 tag. If the song name is not partway into either the top or bottom • Play begins from the first track present in the ID3 tag, then the radio slot, label side up. The player pulls it in the first playlist and continues displays the file name without the in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should sequentially through all tracks in extension (such as .mp3) as the begin playing. track name. each playlist. When the last track Depending on the format of of the last playlist has played, play Track names longer than the disc, a softkey menu appears continues from the first track of 32 characters or four pages are and allows navigation of the disc. the first playlist. shortened. Parts of words on the The menu reads left to right as • Play begins from the first track last page of text and the extension RDM (Randomize song play order), in the first folder and continues of the filename displays. a Folder icon with left and right arrows (to move up or down through sequentially through all tracks in Preprogrammed Playlists each folder. When the last track of available folders), a PL tag if the disc the last folder has played, play Preprogrammed playlists that has a Playlist available, and a Music continues from the first track of were created using WinAmp™, Navigator tag. If a Playlist tag is the first folder. MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ shown, toggling this key brings up a software can be accessed, however, Folder softkey only or the menu as When play enters a new folder, they cannot be edited using the previously described. the display does not automatically radio. These playlists are treated show the new folder name If the ignition or radio is turned off as special folders containing with a CD-R or CD-RW disc in the unless the folder mode has been compressed audio song files. chosen as the default display. player it stays in the player. When The new track name displays. the ignition or radio is turned back on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. 3-94 Instrument Panel

As each new track starts to play, Z DVD (Eject): Press and release ©SEEK ¨: Press the left the track number and song title this button to eject the CD-R or SEEK arrow to go to the start of the displays. CD-RW that is currently playing in current MP3/WMA file, if more than the top slot. A beep sounds and five seconds have played. If less Z CD (Eject): Press and release Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc than five seconds have played, the this button to eject the CD-R or is ejected, Remove Disc displays. previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press CD-RW that is currently playing in The CD-R or CD-RW disc can be the right SEEK arrow to go to the the bottom slot. A beep sounds and removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc disc is not removed, after arrow is held, or pressed multiple is ejected, Remove Disc displays. several seconds, the CD-R or times, the player continues moving The CD-R or CD-RW disc can be CD-RW disc automatically pulls backward or forward through the removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW back into the player. If loading MP3/WMA files on the CD. disc is not removed, after and reading of a CD cannot be several seconds, the CD-R or completed, such as unknown format, S c (Previous Folder): Press CD-RW disc automatically pulls etc., and the disc fails to eject, the pushbutton positioned under back into the player. press and hold this button for more the Folder label to go to the If loading and reading of a CD cannot than five seconds to force the disc first track in the previous folder. be completed, such as unknown to eject. c T (Next Folder): Press format, etc., and the disc fails to f eject, press and hold this button for (Tune): Turn this knob to select the pushbutton positioned under more than five seconds to force the MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or the Folder label to go to the disc to eject. CD-RW that is currently playing. first track in the next folder. Instrument Panel 3-95 s REV (Reverse): Press and h (Music Navigator): Use line of the display between the hold this button to reverse playback the music navigator feature to play arrows. To listen to MP3/WMA quickly within an MP3/WMA file. MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or files by another artist, press the Sound is heard at a reduced volume. CD-RW in order by artist or album. pushbutton located below either Release this button to resume Press the pushbutton located below arrow button. The disc goes to the playing the file. The elapsed time the music navigator label. The player next or previous artist in alphabetical of the file displays. scans the disc to sort the files by order. Continue pressing either artist and album ID3 tag information. button until the desired artist is \ FWD (Fast Forward): It could take several minutes to scan displayed. Press and hold this button to the disc depending on the number To change from playback by artist to advance playback quickly within of MP3/WMA files recorded to the playback by album, press the an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard CD-R or CD-RW disc. pushbutton located below the Sort at a reduced volume. Release this To cancel music navigator while By label. From the sort screen, push button to resume playing the file. one of the buttons below the album The elapsed time of the file displays. the player is scanning, press the pushbutton located below the music button. Press the pushbutton below RDM (Random): With the random navigator label or eject the disc. the back label to return to the main setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R music navigator screen. Now the or CD-RW can be listened to in The radio can begin playing while it is album name displays on the second random, rather than sequential order. scanning the disc in the background. line between the arrows and songs To play MP3/WMA files from the When the scan is finished, the CD-R from the current album begin to play. CD-R or CD-RW in random order, or CD-RW begins playing again. Once all songs from that album are played, the player moves to the next press the pushbutton positioned Once the disc has been scanned, the album in alphabetical order on the under the RDM label until Random player defaults to playing MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing Current Disc displays. Press the files in order by artist. The current MP3/WMA files from that album. same pushbutton again to turn off artist playing is shown on the second random play. 3-96 Instrument Panel

To exit music navigator mode, press Device” displays. If a disc is in both XM Radio Messages the pushbutton below the Back label the DVD slot and the CD slot the to return to normal MP3/WMA DVD/CD AUX button cycles between XL (Explicit Language Channels): playback. the two sources and does not These channels, or any others, can indicate “No Aux Input Device”. be blocked at a customer’s request, BAND: Press this button to listen to If a front auxiliary device is by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). the radio when a CD or a DVD is connected, the DVD/CD AUX playing. The CD or DVD remains XM Updating: The encryption button cycles through all available code in the receiver is being inside the radio for future listening options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, or viewing entertainment. updated, and no action is required. Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary This process should take no longer DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press (if available). See “Using the than 30 seconds. this button to cycle through DVD, Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” No XM Signal: The system is radio. The DVD/CD text label and a under, Rear Seat Entertainment functioning correctly, but the vehicle message showing track or chapter (RSE) System on page 3-108 for is in a location that is blocking number displays when a disc is in more information. the XM™ signal. When the vehicle either slot. Press this button again is moved into an open area, the If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top signal should return. and the system automatically DVD slot, the rear seat operator can searches for an auxiliary input turn on the video screen and use the Loading XM: The audio system device, such as a portable audio remote control to navigate the CD is acquiring and processing player. If a portable audio player (tracks only). audio and text data. No action is is not connected, “No Aux Input needed. This message should disappear shortly. Instrument Panel 3-97

Channel Off Air: This channel is No CAT Info: No category XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, not currently in service. Tune in to information is available at this time this message alternates with the another channel. on this channel. The system is XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. working properly. This label is needed to activate the Channel Unauth: This channel is service. blocked or cannot be received with No Information: No text or your XM Subscription package. informational messages are Unknown: If this message is available at this time on this received when tuned to channel 0, Channel Unavail: This previously channel. The system is working there could be a receiver fault. assigned channel is no longer properly. Consult with your dealer/retailer. assigned. Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets, CAT Not Found: There are no Check XM Receivr: If this choose another station for that channels available for the selected message does not clear within a preset button. category. The system is working short period of time, the receiver properly. could have a fault. Consult with No Artist Info: No artist information your dealer/retailer. is available at this time on this XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver channel. The system is working in the vehicle could have previously XM Not Available: If this message properly. been in another vehicle. For security does not clear within a short period of purposes, XM receivers cannot be time, the receiver could have a fault. No Title Info: No song title swapped between vehicles. If this Consult with your dealer/retailer. information is available at this time message is received after having the on this channel. The system is vehicle serviced, check with your working properly. dealer/retailer. 3-98 Instrument Panel

Navigation/Radio System Voice Recognition system. Use the audio system volume knob, during a call, to change The Bluetooth system uses For vehicles with a navigation the volume level. The adjusted voice recognition to interpret voice radio system, see the separate volume level remains in memory for commands to dial phone numbers Navigation System manual. later calls. To prevent missed calls, and name tags. ® a minimum volume level is used if Bluetooth Noise: Keep interior noise levels to the volume is turned down too low. a minimum. The system may not Vehicles with a Bluetooth system Bluetooth Controls can use a Bluetooth capable cell recognize voice commands if there phone with a Hands Free Proﬁle to is too much background noise. Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to operate the make and receive phone calls. The When to Speak: A short tone in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See system can be used while the key is sounds after the system responds Audio Steering Wheel Controls on in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY indicating when it is waiting for page 3-119 for more information. position. The range of the Bluetooth a voice command. Wait until system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m). the tone and then speak. g Not all phones support all functions, b (Push To Talk): Press to and not all phones are guaranteed to How to Speak: Speak clearly in a answer incoming calls, to conﬁrm work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth calm and natural voice. system information, and to start system. See gm.com/bluetooth for speech recognition. more information on compatible Audio System c x (Phone On Hook): Press to phones. When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth end a call, reject a call, or to cancel system, sound comes through an operation. the vehicle’s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio Instrument Panel 3-99

Pairing • Only one paired cell phone can 4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will be paired to A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be connected to the in-vehicle the vehicle. Reference the cell be paired to the in-vehicle Bluetooth Bluetooth system at a time. phone manufacturers user guide system first and then connected to • Pairing should only need to be for information on this process. the vehicle before it can be used. completed once, unless changes See the cell phone manufacturers to the pairing information have Locate the device named user guide for Bluetooth functions been made or the phone is “General Motors” in the list on before pairing the cell phone. If a deleted. the cellular phone and follow the Bluetooth phone is not connected, instructions on the cell phone To link to a different paired phone, calls will be made using OnStar® to enter the four digit PIN number see Linking to a Different Phone Hands-Free Calling, if available. that was provided in Step 3. later in this section. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide 5. The system prompts for a for more information. Pairing a Phone name for the phone. Use a name that best describes the phone. Pairing Information: 1. Press and hold b g for This name will be used to indicate • Up to five cell phones can two seconds. The system which phone is connected. be paired to the in-vehicle responds with “Ready” followed The system then confirms the Bluetooth system. by a tone. name provided. • The pairing process is disabled 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system 6. The system responds with when the vehicle is moving. responds with “Bluetooth “ has been ready” followed by a tone. • The in-vehicle Bluetooth system successfully paired” after the automatically links with the first 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds pairing process is complete. available paired cell phone in the with instructions and a four digit 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for order the phone was paired. PIN number. The PIN number additional phones to be paired. will be used in Step 4. 3-100 Instrument Panel

Listing All Paired and Connected 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks 3. Say “Change phone”. The Phones which phone to delete followed system responds with “Please by a tone. wait while I search for other 1. Press and hold b g for phones”. two seconds. The system 4. Say the name of the phone responds with “Ready” followed to be deleted. If the phone name • If another phone is found, by a tone. is unknown, use the “List” the response will be “ is now connected”. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system phones. The system responds • If another phone is not found, responds with “Bluetooth with “Would you like to delete ready” followed by a tone. the original phone remains ? Yes or No” connected. 3. Say “List”. The system lists all followed by a tone. the paired Bluetooth devices. 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. Storing Name Tags If a phone is connected to The system responds with The system can store up to thirty the vehicle, the system will “OK, deleting ”. say “Is connected” after the phone numbers as name tags that are shared between the connected phone. Linking to a Different Phone Bluetooth and OnStar systems. 1. Press and hold b g for Deleting a Paired Phone The system uses the following two seconds. The system 1. Press and hold b g for commands to store and retrieve responds with “Ready” phone numbers: two seconds. The system followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed • Store by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with “Bluetooth • Digit Store 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system ready” followed by a tone. responds with “Bluetooth • Directory ready” followed by a tone. Instrument Panel 3-101

Using the Store Command If the number is correct, say Using the Digit Store Command The store command allows a “Yes”. If the number is not The digit store command allows phone number to be stored without correct, say “No”. The system a phone number to be stored entering the digits individually. will ask for the number to be by entering the digits individually. re-entered. g g 1. Press and hold b for 4. After the system stores the 1. Press and hold b for two seconds. The system phone number, it responds two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” with “Please say the name tag” responds with “Ready” followed followed by a tone. followed by a tone. by a tone. 2. Say “Store”. The system 5. Say a name tag for the phone 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with “Store, number number. The name tag is responds with “Please say the please” followed by a tone. recorded and the system ﬁrst digit to store” followed 3. Say the complete phone number responds with “About to by a tone. to be stored at once with no store . Does 3. Say the ﬁrst digit to be stored. pauses. that sound OK?”. The system will repeat back • If the system recognizes the • If the name tag does not sound the digit it heard followed by a number it responds with “OK, correct, say “No” and repeat tone. Continue entering digits Storing” and repeats the Step 5. until the number to be stored is complete. phone number. • If the name tag sounds • If the system is unsure it correct, say “Yes” and the • If an unwanted number is recognizes the phone number, name tag is stored. After the recognized by the system, it responds with “Store” and number is stored the system say “Clear” at any time repeats the number followed returns to the main menu. to clear the last number. by “Please say yes or no”. • To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, say “Verify” at any time and the system will repeat them. 3-102 Instrument Panel

4. After the complete number Using the Directory Command Using the Delete Command has been entered, say “Store”. The directory command lists The delete command allows speciﬁc The system responds with all of the name tags stored by name tags to be deleted. “Please say the name tag” the system. To use the directory To use the delete command: followed by a tone. command: 5. Say a name tag for the phone 1. Press and hold b g for 1. Press and hold b g for number. The name tag is two seconds. The system two seconds. The system recorded and the system responds with “Ready” responds with “Ready” responds with “About to followed by a tone. store . Does followed by a tone. 2. Say “Delete”. The system that sound OK?”. 2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with “Delete, please responds with “Directory” • If the name tag does not sound say the name tag” followed and then plays back all of the correct, say “No” and repeat by a tone. Step 5. stored name tags. When the list is complete, the system 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. • If the name tag sounds returns to the main menu. The system responds with “Would correct, say “Yes” and the you like to delete, ? name tag is stored. After the Deleting Name Tags Please say yes or no”. number is stored the system The system uses the following returns to the main menu. • If the name tag is correct, say commands to delete name tags: “Yes” to delete the name tag. • Delete The system responds with “OK, deleting , • Delete all name tags returning to the main menu.” • If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say the name tag.” Instrument Panel 3-103

Using the Delete All Name Tags Making a Call • If the system does not Command Calls can be made using the recognize the number, it The delete all name tags command following commands: conﬁrms the numbers followed deletes all stored phone book name by a tone. If the number is • Dial tags and route name tags for OnStar correct, say “Yes”. The system (if present). • Digit Dial responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number. If the To use the delete all name tags • Call number is not correct, say command: • Re-dial “No”. The system will ask for the number to be re-entered. 1. Press and hold b g for Using the Dial Command two seconds. The system Using the Digit Dial Command responds with “Ready” 1. Press and hold b g for followed by a tone. two seconds. The system 1. Press and hold b g for responds with “Ready” two seconds. The system 2. Say “Delete all name tags”. followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” The system responds with “You followed by a tone. are about to delete all name tags 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds stored in your phone directory with “Dial using . 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system and your route destination “Number please” followed by responds with “Digit dial using directory. Are you sure you want a tone. , please say the to do this? Please say yes or no.” 3. Say the entire number without ﬁrst digit to dial” followed by a tone. • Say “Yes” to delete all pausing. name tags. • If the system recognizes the 3. Say the digit to be dialed one at number, it responds with a time. Following each digit, the • Say “No” to cancel the function system will repeat back the digit it and return to the main menu. “OK, Dialing” and dials the number. heard followed by a tone. 3-104 Instrument Panel

4. Continue entering digits until the 3. Say the name tag of the person Using the Re-dial Command number to be dialed is complete. to call. 1. Press and hold b g for After the whole number has • If the system clearly two seconds. The system been entered, say “Dial”. recognizes the name tag it The system responds with “OK, responds with “Ready” responds with “OK, calling, followed by a tone. Dialing” and dials the number. ” and dials • If an unwanted number the number. 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. is recognized by the system, The system responds with • If the system is unsure it “Re-dial using ” say “Clear” at any time to recognizes the right name tag, clear the last number. and dials the last number called it conﬁrms the name tag from the connected Bluetooth • To hear all of the numbers followed by a tone. If the phone. recognized by the system, say name tag is correct, say “Yes”. “Verify” at any time and the The system responds with Once connected, the person called system will repeat them. “OK, calling, ” and will be heard through the audio dials the number. If the name speakers. Using the Call Command tag is not correct, say “No”. Receiving a Call 1. Press and hold b g for The system will ask for the two seconds. The system name tag to be re-entered. When an incoming call is received, responds with “Ready” followed the audio system mutes and a Once connected, the person called ring tone is heard in the vehicle. by a tone. will be heard through the audio 2. Say “Call”. The system responds speakers. • Press b g and begin speaking with “Call using . to answer the call. Please say the name tag” • Press c x to ignore a call. followed by a tone. Instrument Panel 3-105

Call Waiting Three-Way Calling Muting a Call Call waiting must be supported on Three-Way Calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside the Bluetooth phone and enabled supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that by the wireless service carrier and enabled by the wireless service the person on the other end of to work. carrier to work. the call cannot hear them. • Press b g to answer an 1. While on a call press b g. To Mute a call incoming call when another The system responds with 1. Press b g. The system call is active. The original call “Ready” followed by a tone. is placed on hold. responds with “Ready” followed 2. Say “Three-way call”. The system by a tone. • Press b g again to return to the responds with “Three-way call, 2. Say “Mute Call”. The system original call. please say dial or call”. responds with “Call muted”. • To ignore the incoming call, 3. Use the dial or call command to continue with the original call dial the number of the third party To Cancel Mute with no action. to be called. 1. Press b g. The system • Press c x to disconnect the 4. Once the call is connected, responds with “Ready” followed current call and switch to the press b g to link all the callers by a tone. call on hold. together. 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system responds with Ending a Call “Resuming call”. Press c x to end a call. 3-106 Instrument Panel

Transferring a Call During a call with the audio on the 3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK, accessing Audio can be transferred between cell phone, press b g for more than ”. the in-vehicle Bluetooth system two seconds. The audio switches and the cell phone. from the cell phone to the vehicle. • The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will go To Transfer Audio to the Voice Pass-Thru through its cycle according Cell Phone Voice Pass-Thru allows access to to the phone’s operating During a call with the audio in the the voice recognition commands on instructions. vehicle: the cell phone. See the cell phone Dual Tone Multi-Frequency g manufacturers user guide to see if 1. Press b . The system the cell phone supports this feature. (DTMF) Tones responds with “Ready” followed This feature can be used to verbally The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can by a tone. access contacts stored in the cell send numbers and numbers stored 2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system phone. as name tags during a call. This is responds with “Transferring call” used when calling a menu driven 1. Press and hold b g for and the audio will switch from phone system. Account numbers can the vehicle to the cell phone. two seconds. The system be programmed into the phonebook responds with “Ready” for retrieval during menu driven calls. To Transfer Audio to the followed by a tone. In-Vehicle Bluetooth System 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system The cellular phone must be paired responds with “Bluetooth and connected with the Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. system before a call can be transferred. The connection process can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. Instrument Panel 3-107

Sending a Number During a Call Sending a Stored Name Tag Clearing the System During a Call 1. Press b g. The system Unless information is deleted out responds with “Ready” followed 1. Press b g. The system of the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, by a tone. responds with “Ready” it will be retained indeﬁnitely. This includes all saved name tags in 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds followed by a tone. the phonebook and phone pairing with “Say a number to send 2. Say “Send name tag.” information. For information on how tones” followed by a tone. The system responds with to delete this information, see the “Say a name tag to send tones” 3. Say the number to send. above sections on Deleting a Paired followed by a tone. • If the system clearly Phone and Deleting Name Tags. 3. Say the name tag to send. recognizes the number Other Information it responds with “OK, • If the system clearly Sending Number” and the recognizes the name tag it The Bluetooth® word mark and dial tones are sent and the responds with “OK, Sending logos are owned by the Bluetooth® call continues. ” and the dial SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license. • If the system is not sure it tones are sent and the call Other trademarks and trade names recognized the number continues. are those of their respective owners. properly, it responds “Dial • If the system is not sure it Number, Please say yes or recognized the name tag no?” followed by a tone. If the properly, it responds “Dial number is correct, say “Yes”. , Please say yes The system responds with or no?” followed by a tone. If “OK, Sending Number” and the name tag is correct, say the dial tones are sent and the “Yes”. The system responds call continues. with “OK, Sending ” and the dial tones are sent and the call continues. 3-108 Instrument Panel

This device complies with Part 15 of Rear Seat Entertainment The operating range for the RSE the FCC Rules. Operation is subject system is above −4°F (−20°C) to the following two conditions: (RSE) System or below 140°F (60°C). If the 1. This device may not cause The vehicle may have a DVD Rear temperature of the vehicle is outside harmful interference. Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. of this range, heat or cool the vehicle The RSE system works with the until the temperature is within the 2. This device must accept any vehicle’s audio system. The DVD operating range of the RSE system. interference received, including player is part of the front radio. The interference that may cause RSE system includes a radio with a Parental Control undesired operation. DVD player, a video display screen, The RSE system may have a This device complies with RSS-210 audio/video jacks, two wireless Parental Control feature, depending of Industry Canada. Operation headphones, and a remote control. on the radio. To enable Parental is subject to the following two See Radio(s) on page 3-70 for more Control, press and hold the conditions: information on the vehicle’s audio/ radio power button for more than DVD system. two seconds to stop all system 1. This device may not cause features such as: radio, video interference. Before Driving screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. 2. This device must accept any The RSE is designed for rear seat While Parental Control is interference received, including passengers only. The driver cannot on, Q displays. interference that may cause safely view the video screen while undesired operation of the driving and should not try to do so. When the radio is turned back on, device. Parental Control is unlocked. In severe or extreme weather Changes or modiﬁcations to this conditions the RSE system might or system by other than an authorized might not work until the temperature service facility could void is within the operating range. authorization to use this equipment. Instrument Panel 3-109

Headphones Push the power button to turn on For optimal audio performance, the headphones. An indicator the headphones must be worn light located on the headphones correctly. Headphones should be comes on. If the light does not come worn with the headband over the top on, the batteries might need to be of the head for best audio reception. replaced. Intermittent sound or static The symbol L (Left) appears on on the headphones can also be the upper left side, above the an indication of weak batteries. ear pad and should be positioned See “Battery Replacement” later on the left ear. The symbol R (Right) in this section for more information. appears on the upper right side, above the ear pad and should The headphones automatically be positioned on the right ear. turn off after four hours of continuous use. Notice: Do not store the The RSE includes two 2-channel To adjust the volume on the headphones in heat or direct wireless headphones that are headphones, use the volume sunlight. This could damage dedicated to this system. Channel 1 control located on the right side. the headphones and repairs will is dedicated to the video screen, not be covered by the warranty. while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA Infrared transmitters are located Storage in extreme cold can selections. These headphones are at the rear of the RSE overhead weaken the batteries. Keep the used to listen to media such as CDs, console. The headphones shut off headphones stored in a cool, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, radio, automatically to save the battery dry place. any auxiliary source connected to power if the RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are If the foam ear pads attached to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, the headphones become worn or if the vehicle has this feature. out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes. Moving too damaged, the pads can be replaced The wireless headphones have an separately from the headphone set. On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, far forward or stepping out of the vehicle, can cause the headphones See your dealer/retailer for more and a volume control. Switch the information. headphones to Off when not in use. to lose the audio signal. 3-110 Instrument Panel

Headphones should be stored in Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks The A/V jacks are color coded to the front ﬂoor console and not in the match typical home entertainment front seat back pocket. Headphone system equipment. The yellow damage can occur when the second jack (A) is for the video input. row seats are folded forward. The white jack (B) is for the left audio input. The red jack (C) is Battery Replacement for the right audio input. To change the batteries on the Power for auxiliary devices is not headphones: supplied by the radio system. 1. Turn the screw to loosen the To use the auxiliary inputs of the battery door located on the RSE system, connect an external left side of the headphones. auxiliary device to the color-coded Slide the battery door open. A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary 2. Replace the two batteries in the device and the video screen power The A/V jacks, located on the rear compartment. Make sure that on. If the video screen is in the DVD of the ﬂoor console, allow audio they are installed correctly, using player mode, pressing the AUX or video signals to be connected the diagram on the inside of (auxiliary) button on the remote from an auxiliary device such as a the battery compartment. control, switches the video screen camcorder or a video game unit to from the DVD player mode to the 3. Replace the battery door and the RSE system. Adapter connectors auxiliary device. The radio can tighten the door screw. or cables (not supplied) might be listen to the audio of the connected required to connect the auxiliary If the headphones are to be stored auxiliary device by sourcing to device to the A/V jacks. Refer to for a long period of time, remove auxiliary. See Radio(s) on page 3-70 the manufacturer’s instructions for the batteries and keep them for more information. in a cool, dry place. proper usage. Instrument Panel 3-111

How to Change the RSE Video The RSE system always transmits Video Screen Screen Settings the audio signal to the wireless The video screen is located in The screen display mode (normal, headphones, if there is audio the overhead console. When the full, and zoom), screen brightness, available. See “Headphones” earlier video screen is not in use, push it and setup menu language can in this section for more information. up into its locked position. be changed from the on screen The DVD player is capable of To use the video screen: setup menu by using the remote outputting audio to the wired 1. Push the release button located control. To change a setting: headphone jacks on the RSA on the overhead console. system, if the vehicle has this 1. Press z. feature. The DVD player can be 2. Move the screen to the desired 2. Use n, q, p, o and r to selected as an audio source on position. navigate and use the the RSA system. See Rear Seat If a DVD is playing and the screen setup menu. Audio (RSA) on page 3-117 for is raised to its locked position, the more information. screen remains on; this is normal, 3. Press z again to remove the When a device is connected to the and the DVD continues to play setup menu from the screen. through the previous audio source. A/V jacks, or the radio’s auxiliary P Audio Output input jack, if the vehicle has this Press on the remote control or feature, the rear seat passengers are eject the disc to turn off the screen. Audio from the DVD player or able to hear audio from the auxiliary The infrared receivers for the auxiliary inputs can be heard device through the wireless or wired through the following sources: wireless headphones and the headphones. The front seat remote control are located at the • Wireless Headphones passengers are able to listen to rear of the overhead console. playback from this device through • Vehicle Speakers the vehicle speakers by selecting Notice: Avoid directly touching • Vehicle wired headphone jacks AUX as the source on the radio. the video screen, as damage on the rear seat audio system, may occur. See “Cleaning if the vehicle has this feature. the Video Screen” later in this section for more information. 3-112 Instrument Panel

Remote Control If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD Remote Control Buttons O To use the remote control, aim it slot, the remote control button can at the transmitter window at the rear be used to turn on the video screen of the overhead console and press display and start the disc. The radio the desired button. Direct sunlight can also turn on the video screen or very bright light could affect the display. See Radio(s) on page 3-70 ability of the RSE transmitter to for more information. receive signals from the remote Notice: Storing the remote control. If the remote control does control in a hot area or in direct not seem to be working, the batteries sunlight can damage it, and might need to be replaced. See the repairs will not be covered by “Battery Replacement” later in this the warranty. Storage in extreme section. Objects blocking the line of cold can weaken the batteries. sight could also affect the function of Keep the remote control stored the remote control. in a cool, dry place. Instrument Panel 3-113

O (Power): Press to turn the video n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation s (Play/Pause): Press to start screen on and off. Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to playing a DVD. Press while a DVD is navigate through a menu. playing to pause it. Press again to P (Illumination): Press to turn continue playing the DVD. the remote control backlight on. r (Enter): Press to select The backlight automatically times out the choice that is highlighted in When the DVD is playing, depending after seven to ten seconds if no other any menu. on the radio, play may be slowed button is pressed while the backlight down by pressing s then [. is on. z (Display Menu): Press to adjust The DVD continues playing in a the brightness, screen display mode slow play mode. Depending on the v (Title): Press to return the DVD (normal, full, or zoom), and display radio, perform reverse slow play by to the main menu of the DVD. This the language menu. pressing s then r. To cancel function could vary for each disc. q (Return): Press to exit the slow play mode, press s again. y (Main Menu): Press to access current active menu and return to t the DVD menu. The DVD menu is the previous menu. This button (Previous Track/Chapter): Press different on every DVD. Use the operates only when the display to return to the start of the current navigation arrows to move the cursor menu or a DVD menu is active. track or chapter. Press again to around the DVD menu. After making go to the previous track or chapter. a selection press the enter button. c (Stop): Press to stop playing, This button might not work when This button only operates when rewinding, or fast forwarding a the DVD is playing the copyright using a DVD. DVD. Press twice to return to the information or the previews. beginning of the DVD. u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. 3-114 Instrument Panel r (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch If this happens, make sure the reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast the system between the DVD player universal remote control uses a ® reversing a DVD video, press s. and an auxiliary source. Toshiba code set. To stop fast reversing a DVD audio d Battery Replacement r (Camera): Press to change or CD, release . This button might camera angles on DVDs that have To change the remote control not work when the DVD is playing this feature when a DVD is playing. batteries: the copyright information or the The format and content of this previews. function vary for each disc. 1. Slide the rear cover back, on the remote control. [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): 2. Replace the two batteries in the forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast The numeric keypad provides s compartment. Make sure that forwarding a DVD video, press . the capability of direct chapter they are installed correctly, using To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or track number selection. the diagram on the inside of [ or CD, release . This button might \ (Clear): Press within three the battery compartment. not work when the DVD is playing seconds after entering a numeric 3. Replace the battery cover. the copyright information or the selection, to clear all numerical previews. If the remote control is to be stored inputs. for a long period of time, remove e (Audio): Press to change audio } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press the batteries and keep them in tracks on DVDs that have this a cool, dry place. feature when the DVD is playing. to select chapter or track numbers The format and content of this greater than nine. Press this function vary for each disc. button before entering the number. { (Subtitles): Press to turn If the remote control becomes ON/OFF subtitles and to move lost or damaged, a new universal through subtitle options when a DVD remote control can be purchased. is playing. The format and content of this function vary for each disc. Instrument Panel 3-115

Problem Recommended Action No power. The ignition might not be turned ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY. The picture does not ﬁll the screen. Check the display mode settings in There are black borders on the top the setup menu by pressing the and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote looks stretched out. control. In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input or scrolls. connections at both devices. The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window. Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly. After stopping the player, I push If the stop button was pressed Play but sometimes the DVD starts one time, the DVD player resumes where I left off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD was beginning. stopped. If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD. The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen there is no picture or sound. is in the auxiliary source mode. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices. 3-116 Instrument Panel

Problem Recommended Action DVD Distortion Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, low Video distortion can occur when audio cuts out or buzzes. batteries, reception range, operating cellular phones, scanners, and interference from cellular CB radios, Global Position Systems telephone towers or by using a (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, cellular telephone in the vehicle. or walkie talkies. Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L (left) and It might be necessary to turn off the R (right) on the headphones. DVD player when operating one of I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer/retailer for these devices in or near the vehicle. headphones. assistance. *Excludes the OnStar® System. The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player. Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console DVD Display Error Messages Disc Region Error: This message When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use only a clean The DVD display error message displays if the disc is not from a cloth dampened with clean water. depends on which radio the vehicle correct region. has. The video screen might display No Disc Inserted: This message Cleaning the Video Screen one of the following: displays if no disc is present Z Use only a clean cloth dampened Disc Load/Eject Error: This when the EJECT button is with clean water. Use care when message displays when there are pressed on the radio. directly touching or cleaning disc load or eject problems. the screen, as damage could result. Disc Format Error: This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged. Instrument Panel 3-117

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) The RSA functions operate even The audio system mutes the rear when the main radio is off. The front speakers when the RSA audio For vehicles with Rear Seat audio system displays X when the is active through the headphones. Audio (RSA), rear seat passengers can listen to and control any of the RSA is on, and disappears from the To listen to an iPod or portable music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, display when it is off. audio device through the RSA, or other auxiliary sources. The rear Audio can be heard through wired attach the iPod or portable audio seat passengers can only control headphones (not included) plugged device to the front auxiliary input the music sources the front seat into the jacks on the RSA. If the (if available), located on the passengers are not listening to vehicle has this feature, audio can front audio system. Turn the iPod (except on some radios where dual also be heard on Channel 2 of the on, then choose the front auxiliary control is allowed). For example, wireless headphones. input with the RSA SRCE button. rear seat passengers can control a CD and listen to it through the headphones, while the driver listens to the radio through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the volume for each set of headphones. 3-118 Instrument Panel

While listening to a disc, press ¨ to go to the next track or chapter on the disc. Press © to go back to the start of the current track or chapter (if more than ten seconds have played). This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press © or ¨ to perform a cursor up or down on the menu. Hold © or ¨ to perform a cursor P (Power): Press to turn the RSA ©¨(Seek): Press to go to the left or right on the menu. on or off. previous or to the next station and stay there. This function is inactive, PROG (Program): Press to go Volume: Turn to increase or to with some radios, if the front seat to the next preset radio station or decrease the volume of the wired passengers are listening to the radio. channel set on the main radio. headphones. The left knob controls This function is inactive, with some the left headphones and the right Press and hold © or ¨ until radios, if the front seat passengers knob controls the right headphones. the display ﬂashes to tune to an are listening to the radio. SRCE (Source): Press to select individual station. The display stops ﬂashing after the buttons When a CD or DVD audio disc is between the radio (AM/FM/XM™), playing, press PROG to go to the CD, and if the vehicle has these have not been pushed for more than two seconds. This function is beginning of the CD or DVD audio. features, DVD, front auxiliary, and This function is inactive, with some rear auxiliary. inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening radios, if the front seat passengers to the radio. are listening to the disc. Instrument Panel 3-119

When a disc is playing in the CD or Audio Steering Wheel c x (Previous/End): Press to DVD changer, press PROG to select Controls go to the previous radio station the next disc, if multiple discs are stored as a favorite, the next track if loaded. This function is inactive, a CD/DVD is playing, to reject an with some radios, if the front seat incoming call, or end a current call. passengers are listening to the disc. b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press PROG to perform to silence the vehicle speakers only. the ENTER menu function. Press again to turn the sound on. For vehicles with OnStar® or Theft-Deterrent Feature Bluetooth systems, press and hold for longer than two seconds THEFTLOCK® is designed to to interact with those systems. discourage theft of the vehicle’s See OnStar¨ System on page 2-41 radio by learning a portion of the and Bluetooth¨ on page 3-98 in this Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number (VIN). manual for more information. The radio does not operate if it is Vehicles with audio steering wheel stolen or moved to a different controls could differ depending on SRCE (Source): Press to switch vehicle. the vehicle’s options. Some audio between the radio (AM, FM, XM), controls can be adjusted at the CD, and for vehicles with, DVD, front steering wheel. auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. w (Next): Press to go to the next For vehicles with the navigation radio station stored as a favorite, system, press and hold this button or the next track if a CD/DVD for longer than one second to initiate is playing. voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation System manual for more information. 3-120 Instrument Panel

+ e − e (Volume): Press to AM XM™ Satellite Radio Service increase or to decrease the radio The range for most AM stations is XM Satellite Radio Service volume. greater than for FM, especially at gives digital radio reception from ¨ night. The longer range can cause coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous (Seek): Press to go to the station frequencies to interfere United States, and in Canada. next radio station while in AM, FM, with each other. For better radio Just as with FM, tall buildings or or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the next reception, most AM radio stations hills can interfere with satellite radio track or chapter while sourced to boost the power levels during the signals, causing the sound to fade the CD or DVD slot. Press the ¨ if day, and then reduce these levels in and out. In addition, traveling multiple discs are loaded to go to the during the night. Static can also or standing under heavy foliage, next disc while sourced to a CD occur when things like storms and bridges, garages, or tunnels may player. power lines interfere with radio cause loss of the XM signal for a reception. When this happens, try period of time. reducing the treble on the radio. Radio Reception Cellular Phone Usage Frequency interference and static FM Stereo Cellular phone usage may cause can occur during normal radio FM signals only reach about interference with the vehicle’s radio. reception if items such as cell phone 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). This interference may occur when chargers, vehicle convenience Although the radio has a built-in making or receiving phone calls, accessories, and external electronic electronic circuit that automatically charging the phone’s battery, devices are plugged into the works to reduce interference, or simply having the phone on. accessory power outlet. If there is some static can occur, especially This interference causes an interference or static, unplug the item around tall buildings or hills, causing increased level of static while from the accessory power outlet. the sound to fade in and out. listening to the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off. Instrument Panel 3-121

Multi-Band Antenna The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of the vehicle. This type of antenna is used with the AM/FM radio, as well as OnStar® and the XM™ Satellite Radio Service System, if the vehicle has these features. Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception. If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the radio system may be affected if the sunroof is open. Loading items onto the roof of the vehicle can interfere with the performance of the radio system and, if the vehicle has this feature, OnStar®. Make sure the multi-band antenna is not obstructed. 3-122 Instrument Panel

✍ NOTES Driving Your Vehicle 4-1

Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-9 Driving Your Passing ...... 4-9 Your Driving, the Loss of Control ...... 4-9 Road, and the Vehicle Vehicle Driving at Night ...... 4-10 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ...... 4-11 Driving for Better Fuel Before Leaving on Economy Your Driving, the Road, a Long Trip ...... 4-12 and the Vehicle Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-12 Driving habits can affect fuel Driving for Better Fuel Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-12 mileage. Here are some driving Economy ...... 4-1 Winter Driving ...... 4-13 tips to get the best fuel economy Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 If Your Vehicle is Stuck in possible...... 4-15 Drunk Driving ...... 4-2 Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow • Avoid fast starts and accelerate ...... 4-3 Rocking Your Vehicle Control of a Vehicle smoothly. Braking ...... 4-3 toGetItOut...... 4-15 Antilock Brake System Loading the Vehicle ...... 4-16 • Brake gradually and avoid (ABS) ...... 4-4 abrupt stops. Braking in Emergencies ...... 4-5 Towing StabiliTrak® System ...... 4-5 Towing Your Vehicle ...... 4-20 • Avoid idling the engine for long All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Recreational Vehicle periods of time. Towing ...... 4-21 System ...... 4-7 • When road and weather ...... 4-8 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-24 Steering conditions are appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped. • Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require. 4-2 Driving Your Vehicle

• Keep vehicle tires properly Drunk Driving inflated. { CAUTION • Combine several trips into a Assume that other road users { CAUTION single trip. (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other • Replace the vehicle’s tires with drivers) are going to be careless Drinking and then driving is very the same TPC Spec number and make mistakes. Anticipate dangerous. Your reflexes, molded into the tire’s sidewall what they might do and be ready. perceptions, attentiveness, and near the size. In addition: judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You • Follow recommended scheduled • Allow enough following can have a serious — or even maintenance. distance between you and the driver in front of you. fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or • Focus on the task of driving. Defensive Driving ride with a driver who has been Defensive driving means “always Driver distraction can cause drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if expect the unexpected.” The collisions resulting in injury or you are with a group, designate a first step in driving defensively is to possible death. These simple driver who will not drink. wear your safety belt — See defensive driving techniques could save your life. Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone Death and injury associated with on page 1-12. drinking and driving is a global tragedy. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and attentiveness. Driving Your Vehicle 4-3

Police records show that almost This means that when anyone who Braking 40 percent of all motor has been drinking — driver or vehicle-related deaths involve passenger — is in a crash, that See Brake System Warning Light on alcohol. In most cases, these deaths person’s chance of being killed or page 3-34. are the result of someone who was permanently disabled is higher than Braking action involves perception drinking and driving. In recent years, if the person had not been drinking. time and reaction time. Deciding more than 17,000 annual motor to push the brake pedal is vehicle-related deaths have been Control of a Vehicle perception time. Actually doing it is associated with the use of alcohol, reaction time. with about 250,000 people injured. The following three systems help to control the vehicle while Average reaction time is about For persons under 21, it is against driving — brakes, steering, three-fourths of a second. But that the law in every U.S. state to drink and accelerator. At times, as when is only an average. It might be alcohol. There are good medical, driving on snow or ice, it is easy less with one driver and as long as psychological, and developmental to ask more of those control systems two or three seconds or more reasons for these laws. than the tires and road can with another. Age, physical The obvious way to eliminate the provide. Meaning, you can lose condition, alertness, coordination, control of the vehicle. See and eyesight all play a part. So leading highway safety problem ¨ is for people never to drink alcohol StabiliTrak System on page 4-5. do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a and then drive. Adding non-dealer/non-retailer second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph accessories can affect vehicle Medical research shows that alcohol (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). performance. See Accessories and in a person’s system can make crash That could be a lot of distance in an Modiﬁcations on page 5-3. injuries worse, especially injuries to emergency, so keeping enough the brain, spinal cord, or heart. space between the vehicle and others is important. 4-4 Driving Your Vehicle

And, of course, actual stopping If the engine stops, there will still be distances vary greatly with the some power brake assist but it will be surface of the road, whether it is used when the brake is applied. pavement or gravel; the condition of Once the power assist is used up, it the road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy; can take longer to stop and the brake tire tread; the condition of the brakes; pedal will be harder to push. If there is a problem with ABS, the weight of the vehicle; and the this warning light stays on. Adding non-dealer/non-retailer amount of brake force applied. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) accessories can affect vehicle Warning Light on page 3-35. Avoid needless heavy braking. Some performance. See Accessories and people drive in spurts — heavy Modiﬁcations on page 5-3. Let us say the road is wet and you acceleration followed by heavy are driving safely. Suddenly, an braking — rather than keeping pace Antilock Brake System animal jumps out in front of you. You slam on the brakes and with traffic. This is a mistake. The (ABS) brakes might not have time to cool continue braking. Here is what between hard stops. The brakes will This vehicle has the Antilock Brake happens with ABS: wear out much faster with a lot of System (ABS), an advanced A computer senses that the wheels heavy braking. Keeping pace with electronic braking system that helps are slowing down. If one of the the traffic and allowing realistic prevent a braking skid. wheels is about to stop rolling, the following distances eliminates a lot of When the engine is started and the computer will separately work unnecessary braking. That means vehicle begins to drive away, ABS the brakes at each wheel. better braking and longer brake life. checks itself. A momentary motor or ABS can change the brake pressure If the engine ever stops while the clicking noise might be heard while to each wheel, as required, faster vehicle is being driven, brake this test is going on, and it might than any driver could. This can normally but do not pump the brakes. even be noticed that the brake pedal help the driver steer around If the brakes are pumped, the pedal moves a little. This is normal. the obstacle while braking hard. could get harder to push down. Driving Your Vehicle 4-5

As the brakes are applied, the Braking in Emergencies feature will automatically disengage computer keeps receiving updates when the brake pedal is released or on wheel speed and controls braking ABS allows the driver to steer and brake pedal pressure is quickly pressure accordingly. brake at the same time. In many decreased. emergencies, steering can help more Remember: ABS does not change than even the very best braking. ® the time needed to get a foot StabiliTrak System up to the brake pedal or always Brake Assist The vehicle has the StabiliTrak decrease stopping distance. If you This vehicle has a Brake Assist system which combines antilock get too close to the vehicle in feature designed to assist the driver brake, traction and stability control front of you, there will not be enough in stopping or decreasing vehicle systems and helps the driver time to apply the brakes if that speed in emergency driving maintain directional control of the vehicle suddenly slows or stops. conditions. This feature uses the vehicle in most driving conditions. Always leave enough room up stability system hydraulic brake ahead to stop, even with ABS. When you ﬁrst start the vehicle and control module to supplement the begin to drive away, the system Using ABS power brake system under performs several diagnostic checks conditions where the driver has to ensure there are no problems. The Do not pump the brakes. Just hold quickly and forcefully applied the system may be heard or felt while it the brake pedal down ﬁrmly and let brake pedal in an attempt to quickly is working. This is normal and does antilock work. The antilock pump or stop or slow down the vehicle. The not mean there is a problem with the motor operating might be heard and stability system hydraulic brake vehicle. The system should initialize the brake pedal might be felt to control module increases brake before the vehicle reaches 20 mph pulsate, but this is normal. pressure at each corner of the (32 km/h). In some cases, it may vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor take approximately two miles brake pedal pulsations or pedal (3.2 km) of driving before the movement during this time is normal system initializes. and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist 4-6 Driving Your Vehicle

If the system fails to turn on or When the traction control system activate, the StabiliTrak light along has been turned off, system noises with one of the following messages may be heard and felt as a result will be displayed on the Driver of the brake-traction control working. Information Center (DIC): It is recommended to leave the TRACTION CONTROL OFF, The traction control disable button system on for normal driving SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, is located on the instrument conditions, but it may be necessary SERVICE STABILITRAK. If these panel below the climate controls. to turn the system off if the conditions are observed, turn the The traction control part of vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and StabiliTrak can be turned off by snow, and you want to “rock” the then turn it back on again to reset the pressing and releasing the traction vehicle to attempt to free it. It system. If any of these messages still control disable button. may also be necessary to turn off appear on the Driver Information Traction control can be turned on the system when driving in extreme Center (DIC), the vehicle should be by pressing and releasing the off-road conditions where high taken in for service. For more traction control disable button if wheel spin is required. See If Your information on the DIC messages, not automatically shut off for any Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, see Driver Information Center (DIC) other reason. Ice, or Snow on page 4-15. on page 3-42. When the traction control system is turned off, the StabiliTrak light Traction Control Operation and the appropriate traction control The traction control system is part of off message will be displayed on the StabiliTrak system. Traction the DIC to warn the driver. The control limits wheel spin by reducing vehicle will still have brake-traction The StabiliTrak light will ﬂash on the engine power to the wheels control when traction control is (engine speed management) and by instrument panel cluster when the off, but will not be able to use the system is both on and activated. applying brakes to each individual engine speed management system. wheel (brake-traction control) The system may be heard or See “Traction Control Operation” as necessary. felt while it is working; this is normal. next for more information. Driving Your Vehicle 4-7

The traction control system is The traction control system may All-Wheel Drive (AWD) enabled automatically when the activate on dry or rough roads vehicle is started. It will activate and or under conditions such as heavy System the StabiliTrak light will ﬂash if it acceleration while turning or If the vehicle has this feature, senses that any of the wheels are abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the engine power is sent to all four spinning or beginning to lose traction transmission. When this happens, a wheels when extra traction is while driving. If traction control is reduction in acceleration may be needed. This is like four-wheel drive, turned off, only the brake-traction noticed, or a noise or vibration may but there is no separate lever or control portion of traction control be heard. This is normal. switch to engage or disengage the will work. The engine speed axle. It is fully automatic, and If cruise control is being used when management will be disabled. In this adjusts itself as needed for road the system activates, the StabiliTrak mode, engine power is not reduced conditions. light will ﬂash and cruise control automatically and the driven wheels will automatically disengage. Cruise When using a compact spare tire on can spin more freely. This can cause control may be reengaged when the AWD equipped vehicle, the the brake-traction control to activate road conditions allow. See Cruise AWD system automatically detects constantly. Control on page 3-10. the presence of the compact Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle spare and the AWD is disabled. To StabiliTrak may also turn off is allowed to spin excessively restore the AWD operation and automatically if it determines that a while the StabiliTrak, ABS and prevent excessive wear on the AWD problem exists with the system. brake warning lights and any system, replace the compact If the problem does not clear itself relevant DIC messages are spare with a full-size tire as soon as after restarting the vehicle, see your displayed, the transfer case could possible. See Compact Spare dealer/retailer for service. be damaged. The repairs would Tire on page 5-79 for more not be covered by the vehicle information. warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights and messages are displayed. 4-8 Driving Your Vehicle

Steering If there is a need to reduce speed, page 4-3. It is better to remove as do it before entering the curve, much speed as possible from a Power Steering while the front wheels are straight. collision. Then steer around the If power steering assist is lost Try to adjust the speed so you problem, to the left or right because the engine stops or the can drive through the curve. depending on the space available. system is not functioning, the vehicle Maintain a reasonable, steady can be steered but it will take speed. Wait to accelerate until out more effort. of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway. Variable Effort Steering Steering in Emergencies The vehicle has a steering system that continuously adjusts the There are times when steering can effort felt when steering at all vehicle be more effective than braking. For speeds. It provides ease when example, you come over a hill and parking, yet a ﬁrm, solid feel ﬁnd a truck stopped in your lane, or a at highway speeds. car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between Steering Tips parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided It is important to take curves at a An emergency like this requires by braking — if you can stop in time. reasonable speed. close attention and a quick decision. But sometimes you cannot stop in If holding the steering wheel at Traction in a curve depends on time because there is no room. the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock the condition of the tires and That is the time for evasive positions, it can be turned a full the road surface, the angle at which action — steering around the 180 degrees very quickly without the curve is banked, and vehicle problem. removing either hand. But you have speed. While in a curve, speed The vehicle can perform very well to act fast, steer quickly, and just is the one factor that can be in emergencies like these. First, as quickly straighten the wheel once controlled. apply the brakes. See Braking on you have avoided the object. Driving Your Vehicle 4-9

The fact that such emergency Ease off the accelerator and then, if • Do not get too close to the vehicle situations are always possible is a there is nothing in the way, steer so you want to pass. Doing so can good reason to practice defensive that the vehicle straddles the edge of reduce your visibility. driving at all times and wear the pavement. Turn the steering • Wait your turn to pass a slow safety belts properly. wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, vehicle. (about one-eighth turn) until the right Off-Road Recovery front tire contacts the pavement • When you are being passed, ease edge. Then turn the steering wheel to to the right. The vehicle’s right wheels can drop go straight down the roadway. off the edge of a road onto the Loss of Control shoulder while driving. Passing Let us review what driving experts Passing another vehicle on a say about what happens when two-lane road can be dangerous. the three control systems — brakes, To reduce the risk of danger steering, and acceleration — do while passing: not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what • Look down the road, to the sides, the driver has asked. and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful In any emergency, do not give up. pass. If in doubt, wait. Keep trying to steer and constantly • Watch for traffic signs, pavement seek an escape route or area of markings, and lines that could less danger. indicate a turn or an intersection. If the level of the shoulder is only Never cross a solid or slightly below the pavement, double-solid line on your side recovery should be fairly easy. of the lane. 4-10 Driving Your Vehicle

Skidding Of course, traction is reduced when Driving at Night water, snow, ice, gravel, or other In a skid, a driver can lose control of material is on the road. For safety, Night driving is more dangerous than the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid slow down and adjust your day driving because some drivers most skids by taking reasonable care driving to these conditions. It is are likely to be impaired — by alcohol suited to existing conditions, and by important to slow down on slippery or drugs, with night vision problems, not overdriving those conditions. But surfaces because stopping or by fatigue. skids are always possible. distance is longer and vehicle Night driving tips include: The three types of skids correspond control more limited. to the vehicle’s three control • Drive defensively. While driving on a surface with systems. In the braking skid, the • Do not drink and drive. reduced traction, try your best to wheels are not rolling. In the steering avoid sudden steering, acceleration, • Reduce headlamp glare by or cornering skid, too much speed or or braking, including reducing vehicle adjusting the inside rearview steering in a curve causes tires to speed by shifting to a lower gear. mirror. slip and lose cornering force. And in Any sudden changes could cause the acceleration skid, too much • Slow down and keep more space the tires to slide. You might not throttle causes the driving wheels between you and other vehicles realize the surface is slippery until to spin. because headlamps can only the vehicle is skidding. Learn to light up so much road ahead. If the vehicle starts to slide, ease recognize warning clues — such as your foot off the accelerator enough water, ice, or packed snow • Watch for animals. pedal and quickly steer the way on the road to make a mirrored • When tired, pull off the road. you want the vehicle to go. If surface — and slow down when you • Do not wear sunglasses. you start steering quickly enough, have any doubt. the vehicle may straighten out. • Avoid staring directly into Remember: Any Antilock Brake Always be ready for a second skid approaching headlamps. System (ABS) helps avoid only the if it occurs. braking skid. Driving Your Vehicle 4-11

• Keep the windshield and all glass Hydroplaning { CAUTION on your vehicle clean — inside Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water and out. Wet brakes can cause crashes. can build up under your vehicle’s • Keep your eyes moving, They might not work as well in a tires so they actually ride on especially during turns or curves. quick stop and could cause the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you No one can see as well at night as pulling to one side. You could are going fast enough. When your in the daytime. But, as we get lose control of the vehicle. vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or older, these differences increase. A After driving through a large no contact with the road. 50-year-old driver might need at puddle of water or a car/vehicle least twice as much light to see the There is no hard and fast rule about wash, lightly apply the brake same thing at night as a 20-year-old. hydroplaning. The best advice is pedal until the brakes work to slow down when the road is wet. Driving in Rain and on normally. Wet Roads Flowing or rushing water creates Other Rainy Weather Tips strong forces. Driving through Besides slowing down, other wet Rain and wet roads can reduce flowing water could cause your weather driving tips include: vehicle traction and affect your vehicle to be carried away. If this • Allow extra following distance. ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle Always drive slower in these types occupants could drown. Do not • Pass with caution. of driving conditions and avoid ignore police warnings and be • Keep windshield wiping driving through large puddles and very cautious about trying to drive equipment in good shape. deep-standing or flowing water. through flowing water. • Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled. • Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page 5-37. • Turn off cruise control. 4-12 Driving Your Vehicle

Before Leaving on a Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Long Trip Always be alert and pay attention Driving on steep hills or through To prepare your vehicle for a long to your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving trip, consider having it serviced If you become tired or sleepy, find on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for by your dealer/retailer before a safe place to park your vehicle driving in these conditions include: departing. and rest. • Keep the vehicle serviced Things to check on your own Other driving tips include: and in good shape. include: • Keep the vehicle well ventilated. • Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and • Windshield Washer Fluid: • Keep interior temperature cool. Reservoir full? Windows transmission. • Keep your eyes moving — scan clean — inside and outside? • Going down steep or long hills, the road ahead and to the sides. • Wiper Blades: In good shape? shift to a lower gear. • Check the rearview mirror and • Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All vehicle instruments often. { levels checked? CAUTION • Lamps: Do they all work and are If you do not shift down, the lenses clean? brakes could get so hot that they • Tires: Are treads good? Are tires would not work well. You would inflated to recommended then have poor braking or even pressure? none going down a hill. You could • Weather and Maps: Safe to crash. Shift down to let the engine travel? Have up-to-date maps? assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. Driving Your Vehicle 4-13

Winter Driving The StabiliTrak¨ System on page 4-5 { CAUTION improves the ability to accelerate on Driving on Snow or Ice slippery roads, but slow down and Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or Drive carefully when there is snow adjust your driving to the road with the ignition off is dangerous. conditions. When driving through The brakes will have to do all the or ice between the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. deep snow, turn off the traction work of slowing down and they control part of the StabiliTrak® could get so hot that they would Wet ice can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain begins to System to help maintain vehicle not work well. You would then motion at lower speeds. have poor braking or even none fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or in going down a hill. You could crash. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) freezing rain until roads can be Always have the engine running on page 4-4 improves vehicle treated with salt or sand. stability during hard stops on a and the vehicle in gear when going slippery roads, but apply the brakes downhill. Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently sooner than when on dry pavement. • Stay in your own lane. Do not so traction is not lost. Accelerating Allow greater following distance swing wide or cut across the too quickly causes the wheels on any slippery road and watch for center of the road. Drive at to spin and makes the surface under slippery spots. Icy patches can speeds that let you stay in your the tires slick, so there is even occur on otherwise clear roads in own lane. less traction. shaded areas. The surface of • Top of hills: Be alert — something Try not to break the fragile traction. a curve or an overpass can remain could be in your lane (stalled car, If you accelerate too fast, the drive icy when the surrounding roads accident). wheels will spin and polish the are clear. Avoid sudden steering • Pay attention to special road surface under the tires even more. maneuvers and braking while on ice. signs (falling rocks area, winding Turn off cruise control, if equipped, roads, long grades, passing or on slippery surfaces. no-passing zones) and take appropriate action. 4-14 Driving Your Vehicle

Blizzard Conditions CAUTION (Continued) CAUTION (Continued) Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay with the For more information about vehicle unless there is help nearby. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: carbon monoxide, see Engine If possible, use the Roadside • Clear away snow from Assistance Program on page 7-6. around the base of your Exhaust on page 2-30. To get help and keep everyone vehicle, especially any that is Snow can trap exhaust gases in the vehicle safe: blocking the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can cause • Turn on the Hazard Warning • Check again from time to deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas Flashers on page 3-5. time to be sure snow does to get inside. CO could overcome not collect there. you and kill you. You cannot see it • Tie a red cloth to an outside • Open a window about two or smell it, so you might not know it mirror. inches (5 cm) on the side of is in your vehicle. Clear away snow the vehicle that is away from from around the base of your { CAUTION the wind to bring in fresh air. vehicle, especially any that is • Fully open the air outlets on or blocking the exhaust. Snow can trap engine exhaust under the instrument panel. under the vehicle. This may cause • Adjust the Climate Control Run the engine for short periods exhaust gases to get inside. system to a setting that only as needed to keep warm, Engine exhaust contains carbon circulates the air inside the but be careful. monoxide (CO) which cannot be vehicle and set the fan speed To save fuel, run the engine for seen or smelled. It can cause to the highest setting. See only short periods as needed to unconsciousness and even death. Climate Control System in the warm the vehicle and then shut the (Continued) Index. engine off and close the window (Continued) most of the way to save heat. Driving Your Vehicle 4-15

Repeat this until help arrives but only If stuck too severely for the traction Rocking Your Vehicle to when you feel really uncomfortable system to free the vehicle, turn from the cold. Moving about to keep the traction system off and use the Get It Out warm also helps. rocking method. Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around If it takes some time for help to the front wheels. Turn off any arrive, now and then when you run { CAUTION traction or stability system. Shift the engine, push the accelerator back and forth between R (Reverse) pedal slightly so the engine runs If you let your vehicle’s tires spin and a forward gear, spinning the faster than the idle speed. This at high speed, they can explode, wheels as little as possible. To keeps the battery charged to restart and you or others could be prevent transmission wear, wait until the vehicle and to signal for help with injured. The vehicle can overheat, the wheels stop spinning before the headlamps. Do this as little as causing an engine compartment shifting gears. Release the possible to save fuel. ﬁre or other damage. Spin the accelerator pedal while shifting, and wheels as little as possible and press lightly on the accelerator If Your Vehicle is Stuck avoid going above 35 mph pedal when the transmission is in in Sand, Mud, Ice, (55 km/h) as shown on the gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in or Snow speedometer. the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that Slowly and cautiously spin the For information about using tire could free the vehicle. If that does wheels to free the vehicle when chains on the vehicle, see Tire not get the vehicle out after a stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. Chains on page 5-57. few tries, it might need to be towed See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get out. If the vehicle does need to It Out on page 4-15. be towed out, see Towing Your If the vehicle has a traction system, Vehicle on page 4-20. it can often help to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction system in the Index. 4-16 Driving Your Vehicle

Loading the Vehicle Tire and Loading Information { CAUTION Label It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can Do not load the vehicle any carry. This weight is called heavier than the Gross Vehicle the vehicle capacity weight Weight Rating (GVWR), or and includes the weight of all either the maximum front or occupants, cargo, and all rear Gross Axle Weight Rating nonfactory-installed options. (GAWR). If you do, parts on Two labels on your vehicle the vehicle can break, and it show how much weight it may can change the way your properly carry, the Tire and vehicle handles. These could Loading Information label and cause you to lose control and the Certification/Tire label. crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. Example Label A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached below the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds. Driving Your Vehicle 4-17

The Tire and Loading Information Steps for Determining Correct 5. Determine the combined label also shows the size of the Load Limit weight of luggage and original equipment tires (C) and 1. Locate the statement “The cargo being loaded on the the recommended cold tire combined weight of vehicle. That weight may not inflation pressures (D). For more occupants and cargo should safely exceed the available information on tires and inflation never exceed XXX kg or cargo and luggage load see Tires on page 5-37 and XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s capacity calculated in Step 4. Inflation - Tire Pressure on placard. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a page 5-43. 2. Determine the combined trailer, the load from your There is also important loading weight of the driver and trailer will be transferred to information on the vehicle passengers that will be riding your vehicle. Consult Certification/Tire label. It tells in your vehicle. this manual to determine how you the Gross Vehicle Weight this reduces the available Rating (GVWR) and the 3. Subtract the combined weight cargo and luggage load Gross Axle Weight Rating of the driver and passengers capacity for your vehicle. from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (GAWR) for the front and rear See Towing a Trailer on axle. See “Certification/Tire 4. The resulting figure equals the page 4-24 for important Label” later in this section. available amount of cargo and information on towing a trailer, luggage load capacity. For towing safety rules, and example, if the “XXX” amount trailering tips. equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). 4-18 Driving Your Vehicle

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs Example 2 = 1,000 lbs Example 3 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg). (453 kg). (453 kg). B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = (136 kg). (340 kg). 1,000 lbs (453 kg). C. Available Occupant and C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = Cargo Weight = 700 lbs 250 lbs (113 kg). 0 lbs (0 kg). (317 kg). Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for speciﬁc information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight. Driving Your Vehicle 4-19

Certification/Tire Label The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, { CAUTION fuel, and cargo. Do not load the vehicle any The Certification/Tire label also heavier than the Gross Vehicle tells you the maximum Weight Rating (GVWR), or weights for the front and rear either the maximum front or axles, called the Gross Axle rear Gross Axle Weight Rating Weight Rating (GAWR). To find (GAWR). If you do, parts on out the actual loads on your the vehicle can break, and it front and rear axles, you need to can change the way your go to a weigh station and vehicle handles. These could weigh your vehicle. Your cause you to lose control and dealer/retailer can help you with crash. Also, overloading can Label Example this. Be sure to spread out shorten the life of the vehicle. your load equally on both sides of the centerline. A vehicle specific Notice: Overloading your Certification/Tire label is Never exceed the GVWR for vehicle may cause damage. attached to the rear edge of the your vehicle or the GAWR Repairs would not be covered driver’s door. for either the front or rear axle. by your warranty. Do not The label shows the gross overload your vehicle. weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). 4-20 Driving Your Vehicle

If you put things inside your Towing vehicle — like suitcases, tools, { CAUTION packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as the vehicle Things you put inside your Towing Your Vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn vehicle can strike and injure To avoid damage, the disabled quickly, or if there is a crash, people in a sudden stop or vehicle should be towed with all they will keep going. turn, or in a crash. four wheels off the ground. Consult • Put things in the cargo your dealer/retailer or a professional area of your vehicle. Try to towing service if the disabled spread the weight evenly. vehicle must be towed. See • Never stack heavier Roadside Assistance Program on things, like suitcases, page 7-6. inside the vehicle so that some of them are above To tow the vehicle behind another the tops of the seats. vehicle for recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome, • Do not leave an unsecured see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” child restraint in your following. vehicle. • When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. • Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to. Driving Your Vehicle 4-21

Recreational Vehicle • Is the proper towing equipment These vehicles may also be towed Towing going to be used? See your by putting the front wheels on a dolly. dealer/retailer or trailering See “Dolly Towing” later in this Recreational vehicle towing means professional for additional advice section. towing the vehicle behind another and equipment recommendations. If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it can vehicle – such as behind a • Is the vehicle ready to be towed? be dinghy towed from the front. motorhome. The two most common Just as preparing the vehicle for a These vehicles can also be towed by types of recreational vehicle towing long trip, make sure the vehicle is placing them on a platform trailer are known as dinghy towing and prepared to be towed. See Before with all four wheels off of the ground. dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towing Leaving on a Long Trip on These vehicles cannot be towed the vehicle with all four wheels on the page 4-12. using a dolly. ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the Dinghy Towing For vehicles being dinghy towed, the ground and two wheels up on a vehicle should be run at the device known as a dolly. beginning of each day and at each RV fuel stop for about ﬁve minutes. Here are some important things to This will ensure proper lubrication of consider before recreational transmission components. Re-install vehicle towing: the fuse to start the vehicle. • What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure to read To tow the vehicle from the front the tow vehicle manufacturer’s with all four wheels on the ground: recommendations. 1. Position the vehicle to tow and • What is the distance that will be then secure it to the towing travelled? Some vehicles have vehicle. restrictions on how far and how If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, it 2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) long they can tow. can be dinghy towed from the front. and turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. 4-22 Driving Your Vehicle

3. Set the parking brake. Once the destination is reached: Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive 4. Turn the ignition to 1. Set the parking brake. Vehicles) ACC/ACCESSORY. 2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse 5. Shift the transmission to to the underhood fuse block. N (Neutral). 3. Shift the transmission to P (Park), 6. To prevent the battery from turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF draining while the vehicle is being and remove the key from towed, remove the 50 amp the ignition. BATT1 fuse from the underhood 4. Disconnect the vehicle from the fuse block and store in a safe towing vehicle. location. See Underhood Fuse Block on page 5-91. Notice: Do not tow a vehicle 7. Release the parking brake. with the front drive wheels on the ground if one of the front tires Notice: If the vehicle is towed is a compact spare tire. Towing All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be without performing each of with two different tire sizes on the towed with two wheels on the the steps listed under “Dinghy front of the vehicle can cause ground. To properly tow these Towing,” the automatic severe damage to the vehicles, they should be placed on transmission could be damaged. transmission. a platform trailer with all four Be sure to follow all steps of wheels off of the ground or dinghy the dinghy towing procedure prior towed from the front. to and after towing the vehicle. Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) is exceeded while towing the vehicle, it could be damaged. Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing the vehicle. Driving Your Vehicle 4-23

Dolly Towing 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a (Front-Wheel-Drive straight-ahead position with a Vehicles Only) clamping device designed for towing. 5. Remove the key from the ignition. 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. 7. Release the parking brake. Towing the Vehicle From the Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never have To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle the vehicle towed from the rear. from the front with two wheels on the ground: Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park). 3. Set the parking brake. 4-24 Driving Your Vehicle

Towing a Trailer Trailering is different than just Pulling A Trailer driving the vehicle by itself. Here are some important points: { Trailering means changes in CAUTION handling, acceleration, braking, • There are many different durability and fuel economy. laws, including speed limit The driver can lose control when Successful, safe trailering takes restrictions, having to do with pulling a trailer if the correct correct equipment, and it has to be trailering. Make sure the rig will equipment is not used or the used properly. be legal, not only where you vehicle is not driven properly. live but also where you will be For example, if the trailer is too The following information has many driving. A good source for heavy, the brakes may not work time-tested, important trailering this information can be state or well — or even at all. The driver tips and safety rules. Many of these provincial police. are important for the safety of the and passengers could be • Consider using a sway control. seriously injured. The vehicle may driver and the passengers. So please read this section carefully See “Hitches” later in this section. also be damaged; the resulting before pulling a trailer. repairs would not be covered by • Do not tow a trailer at all during the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer Load-pulling components such as the ﬁrst 500 miles (800 km) the only if all the steps in this section the engine, transmission, rear new vehicle is driven. The engine, have been followed. Ask your axle, wheel assemblies and tires are axle or other parts could be damaged. dealer/retailer for advice and forced to work harder against the information about towing a trailer drag of the added weight. The • Then, during the ﬁrst 500 miles with the vehicle. engine is required to operate (800 km) that a trailer is towed, do at relatively higher speeds and not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) under greater loads, generating To identify the trailering capacity of and do not make starts at full extra heat. What’s more, the trailer the vehicle, read the information throttle. This helps the engine and adds considerably to wind in “Weight of the Trailer” that other parts of the vehicle wear in resistance, increasing the pulling appears later in this section. at the heavier loads. requirements. Driving Your Vehicle 4-25

• Obey speed limit restrictions Three important considerations have tongue weight the vehicle can carry. when towing a trailer. to do with weight: See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for more • The vehicles can tow in D (Drive). • The weight of the trailer. information. Shift the transmission to a lower • The weight of the trailer tongue. gear if the transmission shifts too Maximum trailer weight is calculated often under heavy loads and/or • And the weight on the vehicle’s assuming only the driver is in the tow hilly conditions. See “Tow/Haul tires vehicle and it has all the required Mode” later in this section. Weight of the Trailer trailering equipment. The weight of • The vehicle is designed primarily additional optional equipment, How heavy can a trailer safely be? as a passenger and load carrying passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle. If a trailer is towed, the It depends on how the rig is used. vehicle must be subtracted from the vehicle will require more frequent For example, speed, altitude, road maximum trailer weight. maintenance due to grades, outside temperature and Use the following chart to determine the additional load. how much the vehicle is used to pull how much the vehicle can weigh, a trailer are all important. It can based upon the vehicle model depend on any special equipment on and options. the vehicle, and the amount of

Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR Front-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) All-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) *The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded. 4-26 Driving Your Vehicle

Ask your dealer/retailer for our weight may reduce the trailering trailering information or advice, or capacity more than the total of the write us at our Customer Assistance additional weight. Offices. See Customer Assistance Consider the following example: Offices on page 7-4 for more information. A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs Weight of the Trailer Tongue (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. The tongue load (A) of any trailer is It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs an important weight to measure If a weight-carrying hitch or a (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs because it affects the total gross weight-distributing hitch is being (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross weight of the vehicle. The Gross used, the trailer tongue (A) should Combination Weight Rating) of Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the weigh 10-15 percent of the total 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo loaded trailer weight (B). rating should be: carried in it, and the people who After loading the trailer, weigh the will be riding in the vehicle. If there trailer and then the tongue, are a lot of options, equipment, separately, to see if the weights are passengers or cargo in the vehicle, proper. If they aren’t, adjustments it will reduce the tongue weight the might be made by moving some vehicle can carry, which will also items around in the trailer. Expect tongue weight to be at reduce the trailer weight the vehicle least 10 percent of trailer weight can tow. If towing a trailer, the Trailering may also be limited by the (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because tongue load must be added to the vehicle’s ability to carry tongue the weight is applied well behind GVW because the vehicle will be weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the rear axle, the effect on the carrying that weight, too. See the vehicle to exceed the GVWR rear axle is greater than just Loading the Vehicle on page 4-16 for (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the the weight itself, as much as more information about the vehicle’s RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight 1.5 times as much. The weight at maximum load capacity. Rating). The effect of additional Driving Your Vehicle 4-27 the rear axle could be 850 lbs The maximum trailer would only be Total Weight on the Vehicle’s (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go Tires Since the rear axle already further and think the tongue weight weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding should be limited to less than Be sure the vehicle’s tires are 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid inﬂated to the upper limit for cold total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This exceeding GVWR. But the effect on tires. These numbers can be found is very close to, but within the the rear axle must still be considered. on the Certiﬁcation/Tire label. See limit for RGAWR as well. The Because the rear axle now weighs Loading the Vehicle on page 4-16. vehicle is set to trailer up to 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs Make sure not to go over the GVW 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg). (408 kg) can be put on the rear axle limit for the vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. If the vehicle has many options and without exceeding RGAWR. The there is a front seat passenger effect of tongue weight is about Hitches and two rear seat passengers with 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing It is important to have the correct some luggage and gear in the the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves hitch equipment. Crosswinds, vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg) only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue large trucks going by and rough could be added to the front weight that can be handled. Since roads are a few reasons why axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to tongue weight is usually at least the right hitch is needed. Here are the rear axle weight. The vehicle 10 percent of total loaded trailer some rules to follow: now weighs: weight, expect that the largest trailer the vehicle can properly handle is • The rear bumper on the vehicle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg). not intended for hitches. Do not It is important that the vehicle attach rental hitches or other does not exceed any of its bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that Weight is still below 7,200 lbs ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, does not attach to the bumper. (3 266 kg) and you might think 700 Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue additional pounds (318 kg) should Weight. The only way to be sure it is be subtracted from the trailering not exceeding any of these ratings is capacity to stay within GCWR limits. to weigh the vehicle and trailer. 4-28 Driving Your Vehicle

• Will any holes be made in the Trailer Brakes Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety body of the vehicle when the A loaded trailer that weighs more chains, electrical connectors, lamps, trailer hitch is installed? If there than 1,000 lbs (450 kg) needs tires and mirror adjustments. If are, then be sure to seal the holes to have its own brake system that is the trailer has electric brakes, start later when the hitch is removed. adequate for the weight of the the vehicle and trailer moving If the holes are not sealed, dirt, trailer. Be sure to read and follow and then apply the trailer brake water, and deadly carbon the instructions for the trailer brakes controller by hand to be sure monoxide (CO) from the exhaust so they are installed, adjusted the brakes are working. This checks can get into the vehicle. See and maintained properly. Engine Exhaust on page 2-30. the electrical connection at the Because the vehicle has antilock same time. Safety Chains brakes, do not try to tap into During the trip, check occasionally the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. Always attach chains between the to be sure that the load is secure, If you do, both brake systems will vehicle and the trailer. Cross the and that the lamps and any not work well, or at all. safety chains under the tongue of trailer brakes are still working. the trailer to help prevent the tongue Driving with a Trailer from contacting the road if it Following Distance Towing a trailer requires a certain becomes separated from the hitch. Stay at least twice as far behind the amount of experience. Get to Instructions about safety chains vehicle ahead as you would know the rig before setting out for may be provided by the hitch when driving the vehicle without a the open road. Get acquainted manufacturer or by the trailer trailer. This can help to avoid with the feel of handling and braking manufacturer. Follow the situations that require heavy braking with the added weight of the manufacturer’s recommendation for and sudden turns. attaching safety chains and do not trailer. And always keep in mind that attach them to the bumper. Always the vehicle you are driving is now leave just enough slack so the rig longer and not as responsive as the can turn. Never allow safety chains vehicle is by itself. to drag on the ground. Driving Your Vehicle 4-29

Passing curbs, road signs, trees or other temperature gage indicates objects. Avoid jerky or sudden overheating, turn off the air More passing distance is needed maneuvers. Signal well in advance. conditioning to reduce engine load, when towing a trailer. Because pull off the road and stop in a the rig is longer, it is necessary to Turn Signals When Towing a safe spot. Let the engine run while go much farther beyond the Trailer parked, preferably on level passed vehicle before returning to ground, with the transmission in the lane. The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn P (Park) for a few minutes before Backing Up or lane change. Properly hooked up, turning the engine off. the trailer lamps also flash, telling Hold the bottom of the steering wheel Reduce speed and shift to a lower other drivers the vehicle is turning, with one hand. Then, to move the gear before starting down a long changing lanes or stopping. trailer to the left, move that hand to or steep downgrade. If the the left. To move the trailer to the When towing a trailer, the arrows transmission is not shifted down, the right, move your hand to the right. on the instrument panel flash brakes might have to be used so Always back up slowly and, if for turns even if the bulbs on the much that they would get hot and no possible, have someone guide you. trailer are burned out. For this longer work well. reason you may think other drivers Making Turns On a long uphill grade, shift down are seeing the signal when they and reduce the vehicle speed Notice: Making very sharp turns are not. It is important to check to around 55 mph (88 km/h) to while trailering could cause occasionally to be sure the trailer reduce the possibility of the engine the trailer to come in contact with bulbs are still working. and the transmission overheating. the vehicle. The vehicle could Driving on Grades be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. Because of the added load of the trailer, the vehicle’s engine may When turning with a trailer, make overheat on hot days, when going wider turns than normal. Do this so up a long or steep grade with a the trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, trailer. If the engine coolant 4-30 Driving Your Vehicle

Tow/Haul Mode Tow/Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions: Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or • When pulling a heavy trailer or a a large or heavy load. The purpose large or heavy load through of the Tow/Haul mode is to: Press this button located on the rolling terrain. console to turn on and turn off the • Reduce the frequency and • When pulling a heavy trailer or a Tow/Haul mode. improve the predictability of large or heavy load in stop and transmission shifts when pulling The Tow/Haul light on the go traffic. a heavy trailer or a large or instrument panel will come on to • When pulling a heavy trailer or a heavy load. indicate that Tow/Haul mode large or heavy load in busy • Provide the same solid shift feel has been selected. parking lots where improved low when pulling a heavy trailer or a Tow/Haul may be turned off by speed control of the vehicle is large or heavy load as when pressing the button again, at which desired. the vehicle is unloaded. time the indicator light on the Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul • Improve control of vehicle speed instrument panel will turn off. The when lightly loaded or with no trailer while requiring less throttle pedal vehicle will automatically turn at all will not cause damage. activity when pulling a heavy off Tow/Haul every time it is started. However, there is no beneﬁt to the trailer or a large or heavy load. Tow/Haul is designed to be most selection of Tow/Haul when the • Increase the charging system effective when the vehicle and vehicle is unloaded. Such a voltage to assist in recharging trailer combined weight is at least selection when unloaded may result a battery installed in a trailer. 75 percent of the vehicle’s in unpleasant engine and Gross Combined Weight Rating transmission driving characteristics (GCWR). See Weight of the and reduced fuel economy. Trailer earlier in this section. Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. Driving Your Vehicle 4-31

Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then Things that are especially important apply the parking brake in trailer operation are automatic { CAUTION and shift the transmission into transmission ﬂuid, engine oil, P (Park). axle lubricant, belts, cooling system Parking the vehicle on a hill with 5. Release the brake pedal. and brake system. It is a good the trailer attached can be idea to inspect these before and during the trip. dangerous. If something goes Leaving After Parking on wrong, the rig could start to move. a Hill Check periodically to see that all People can be injured, and both 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal hitch nuts and bolts are tight. the vehicle and the trailer can be while you: Trailer Wiring Harness damaged. When possible, always • start the engine, park the rig on a ﬂat surface. The vehicle is equipped with the • shift into a gear, and following wiring harness for towing If parking the rig on a hill: • release the parking brake. a trailer. 1. Press the brake pedal, but do 2. Let up on the brake pedal. Basic Trailer Wiring not shift into P (Park) yet. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is The trailer wiring harness, with a Turn the wheels into the curb if clear of the chocks. seven-pin connector, is located at facing downhill or into traffic 4. Stop and have someone pick up the rear of the vehicle and is tied to if facing uphill. and store the chocks. the vehicle’s frame. The harness 2. Have someone place chocks connector can be plugged into a under the trailer wheels. Maintenance When Trailer seven-pin universal heavy-duty Towing 3. When the wheel chocks are in trailer connector available through place, release the brake pedal The vehicle needs service more your dealer/retailer. until the chocks absorb the load. often when pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-3 for more information. 4-32 Driving Your Vehicle

The seven-wire harness contains If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is The harness contains the following the following trailer circuits: being charged, press the Tow/Haul wires: • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal mode switch located on the center • Red/Black: Power Supply console near the climate controls. • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn This will boost the vehicle system • White: Brake Switch Signal Signal voltage and properly charge the • Gray: Illumination • Brown: Taillamps battery. If the trailer is too light for Tow/Haul mode, turn on the • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal • Black: Ground headlamps (Non-HID only) as a • Black: Ground • Light Green: Back-up Lamps second way to boost the vehicle The electric trailer brake controller system and charge the battery. • Red/Black: Battery Feed should be installed by your dealer/ • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* Electric Trailer Brake Control retailer or a qualiﬁed service center. Wiring Provisions *The fuse for this circuit is installed Engine Cooling When Trailer in the underhood electrical center, These wiring provisions for an Towing electric trailer brake controller but the wires are not connected. The cooling system may temporarily They should be connected by your are included with the vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. overheat during severe operating dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed service conditions. See Engine Overheating center. The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires behind the on page 5-22. If the back-up lamp circuit is not steering column for the electric functional, contact your dealer/ trailer brake controller. retailer. Service and Appearance Care 5-1

Checking Things Under Bulb Replacement Service and the Hood Bulb Replacement ...... 5-33 Checking Things Under High Intensity Discharge Appearance Care the Hood ...... 5-9 (HID) Lighting ...... 5-34 Hood Release ...... 5-9 Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-34 Engine Compartment Taillamps, Turn Signal, Overview ...... 5-10 Stoplamps and Sidemarker Service Engine Oil ...... 5-12 Lamps ...... 5-34 Service ...... 5-3 Engine Oil Life System ...... 5-14 License Plate Lamp ...... 5-35 Accessories and Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 5-15 Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-35 Modifications ...... 5-3 Automatic Transmission California Proposition Fluid ...... 5-16 Windshield Replacement 65 Warning ...... 5-3 Cooling System ...... 5-17 Windshield Replacement ...... 5-36 California Perchlorate Engine Coolant ...... 5-18 Materials Requirements ...... 5-4 Engine Overheating ...... 5-22 Windshield Wiper Blade Doing Your Own Overheated Replacement Service Work ...... 5-4 Engine Protection Windshield Wiper Blade Adding Equipment to the Operating Mode ...... 5-24 Replacement ...... 5-36 Outside of the Vehicle ...... 5-4 Power Steering Fluid ...... 5-24 Windshield Washer Fluid ...... 5-25 Tires Fuel ...... 5-26 Tires ...... 5-37 Brakes ...... 5-38 Fuel ...... 5-5 Battery ...... 5-28 Tire Sidewall Labeling Gasoline Octane ...... 5-5 Jump Starting ...... 5-29 Tire Terminology and Gasoline Specifications ...... 5-5 Definitions ...... 5-40 California Fuel ...... 5-5 All-Wheel Drive Inflation - Tire Pressure ...... 5-43 Additives ...... 5-5 All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-33 Tire Pressure Monitor Fuels in Foreign Countries ...... 5-6 System ...... 5-44 Filling the Tank ...... 5-7 Headlamp Aiming Tire Pressure Monitor Filling a Portable Fuel Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-33 Operation ...... 5-46 Container ...... 5-8 5-2 Service and Appearance Care

Tire Inspection and Appearance Care Electrical System Rotation ...... 5-49 Interior Cleaning ...... 5-80 High Voltage Devices When It Is Time for Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-81 and Wiring ...... 5-87 New Tires ...... 5-51 Leather ...... 5-82 Add-On Electrical Buying New Tires ...... 5-51 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Equipment ...... 5-88 Different Size Tires Other Plastic Surfaces ...... 5-82 Windshield Wiper Fuses ...... 5-88 and Wheels ...... 5-53 Care of Safety Belts ...... 5-82 Power Windows and Other Uniform Tire Quality Weatherstrips ...... 5-83 Power Options ...... 5-88 Grading ...... 5-54 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-83 Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....5-88 Wheel Alignment and Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Instrument Panel Tire Balance ...... 5-55 Lenses ...... 5-83 Fuse Block ...... 5-89 Wheel Replacement ...... 5-55 Finish Care ...... 5-84 Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-91 Tire Chains ...... 5-57 Windshield, Backglass, If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 5-57 and Wiper Blades ...... 5-84 Capacities and Specifications Tire Sealant and Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Capacities and Compressor Kit ...... 5-59 Wheels and Trim ...... 5-85 Specifications ...... 5-94 Tire Sealant and Tires ...... 5-85 Compressor Kit Storage ...... 5-66 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-86 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-67 Finish Damage ...... 5-86 Removing the Spare Underbody Maintenance ...... 5-86 Tire and Tools ...... 5-68 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 5-86 Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire ...... 5-70 Vehicle Identification Secondary Latch System ...... 5-74 Vehicle Identification Storing a Flat or Spare Number (VIN) ...... 5-87 Tire and Tools ...... 5-76 Service Parts Identification Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-79 Label ...... 5-87 Service and Appearance Care 5-3

Service Accessories and vehicle using genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your For service and parts needs, visit Modifications GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM your dealer/retailer. You will receive When non-dealer/non-retailer Accessories, you will know that genuine GM parts and GM-trained accessories are added to the vehicle, GM-trained and supported service and supported service people. they can affect vehicle performance technicians will perform the work Genuine GM parts have one and safety, including such things as using genuine GM Accessories. airbags, braking, stability, ride and of these marks: Also, see Adding Equipment to Your handling, emissions systems, Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on aerodynamics, durability, and page 1-58. electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. Some of these accessories California Proposition 65 could even cause malfunction or Warning damage not covered by the vehicle Most motor vehicles, including this warranty. one, contain and/or emit chemicals Damage to vehicle components known to the State of California resulting from the installation or use to cause cancer and birth defects or of non-GM certified parts, including other reproductive harm. Engine control module modifications, are not exhaust, many parts and systems covered under the terms of the (including some inside the vehicle), vehicle warranty and may affect many fluids, and some component remaining warranty coverage for wear by-products contain and/or affected parts. emit these chemicals. GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize the 5-4 Service and Appearance Care

California Perchlorate Doing Your Own than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Materials Requirements Service Work Service Publications Ordering Certain types of automotive Information on page 7-13. applications, such as airbag { CAUTION This vehicle has an airbag system. initiators, seat belt pretensioners, Before attempting to do your and lithium batteries contained You can be injured and the own service work, see Servicing in remote keyless transmitters, may vehicle could be damaged if you Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle contain perchlorate materials. try to do service work on a vehicle on page 1-57. Special handling may be necessary. without knowing enough about it. For additional information, see • Be sure you have sufficient Keep a record with all parts receipts www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ knowledge, experience, the and list the mileage and the date perchlorate. proper replacement parts, and of any service work performed. See tools before attempting any Maintenance Record on page 6-13. vehicle maintenance task. • Be sure to use the proper Adding Equipment to nuts, bolts, and other the Outside of the fasteners. English and metric Vehicle fasteners can be easily confused. If the wrong Things added to the outside of the fasteners are used, parts can vehicle can affect the airﬂow later break or fall off. You around it. This can cause wind could be hurt. noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer If doing some of your own service before adding equipment to work, use the proper service the outside of the vehicle. manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle Service and Appearance Care 5-5

Fuel Gasoline Specifications might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on Use of the recommended fuel At a minimum, gasoline page 3-37. If this occurs, return to is an important part of the proper should meet ASTM specification your authorized dealer/retailer for maintenance of this vehicle. To help D 4814 in the United States or diagnosis. If it is determined that the keep the engine clean and maintain CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. condition is caused by the type of optimum vehicle performance, we Some gasolines contain an fuel used, repairs might not be recommend the use of gasoline octane-enhancing additive called covered by the vehicle warranty. advertised as TOP TIER Detergent methylcyclopentadienyl manganese Gasoline. tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of gasolines Additives Gasoline Octane containing MMT. See Additives on To provide cleaner air, all gasolines page 5-5 for additional information. in the United States are now required Use regular unleaded gasoline with to contain additives that help prevent a posted octane rating of 87 or California Fuel engine and fuel system deposits higher. If the octane rating is less from forming, allowing the emission than 87, you might notice an audible If the vehicle is certified to meet control system to work properly. In knocking noise when you drive, California Emissions Standards, it is most cases, you should not have to commonly referred to as spark designed to operate on fuels that add anything to the fuel. However, knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline meet California specifications. See some gasolines contain only the rated at 87 octane or higher as the underhood emission control minimum amount of additive required soon as possible. If you are using label. If this fuel is not available in to meet U.S. Environmental gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher states adopting California emissions Protection Agency regulations. To and you hear heavy knocking, the standards, the vehicle will operate help keep fuel injectors and intake engine needs service. satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal valves clean, or if the vehicle specifications, but emission control experiences problems due to dirty system performance might be injectors or valves, look for gasoline affected. The malfunction indicator that is advertised as TOP TIER lamp could turn on and the vehicle Detergent Gasoline. 5-6 Service and Appearance Care

For customers who do not use TOP Notice: This vehicle was not Fuels in Foreign TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, designed for fuel that contains one bottle of GM Fuel System methanol. Do not use fuel Countries Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel containing methanol. It can If you plan on driving in another tank at every engine oil change, corrode metal parts in the fuel country outside the United States or can help clean deposits from system and also damage plastic Canada, the proper fuel might be fuel injectors and intake valves. GM and rubber parts. That damage hard to ﬁnd. Never use leaded Fuel System Treatment PLUS is would not be covered under gasoline or any other fuel not the only gasoline additive the vehicle warranty. recommended in the previous text recommended by General Motors. on fuel. Costly repairs caused Some gasolines that are by use of improper fuel would not Also, your dealer/retailer has not reformulated for low be covered by the vehicle warranty. additives that will help correct and emissions can contain an prevent most deposit-related octane-enhancing additive called To check the fuel availability, ask problems. methylcyclopentadienyl manganese an auto club, or contact a major oil tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant company that does business in Gasolines containing oxygenates, where you buy gasoline whether the the country where you will be such as ethers and ethanol, fuel contains MMT. We recommend driving. and reformulated gasolines might be against the use of such gasolines. available in your area. We Fuels containing MMT can reduce recommend that you use these the life of spark plugs and the gasolines, if they comply with the performance of the emission control speciﬁcations described earlier. system could be affected. The However, E85 (85% ethanol) and malfunction indicator lamp might turn other fuels containing more on. If this occurs, return to your than 10% ethanol must not be used dealer/retailer for service. in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels. Service and Appearance Care 5-7

Filling the Tank To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in and release { CAUTION and it will open. { CAUTION Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. If Fuel vapor burns violently and a you spill fuel and then something fuel fire can cause bad injuries. ignites it, you could be badly To help avoid injuries to you and burned. This spray can happen if others, read and follow all the the tank is nearly full, and is more instructions on the pump island. likely in hot weather. Open the Turn off the engine when you are fuel cap slowly and wait for any refueling. Do not smoke if you are hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew near fuel or refueling the vehicle. the cap all the way. Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not materials away from fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a leave the fuel pump unattended To remove the fuel cap, turn it few seconds after you have finished when refueling the vehicle. This is slowly counterclockwise. The fuel pumping before removing the nozzle. against the law in some places. cap has a spring in it; if the cap Clean fuel from painted surfaces as Do not re-enter the vehicle while is released too soon, it will spring soon as possible. See Washing Your pumping fuel. Keep children away back to the right. Vehicle on page 5-83. from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door. The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle. 5-8 Service and Appearance Care

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it Notice: If you need a new fuel clockwise until it clicks. Make cap, be sure to get the right type. CAUTION (Continued) sure the cap is fully installed. The Your dealer/ retailer can get one diagnostic system can determine if for you. If you get the wrong type, and the vehicle damaged if this the fuel cap has been left off or it might not fit properly. This can occurs. To help avoid injury to improperly installed. This would cause the malfunction indicator you and others: allow fuel to evaporate into lamp to light and can damage the • Dispense fuel only into the atmosphere. See Malfunction fuel tank and emissions system. approved containers. Indicator Lamp on page 3-37. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp • Do not fill a container while it on page 3-37. If the vehicle has a Driver is inside a vehicle, in a Information Center (DIC), the vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or TIGHTEN GAS CAP message Filling a Portable Fuel on any surface other than the displays if the fuel cap is not Container ground. properly installed. • Bring the fill nozzle in contact { CAUTION with the inside of the fill { CAUTION opening before operating the Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be If a fire starts while you are while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is refueling, do not remove the electricity discharge from the complete. nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by container can ignite the fuel • Do not smoke while shutting off the pump or by vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel. notifying the station attendant. • Do not use a cellular phone (Continued) Leave the area immediately. while pumping fuel. Service and Appearance Care 5-9

Checking Things Hood Release 3. After the lid has been partially lifted, a gas strut automatically Under the Hood To open the hood: lifts and holds the hood in the fully open position. { CAUTION Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even Pull the hood down to close. Lower 1. Pull the hood release handle with the hood until the lifting pressure when the engine is not running. this symbol on it. It is located Keep hands, clothing, and tools of the strut is reduced. Then under the instrument panel allow the hood to fall and latch into away from any underhood on the driver side of the vehicle. place under its own weight. electric fan. Check to make sure the hood is closed. If the hood does not fully latch, gently push the hood { CAUTION down at the front and center until it is completely latched. Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. 2. At the front of the vehicle, pull up on the bottom center of the grille, and push the secondary hood release to the left. 5-10 Service and Appearance Care

Engine Compartment Overview When you lift the hood, here is what you will see: Service and Appearance Care 5-11

A. Radiator Pressure Cap. See F. Power Steering Fluid on J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. Cooling System on page 5-17. page 5-24. See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When on page 5-26. See Cooling System on to Add Engine Oil” under Engine K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. Oil on page 5-12. page 5-15. C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See L. Windshield Washer Fluid See Jump Starting on page 5-29. “Checking Engine Oil” under Reservoir. See “Adding Washer D. Underhood Fuse Block on Engine Oil on page 5-12. Fluid” under Windshield page 5-91. I. Automatic Transmission Fluid Washer Fluid on page 5-25. E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. Dipstick. See “Checking the See Jump Starting on page 5-29. Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-16. 5-12 Service and Appearance Care

Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle See Engine Compartment Overview must be on level ground. on page 5-10 for the location of The engine oil dipstick handle is a If the oil is below the cross-hatched the engine oil fill cap. area at the tip of the dipstick, yellow loop. See Engine Add enough oil to put the level Compartment Overview on add at least one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section somewhere in the proper operating page 5-10 for the location of the range in the cross-hatched area. engine oil dipstick. explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, Push the dipstick all the way back in 1. Turn off the engine and give the see Capacities and Specifications when through. oil several minutes to drain back on page 5-94. into the oil pan. If this is not done, the oil dipstick might not Notice: Do not add too much oil. show the actual level. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it cross-hatched area that shows with a paper towel or cloth, then the proper operating range, push it back in all the way. the engine could be damaged. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. Service and Appearance Care 5-13

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use • SAE 5W-30 Engines starburst symbol. Failure Look for three things: SAE 5W-30 is best for the to use the recommended oil vehicle. These numbers on an oil can result in engine damage not container show its viscosity, or covered by the vehicle warranty. thickness. Do not use other Cold Temperature Operation viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below −20°F • American Petroleum Institute (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30 (API) starburst symbol synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil to Use” for more information. Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst Engine Oil Additives / Engine symbol on the container. This Oil Flushes symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Do not add anything to the oil. The Petroleum Institute (API). recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Notice: Use only engine oil Standard GM6094M are all that is identified as meeting GM needed for good performance • GM6094M Standard GM6094M and showing and engine protection. the American Petroleum Use only an oil that meets GM Institute Certified For Gasoline Standard GM6094M. 5-14 Service and Appearance Care

Engine oil system flushes are not the oil life system might not indicate changed prior to a CHANGE recommended and could cause that an oil change is necessary ENGINE OIL SOON message being engine damage not covered by the for over a year. However, the engine turned on, reset the system. vehicle warranty. oil and filter must be changed at To reset the Engine Oil Life System: least once a year and at this Engine Oil Life System time the system must be reset. Your 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, dealer/retailer has trained service with the engine off. When to Change Engine Oil people who will perform this 2. Press the vehicle information This vehicle has a computer system work using genuine parts and reset button until OIL LIFE that indicates when to change the the system. It is also important REMAINING displays. engine oil and filter. This is based on to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. 3. Press and hold the set/reset engine revolutions and engine button until 100% is displayed. temperature, and not on mileage. If the system is ever reset Three chimes sound and Based on driving conditions, accidentally, the oil must be the CHANGE ENGINE OIL the mileage at which an oil change changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) SOON message goes off. is indicated can vary considerably. since the last oil change. For the oil life system to work Remember to reset the oil life 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. properly, the system must be reset system whenever the oil is changed. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON every time the oil is changed. message comes back on when How to Reset the Engine Oil the vehicle is started, the engine oil When the system has calculated Life System that oil life has been diminished, it life system has not reset. Repeat indicates that an oil change is The Engine Oil Life System the procedure. necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE calculates when to change the OIL SOON message comes engine oil and filter based on vehicle on. Change the oil as soon as use. Whenever the oil is changed, possible within the next 600 miles reset the system so it can calculate (1 000 km). It is possible that, if when the next oil change is required. driving under the best conditions, If a situation occurs where the oil is Service and Appearance Care 5-15

What to Do with Used Oil Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter: Used engine oil contains certain When to Inspect the Engine elements that can be unhealthy for Air Cleaner/Filter your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the your skin for very long. Clean Maintenance II intervals and replace your skin and nails with soap and it at the first oil change after each water, or a good hand cleaner. 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. Wash or properly dispose of clothing See Scheduled Maintenance or rags containing used engine on page 6-3 for more information. If oil. See the manufacturer’s warnings you are driving in dusty/dirty about the use and disposal of oil conditions, inspect the filter at each products. engine oil change. Used oil can be a threat to the See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-10 for the location of environment. If you change your own 1. Loosen the screws that hold the the engine air cleaner/filter. oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the cover on. filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring How to Inspect the Engine Air 2. Disconnect the electrical it on the ground, into sewers, or into Cleaner/Filter connector. streams or bodies of water. Recycle To inspect the air cleaner/filter, 3. Lift off the cover. it by taking it to a place that collects remove the filter from the vehicle 4. Remove the engine air used oil. and lightly shake the filter (away cleaner/filter element and any from vehicle) to release loose dust loose debris that may be found in and dirt. If the filter remains the air cleaner base. caked with dirt, a new filter is required. 5. Inspect or replace the air filter element. 5-16 Service and Appearance Care

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to Automatic Transmission Notice: Use of the incorrect reinstall the cover and reconnect automatic transmission fluid may the electrical connector. Fluid damage the vehicle, and the It is not necessary to check the damages may not be covered by { CAUTION transmission fluid level. A the vehicle’s warranty. Always transmission fluid leak is the only use the automatic transmission Operating the engine with the air reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, fluid listed in Recommended cleaner/filter off can cause you or take the vehicle to the dealer/retailer Fluids and Lubricants on and have it repaired as soon as page 6-11. others to be burned. The air possible. cleaner not only cleans the air; it The transmission fluid will not reach helps to stop flames if the engine Change the fluid at the intervals the end of the dipstick unless the backfires. If it is not there and the listed in Additional Required transmission is at operating engine backfires, you could be Services on page 6-5, and be sure temperature. If you need to check the burned. Do not drive with it off, and to use the transmission fluid transmission fluid level, please take be careful working on the engine listed in Recommended Fluids and the vehicle to your dealer/retailer. with the air cleaner/filter off. Lubricants on page 6-11.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into the engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving. Service and Appearance Care 5-17

Cooling System Notice: Using coolant other than { CAUTION DEX-COOL® can cause premature The cooling system allows the engine, heater core, or radiator engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan corrosion. In addition, the engine working temperature. under the hood can start up even coolant could require changing when the engine is not running sooner, at 30,000 miles and can cause injury. Keep (50 000 km) or 24 months, hands, clothing, and tools away whichever occurs ﬁrst. Any from any underhood electric fan. repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) { CAUTION coolant in the vehicle.

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it B. Radiator Pressure Cap could lose all coolant. That could C. Engine Cooling Fans cause an engine ﬁre, and you could be burned. Get any leak ﬁxed before you drive the vehicle. 5-18 Service and Appearance Care

Engine Coolant What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL The cooling system in the vehicle is coolant. If using this mixture, nothing ® { CAUTION filled with DEX-COOL engine else needs to be added. This coolant. The coolant is designed to mixture: remain in the vehicle for five years Adding only plain water to the or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), cooling system can be dangerous. • Gives freezing protection down to − − whichever occurs first. Plain water, or some other liquid 34°F ( 37°C), outside such as alcohol, can boil before temperature. The following explains the cooling the proper coolant mixture will. system and how to check and add • Gives boiling protection up to The vehicle’s coolant warning 265°F (129°C), engine coolant when it is low. If there is a system is set for the proper problem with engine overheating, temperature. coolant mixture. With plain water see Engine Overheating on • Protects against rust and or the wrong mixture, the engine page 5-22. corrosion. could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. The • Will not damage aluminum parts. engine could catch fire and you or • Helps keep the proper engine others could be burned. Use a temperature. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant. Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and other parts. Service and Appearance Care 5-19

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or cool before this is done. See Engine How to Add Coolant to the additives are used in the Coolant on page 5-18 for more Recovery Tank vehicle’s cooling system, the information. vehicle could be damaged. Use { only the proper mixture of CAUTION the engine coolant listed in this You can be burned if you spill manual for the cooling system. coolant on hot engine parts. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11 for Coolant contains ethylene glycol more information. and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill The coolant recovery tank cap has coolant on a hot engine. Checking Coolant this symbol on it. The vehicle must be on a level When the engine is cold, the surface when checking the coolant Notice: This vehicle has a coolant level should be at or above level. speciﬁc coolant ﬁll procedure. the FULL COLD line marked on Failure to follow this procedure Check to see if coolant is visible in the recovery tank. could cause the engine to the coolant recovery tank. If the When the engine is hot, the level overheat and be severely coolant inside the coolant recovery could be higher than the FULL damaged. tank is boiling, do not do anything COLD line. If the coolant is below else until it cools down. If coolant is If coolant is needed, add the proper the FULL COLD line when the ® visible but the coolant level is not DEX-COOL coolant mixture at engine is hot, there could be a leak at or above the FULL COLD the coolant recovery tank. in the cooling system. mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL If the coolant is low, add the coolant at the coolant recovery tank, coolant or take the vehicle to a but be sure the cooling system is dealer/retailer for service. 5-20 Service and Appearance Care

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator { CAUTION Steam and scalding liquids from a { CAUTION hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are An electric engine cooling fan under pressure, and if you turn the under the hood can start up even surge tank pressure cap — even a when the engine is not running little — they can come out at high and can cause injury. Keep speed. Never turn the cap when hands, clothing, and tools away the cooling system, including the from any underhood electric fan. surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool 1. Detach fasteners and lift off if you ever have to turn the the panel that covers the pressure cap. radiator cap. 2. Remove the radiator pressure If coolant is needed, add the proper cap when the cooling system, mixture directly to the radiator, including the upper radiator hose, but be sure the cooling system is is no longer hot. cool before this is done. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left in the system. Service and Appearance Care 5-21

3. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it. 4. Fill the radiator to the base of the ﬁller neck with the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture.

5. When coolant begins to ﬂow out 6. Fill the coolant recovery tank to 8. Start the engine and let it run of the ﬁller neck, reinstall the the FULL COLD mark. until the upper radiator hose pressure cap. Be sure to secure feels warm. Any time during this it tightly. 7. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank but leave the procedure, watch out for the radiator pressure cap off. engine cooling fan(s). 5-22 Service and Appearance Care

9. If the coolant level inside the Engine Overheating If you do decide to lift the hood, radiator filler neck is low, add make sure the vehicle is parked on more of the proper DEX-COOL The vehicle has several indicators a level surface. coolant mixture through the to warn of engine overheating. Then check to see if the engine filler neck until the level is back There is an engine coolant cooling fans are running. If the up to the base of the filler temperature gage on the instrument engine is overheating, both fans neck. Replace the pressure cap. panel cluster. See Engine Coolant should be running. If they are Be sure to secure it tightly. Temperature Gage on page 3-36. not, do not continue to run the Notice: If the pressure cap is not The vehicle may also display engine and have the vehicle tightly installed, coolant loss an ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE serviced. and possible engine damage may ENGINE and ENGINE Notice: Engine damage from occur. Be sure the cap is OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE running the engine without properly and tightly secured. message in the Driver Information coolant is not covered by the Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings warranty. and Messages on page 3-50. Notice: If the engine catches fire You may decide not to lift the hood while driving with no coolant, when this warning appears, but the vehicle can be badly instead get service help right away. damaged. The costly repairs See Roadside Assistance Program would not be covered by on page 7-6. the vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-24 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. Service and Appearance Care 5-23

If Steam Is Coming From The If No Steam Is Coming From If the temperature overheat gage is Engine Compartment The Engine Compartment no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer { If an engine overheat warning is displays, the vehicle can be driven. CAUTION displayed but no steam can be seen Continue to drive the vehicle or heard, the problem may not be slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a Steam from an overheated engine too serious. Sometimes the safe vehicle distance from the car in can burn you badly, even if you engine can get a little too hot when front of you. If the warning does just open the hood. Stay away the vehicle: not come back on, continue to drive from the engine if you see or hear • Climbs a long hill on a hot day. normally. steam coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the • Stops after high-speed driving. If the warning continues, pull vehicle until it cools down. Wait • Idles for long periods in traffic. over, stop, and park the vehicle right away. until there is no sign of steam or • Tows a trailer. coolant before you open the hood. If there is no sign of steam, idle the If the overheat warning is displayed engine for three minutes while If you keep driving when the with no sign of steam: vehicles engine is overheated, the parked. If the warning is still liquids in it can catch ﬁre. You or 1. Turn the air conditioning off. displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated others could be badly burned. 2. Turn the heater on to the highest Engine Protection Operating Stop the engine if it overheats, temperature and to the highest Mode” next in this section. and get out of the vehicle until the fan speed. Open the windows as engine is cool. necessary. See Overheated Engine 3. If in a traffic jam, shift to Protection Operating Mode on N (Neutral), otherwise, shift page 5-24 for information on to the highest gear while driving to a safe place in an driving—D(Drive) or L (Low). emergency. 5-24 Service and Appearance Care

Overheated Notice: After driving in the When to Check Power Engine Protection overheated engine protection Steering Fluid operating mode, to avoid engine Operating Mode damage, allow the engine to It is not necessary to regularly check cool before attempting any repair. power steering fluid unless you This emergency operating mode lets suspect there is a leak in the system the vehicle be driven to a safe The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the cause or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid place in an emergency situation. If loss in this system could indicate a an overheated engine condition of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil life system. See problem. Have the system inspected exists, an overheat protection mode and repaired. which alternates firing groups of Engine Oil on page 5-12. cylinders helps prevent engine How to Check Power Steering damage. In this mode, there is a Power Steering Fluid Fluid significant loss in power and engine To check the power steering fluid: performance. The temperature gage indicates an overheat condition 1. Turn the key off and let the engine exists. Driving extended distances compartment cool down. and/or towing a trailer in the 2. Remove engine oil fill cap. overheat protection mode should be 3. Slide engine cover rearward and avoided. lift to remove. The power steering fluid reservoir is 4. Wipe the cap and the top of the located toward the front of the reservoir clean. engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See 5. Unscrew the cap and wipe the Engine Compartment Overview dipstick with a clean rag. on page 5-10 for reservoir location. 6. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. 7. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. Service and Appearance Care 5-25

The fluid level should be somewhere may fall below freezing, use a fluid Notice: between MAX and MIN line on the that has sufficient protection • When using concentrated dipstick in room temperature. If the against freezing. washer fluid, follow the fluid is on or below MIN line, you Adding Washer Fluid manufacturer’s instructions for should add fluid close to MAX Line. adding water. When the windshield washer fluid What to Use reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID • Do not mix water with To determine what kind of fluid to LOW ADD FLUID message will ready-to-use washer fluid. use, see Recommended Fluids and be displayed on the Driver Water can cause the solution Lubricants on page 6-11. Always Information Center (DIC). See DIC to freeze and damage your use the proper fluid. Warnings and Messages on washer fluid tank and other page 3-50 for more information. parts of the washer system. Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid Also, water does not clean as may damage the vehicle and well as washer fluid. the damages may not be covered • Fill the washer fluid tank only by the vehicle’s warranty. three-quarters full when it is Always use the correct fluid very cold. This allows for fluid listed in Recommended Fluids expansion if freezing occurs, and Lubricants on page 6-11. which could damage the tank if it is completely full. Windshield Washer Fluid Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until • Do not use engine coolant What to Use the tank is full. See Engine (antifreeze) in your windshield Compartment Overview on washer. It can damage the When adding windshield washer page 5-10 for reservoir location. vehicle’s windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the system and paint. manufacturer’s instructions before use. If the vehicle will be operating in an area where the temperature 5-26 Service and Appearance Care

Brakes • A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic When the brake fluid falls to a low system can also cause a low fluid level, the brake warning light comes Brake Fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic on. See Brake System Warning system fixed, since a leak means Light on page 3-34. that sooner or later the brakes will not work well. What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding from a sealed container. See fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is Recommended Fluids and added when the linings are worn, Lubricants on page 6-11. there will be too much fluid when new The brake master cylinder reservoir brake linings are installed. Add or Always clean the brake fluid is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. remove brake fluid, as necessary, reservoir cap and the area around See Engine Compartment Overview only when work is done on the brake the cap before removing it. This on page 5-10 for the location of hydraulic system. helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir. the reservoir. There are only two reasons why the { CAUTION brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down: If too much brake fluid is added, it • The brake fluid level goes down can spill on the engine and burn, because of normal brake lining if the engine is hot enough. You wear. When new linings are or others could be burned, and installed, the fluid level goes the vehicle could be damaged. back up. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system. Service and Appearance Care 5-27

• If brake fluid is spilled on the Notice: Continuing to drive with { CAUTION vehicle’s painted surfaces, the worn-out brake pads could paint finish can be damaged. Be result in costly brake repair. With the wrong kind of fluid in the careful not to spill brake fluid brake hydraulic system, the Some driving conditions or climates on the vehicle. If you do, wash it can cause a brake squeal when brakes might not work well. This off immediately. See Washing could cause a crash. Always use the brakes are first applied or lightly Your Vehicle on page 5-83. applied. This does not mean the proper brake fluid. Brake Wear something is wrong with the brakes. Notice: This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent • Using the wrong fluid can brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched brake pulsation. When tires are badly damage brake hydraulic rotated, inspect brake pads for wear system parts. For example, warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are and evenly tighten wheel nuts in just a few drops of the proper sequence to torque mineral-based oil, such as needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the specifications in Capacities and engine oil, in the brake Specifications on page 5-94. hydraulic system can damage vehicle is moving, except when brake hydraulic system applying the brake pedal firmly. Brake linings should always be parts so badly that they will replaced as complete axle sets. have to be replaced. Do not let { CAUTION someone put in the wrong Brake Pedal Travel kind of fluid. The brake wear warning sound See your dealer/retailer if the brake means that soon the brakes will pedal does not return to normal not work well. That could lead to height, or if there is a rapid increase an accident. When the brake wear in pedal travel. This could be a warning sound is heard, have the sign that brake service might vehicle serviced. be required. 5-28 Service and Appearance Care

Brake Adjustment expected can change in many other Vehicle Storage ways if the wrong replacement Every time the brakes are applied, brake parts are installed. with or without the vehicle { CAUTION moving, the brakes adjust for wear. Battery Batteries have acid that can Replacing Brake System This vehicle has a maintenance free burn you and gas that can Parts battery. When it is time for a new explode. You can be badly hurt if The braking system on a vehicle is battery, see your dealer/retailer you are not careful. See Jump complex. Its many parts have to for one that has the replacement Starting on page 5-29 for tips on be of top quality and work well number shown on the original working around a battery without together if the vehicle is to have battery’s label. getting hurt. really good braking. The vehicle was For battery replacement, see your designed and tested with top-quality dealer/retailer or the service manual. Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is brake parts. When parts of the To purchase a service manual, driven infrequently, remove the braking system are replaced — for − see Service Publications Ordering black, negative ( ) cable from the example, when the brake linings Information on page 7-13. battery. This helps keep the battery wear down and new ones are from running down. installed — be sure to get new Warning: Battery posts, terminals, approved replacement parts. If this and related accessories contain Extended Storage: For extended is not done, the brakes might lead and lead compounds, storage of the vehicle, remove − not work properly. For example, if chemicals known to the State of the black, negative ( ) cable from someone puts in brake linings California to cause cancer and the battery or use a battery that are wrong for the vehicle, the reproductive harm. Wash hands trickle charger. This helps maintain balance between the front and after handling. the charge of the battery over rear brakes can change — for the an extended period of time. worse. The braking performance Service and Appearance Care 5-29

Jump Starting Trying to start the vehicle by transmission in P (Park) or a pushing or pulling it will not work, manual transmission in Neutral If the vehicle’s battery has run and it could damage the vehicle. before setting the parking brake. down, you may want to use another If one of the vehicles is a vehicle and some jumper cables 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the transfer case is not in Neutral. the following steps to do it safely. a negative ground system. Notice: If the other vehicle’s Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories on during { CAUTION system is not a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs Batteries can hurt you. They can vehicles can be damaged. Only would not be covered by the be dangerous because: use vehicles with 12-volt systems warranty. Always turn off • They contain acid that can with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle. the radio and other accessories burn you. when jump starting the vehicle. They contain gas that can 2. Get the vehicles close enough so • 3. Turn off the ignition on both explode or ignite. the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not vehicles. Unplug unnecessary • They contain enough accessories plugged into the electricity to burn you. touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection cigarette lighter or the accessory If you do not follow these steps you do not want. You would not power outlets. Turn off the radio exactly, some or all of these be able to start your vehicle, and and all lamps that are not needed. things can hurt you. the bad grounding could damage This will avoid sparks and help the electrical systems. save both batteries. And it could save the radio! Notice: Ignoring these steps To avoid the possibility of the could result in costly damage to vehicles rolling, set the parking the vehicle that would not be brake ﬁrmly on both vehicles covered by the warranty. involved in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic 5-30 Service and Appearance Care

4. Open the hoods and locate the 5. Check that the jumper cables do positive (+) and negative (−) CAUTION (Continued) not have loose or missing terminal locations on the other insulation. If they do, you could vehicle. Your vehicle has a has filler caps, be sure the right get a shock. The vehicles remote positive (+) and a remote amount of fluid is there. If it is could be damaged too. − negative ( ) jump starting low, add water to take care of that Before you connect the cables, terminal. See Engine first. If you do not, explosive gas here are some basic things Compartment Overview on could be present. you should know. Positive (+) will page 5-10 for more information Battery fluid contains acid that go to positive (+) or to a on the terminal locations. can burn you. Do not get it on remote positive (+) terminal if the you. If you accidentally get it in vehicle has one. Negative (−) { CAUTION your eyes or on your skin, flush will go to a heavy, unpainted the place with water and get metal engine part or to a remote − Using a match near a battery can medical help immediately. negative ( ) terminal if the cause battery gas to explode. vehicle has one. People have been hurt doing this, Do not connect positive (+) to and some have been blinded. Use { CAUTION negative (−) or you will get a flashlight if you need more light. a short that would damage the Be sure the batteries have Fans or other moving engine battery and maybe other enough water. You do not need to parts can injure you badly. Keep parts too. And do not connect the negative (−) cable to add water to the ACDelco® your hands away from moving the negative (−) terminal on the battery (or batteries) installed in parts once the engine is running. dead battery because this your new vehicle. But if a battery can cause sparks. (Continued) Service and Appearance Care 5-31

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote negative (−) 6. Connect the red positive (+) 9. Connect the other end of the terminal on the vehicle with the − cable to the positive (+) terminal dead battery. negative ( ) cable at least of the dead battery. 18 inches (45 cm) away from the Use a remote positive (+) dead battery, but not near terminal if the vehicle has one. engine parts that move. 7. Do not let the other end touch The electrical connection is just metal. Connect it to the as good there, and the chance positive (+) terminal of the good of sparks getting back to the battery. Use a remote positive (+) battery is much less. terminal if the vehicle has one. Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal for this purpose. 5-32 Service and Appearance Care

10. Now start the vehicle with the To disconnect the jumper cables good battery and run the from both vehicles, do the following: engine for a while. 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) 11. Try to start the vehicle that had cable from the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not the dead battery. start after a few tries, it probably 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) needs service. cable from the vehicle with the Notice: If the jumper cables are good battery. connected or removed in the 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) wrong order, electrical shorting cable from the vehicle with the may occur and damage the good battery. vehicle. The repairs would not be Jumper Cable Removal covered by the vehicle warranty. 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) Always connect and remove A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine cable from the other vehicle. the jumper cables in the correct Part or Remote Negative (−) order, making sure that the cables Terminal do not touch each other or B. Good Battery or Remote other metal. Positive (+) and Remote Negative (−) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal Service and Appearance Care 5-33

All-Wheel Drive Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement It is recommended that the all-wheel Headlamp aim has been preset at For the proper type of replacement drive lubricants be checked and the factory and should need no bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs ﬁlled by the dealer/retailer. further adjustment. on page 5-35. When to Check Lubricant However, if your vehicle is damaged For any bulb changing procedure in a crash, the headlamp aim may not listed in this section, contact Refer to the Maintenance Schedule be affected. Aim adjustment to your dealer/retailer. to determine how often to check the low-beam headlamps may be the lubricant. See Scheduled necessary if oncoming drivers ﬂash Maintenance on page 6-3. their high-beam headlamps at you (for vertical aim). If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is recommended that you take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. 5-34 Service and Appearance Care

High Intensity Discharge Halogen Bulbs Taillamps, Turn Signal, (HID) Lighting Stoplamps and { CAUTION Sidemarker Lamps { CAUTION Halogen bulbs have pressurized The low beam high intensity gas inside and can burst if you discharge lighting system drop or scratch the bulb. You or operates at a very high voltage. If others could be injured. Be sure you try to service any of the to read and follow the instructions system components, you could be on the bulb package. seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed technician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you may A. Taillamp notice that the beam is a slightly B. Sidemarker Lamp different shade than it was originally. This is normal. To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-10 or Power Liftgate on page 2-11. 2. Remove the convenience net. Service and Appearance Care 5-35

3. Remove the three hex nuts License Plate Lamp 4. Install the new bulb. holding the taillamp assembly in To replace one of these bulbs: 5. Reverse steps1–3toreinstall place. the license plate lamp. 4. Pull out the taillamp assembly. 1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license plate lamps 5. Turn the bulb socket to the liftgate trim. Replacement Bulbs counterclockwise and pull it straight out to remove it. Bulb Exterior Lamp Number 6. Replace the old bulb with a new one. License Plate Lamp 194 Rear Sidemarker 7. Reverse steps 3 through 5 to Lamp 194 reinstall the taillamp assembly. Rear Turn Signal 7443 When reinstalling the taillamp and Taillamps (W21/5W) assembly, the plastic pin on the taillamp assembly must line For replacement bulbs not listed up and be inserted correctly into here, contact your dealer/retailer. the opening.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward through the lift gate trim opening. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 5-36 Service and Appearance Care

Windshield Windshield Wiper 3. Install the new wiper blade and make sure the wiper blade Replacement Blade Replacement locks into place. Your vehicle is equipped with an Windshield wiper blades should be For the proper size and type see acoustic windshield. If you ever have inspected for wear or cracking. Maintenance Replacement Parts on to have your windshield replaced See Scheduled Maintenance page 6-12. be sure to get an acoustic on page 6-3 for more information. windshield so you will continue to Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement blades come in have the beneﬁts an acoustic different types and are removed in To replace the backglass wiper windshield can provide. different ways. To replace the blade: wiper blade assembly: 1. Pull the wiper blade assembly 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the backglass. away from the windshield. The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle. 2. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, hold the wiper arm in position, and push the blade away from the wiper arm. 3. Replace the wiper blade. 4. Return the wiper arm and blade 2. Press the button in the middle of assembly to the rest position on the wiper arm connector and pull the glass. the wiper blade away from the arm connector. Service and Appearance Care 5-37

Tires CAUTION (Continued) CAUTION (Continued) Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a • Underinflated tires pose • Overinflated tires are more leading tire manufacturer. If you the same danger as likely to be cut, punctured, ever have questions about your overloaded tires. The or broken by a sudden tire warranty and where to obtain resulting accident could impact — such as when service, see your vehicle cause serious injury. you hit a pothole. Keep Warranty booklet for details. For Check all tires frequently tires at the recommended additional information refer to the to maintain the pressure. tire manufacturer. recommended pressure. • Worn, old tires can cause Tire pressure should be accidents. If the tire’s tread { CAUTION checked when your is badly worn, or if your vehicle’s tires are cold. vehicle’s tires have been Poorly maintained and See Inflation - Tire damaged, replace them. improperly used tires are Pressure on page 5-43. dangerous. (Continued) • Overloading your vehicle’s tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-16. (Continued) 5-38 Service and Appearance Care

Tire Sidewall Labeling See the “Tire Size” illustration The TIN shows the manufacturer later in this section for more and plant code, tire size, and Useful information about a tire is detail. date the tire was manufactured. molded into its sidewall. The The TIN is molded onto both examples below show a typical (B) TPC Spec (Tire sides of the tire, although passenger vehicle tire and a Performance Criteria only one side may have the date compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original of manufacture. equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance (E) Tire Ply Material: The type criteria have a TPC specification of cord and number of plies code molded onto the sidewall. in the sidewall and under GM’s TPC specifications the tread. meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire (C) DOT (Department of manufacturers are required to Transportation): The grade tires based on three Department of Transportation performance factors: treadwear, (DOT) code indicates that the tire traction, and temperature is in compliance with the U.S. resistance. For more information Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Department of Transportation see Uniform Tire Quality Example Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Grading on page 5-54. (D) Tire Identification Number (G) Maximum Cold Inflation (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a (TIN): The letters and numbers Load Limit: Maximum load combination of letters and following DOT (Department that can be carried and the numbers used to define a of Transportation) code is the maximum pressure needed to particular tire’s width, height, Tire Identification Number (TIN). support that load. aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. Service and Appearance Care 5-39

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type (E) Tire Inflation: The of cord and number of plies temporary use tire or compact in the sidewall and under spare tire should be inflated the tread. to 60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tire (C) Tire Identification Number pressure and inflation see (TIN): The letters and numbers Inflation - Tire Pressure on following the DOT (Department page 5-43. of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number (F) Tire Size : A combination of (TIN). The TIN shows the letters and numbers define a manufacturer and plant code, tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, tire size, and date the tire construction type, and service Compact Spare Tire Example was manufactured. The TIN is description. The letter T as molded onto both sides of the first character in the tire size (A) Temporary Use Only: The the tire, although only one side means the tire is for temporary compact spare tire or temporary may have the date of use only. use tire has a tread life of manufacture. approximately 3,000 miles (G) TPC Spec (Tire (5 000 km) and should not be (D) Maximum Cold Inflation Performance Criteria driven at speeds over 65 mph Load Limit: Maximum load that Specification): Original (105 km/h). The compact can be carried and the equipment tires designed to spare tire is for emergency use maximum pressure needed to GM’s specific tire performance when a regular road tire has support that load. criteria have a TPC specification lost air and gone flat. If code molded onto the sidewall. your vehicle has a compact GM’s TPC specifications spare tire, see Compact Spare meet or exceed all federal safety Tire on page 5-79 and If a guidelines. Tire Goes Flat on page 5-57. 5-40 Service and Appearance Care

Tire Size For example, if the tire size Tire Terminology and aspect ratio is 60, as shown in Definitions The following illustration shows item C of the illustration, it would an example of a typical mean that the tire’s sidewall is passenger vehicle tire size. Air Pressure: The amount of air 60 percent as high as it is wide. inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. (D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to indicate the type Air pressure is expressed in of ply construction in the tire. The pounds per square inch (psi) or letter R means radial ply kilopascal (kPa). construction; the letter D means Accessory Weight: This means diagonal or bias ply construction; the combined weight of optional and the letter B means (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: accessories. Some examples of The United States version of a belted-bias ply construction. optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power metric tire sizing system. The (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of letter P as the first character in the wheel in inches. steering, power brakes, power the tire size means a passenger windows, power seats, and air vehicle tire engineered to (F) Service Description: These conditioning. characters represent the load standards set by the U.S. Tire Aspect Ratio: The relationship and Rim Association. index and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the of a tire’s height to its width. (B) Tire Width: The three-digit load carry capacity a tire is Belt: A rubber coated layer of number indicates the tire certified to carry. The speed cords that is located between the section width in millimeters from rating is the maximum speed a plies and the tread. Cords may sidewall to sidewall. tire is certified to carry a load. be made from steel or other (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit reinforcing materials. number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. Service and Appearance Care 5-41

Bead: The tire bead contains DOT Markings: A code molded Intended Outboard Sidewall: steel wires wrapped by steel into the sidewall of a tire The side of an asymmetrical cords that hold the tire onto signifying that the tire is in tire, that must always face the rim. compliance with the U.S. outward when mounted on a Department of Transportation vehicle. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire (DOT) motor vehicle safety in which the plies are laid at standards. The DOT code Kilopascal (kPa): The metric alternate angles less than includes the Tire Identification unit for air pressure. 90 degrees to the centerline of Number (TIN), an alphanumeric the tread. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A designator which can also tire used on light duty trucks Cold Tire Pressure: The identify the tire manufacturer, and some multipurpose amount of air pressure in a tire, production plant, brand, and date passenger vehicles. measured in pounds per square of production. Load Index: An assigned inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight before a tire has built up heat number ranging from 1 to 279 Rating. See Loading the Vehicle that corresponds to the load from driving. See Inflation - Tire on page 4-16. Pressure on page 5-43. carrying capacity of a tire. GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: Curb Weight: The weight of a Rating for the front axle. See motor vehicle with standard The maximum air pressure Loading the Vehicle on to which a cold tire can and optional equipment including page 4-16. the maximum capacity of fuel, be inflated. The maximum air oil, and coolant, but without GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight pressure is molded onto the passengers and cargo. Rating for the rear axle. See sidewall. Loading the Vehicle on Maximum Load Rating: The page 4-16. load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. 5-42 Service and Appearance Care

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A Traction: The friction between Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and the tire and the road surface. weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and The amount of grip provided. vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles. production options weight. Tread: The portion of a tire that Recommended Inflation comes into contact with the road. Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer’s recommended Treadwear Indicators: is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as Narrow bands, sometimes called 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading shown on the tire placard. See wear bars, that show across the Vehicle on page 4-16. Inflation - Tire Pressure on the tread of a tire when only page 5-43 and Loading 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread Occupant Distribution: the Vehicle on page 4-16. remains. See When It Is Time Designated seating positions. for New Tires on page 5-51. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Outward Facing Sidewall: The tire in which the ply cords UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality side of an asymmetrical tire that that extend to the beads are laid Grading Standards): A tire has a particular side that faces at 90 degrees to the centerline information system that provides outward when mounted on a of the tread. consumers with ratings for a vehicle. The side of the tire that tire’s traction, temperature, contains a whitewall, bears white Rim: A metal support for a tire and treadwear. Ratings are lettering, or bears manufacturer, and upon which the tire determined by tire manufacturers brand, and/or model name beads are seated. using government testing molding that is higher or deeper procedures. The ratings are than the same moldings on the Sidewall: The portion of a tire molded into the sidewall of the other sidewall of the tire. between the tread and the bead. tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Speed Rating: An alphanumeric Grading on page 5-54. code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Service and Appearance Care 5-43

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Notice: Do not let anyone tell A vehicle specific Tire and The number of designated you that under-inflation or Loading Information label is seating positions multiplied by over-inflation is all right. It is attached to your vehicle. 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the not. If your tires do not This label shows your vehicle’s rated cargo load. See Loading have enough air original equipment tires and the Vehicle on page 4-16. (under-inflation), you can get the correct inflation pressures for the following: your tires when they are cold. Vehicle Maximum Load on the • Too much flexing The recommended cold tire Tire: Load on an individual inflation pressure, shown on the tire due to curb weight, • Too much heat label, is the minimum amount accessory weight, occupant • Tire overloading of air pressure needed to weight, and cargo weight. • Premature or irregular wear support your vehicle’s maximum Vehicle Placard: A label • Poor handling load carrying capacity. permanently attached to a • Reduced fuel economy For additional information vehicle showing the vehicle’s regarding how much weight your capacity weight and the original If your tires have too much air vehicle can carry, and an equipment tire size and (over-inflation), you can get example of the Tire and Loading recommended inflation pressure. the following: Information label, see Loading See “Tire and Loading • Unusual wear the Vehicle on page 4-16. How Information Label” under • Poor handling you load your vehicle affects Loading the Vehicle on vehicle handling and ride page 4-16. • Rough ride comfort. Never load your vehicle • Needless damage from road with more weight than it was Inflation - Tire Pressure hazards designed to carry. Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively. 5-44 Service and Appearance Care

When to Check Remove the valve cap from the Tire Pressure Monitor tire valve stem. Press the System Check your tires once a month tire gage firmly onto the valve to or more. Do not forget to get a pressure measurement. The Tire Pressure Monitor System check the compact spare tire, if If the cold tire inflation pressure (TPMS) uses radio and sensor the vehicle has one. It should matches the recommended technology to check tire pressure be at 60 psi (420 kPa). For pressure on the Tire and levels. The TPMS sensors monitor additional information regarding Loading Information label, no the air pressure in your vehicle’s the compact spare tire, see further adjustment is necessary. tires and transmit tire pressure Compact Spare Tire on If the inflation pressure is readings to a receiver located in the page 5-79. low, add air until you reach the vehicle. How to Check recommended amount. Each tire, including the spare Use a good quality pocket-type If you overfill the tire, release air (if provided), should be checked gage to check tire pressure. You by pushing on the metal stem in monthly when cold and inflated to cannot tell if your tires are the center of the tire valve. the inflation pressure recommended properly inflated simply by Re-check the tire pressure with by the vehicle manufacturer on looking at them. Radial tires may the tire gage. the vehicle placard or tire inflation look properly inflated even when pressure label. (If your vehicle Be sure to put the valve caps has tires of a different size than the they are under-inflated. Check back on the valve stems. the tire’s inflation pressure when size indicated on the vehicle They help prevent leaks by placard or tire inflation pressure the tires are cold. Cold means keeping out dirt and moisture. your vehicle has been sitting for label, you should determine at least three hours or driven no the proper tire inflation pressure for more than 1 mile (1.6 km). those tires.) Service and Appearance Care 5-45

As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been equipped alternate tires and wheels allow the vehicle has been equipped with with a TPMS malfunction indicator to TPMS to continue to function a tire pressure monitoring system indicate when the system is not properly. (TPMS) that illuminates a low operating properly. The TPMS See Tire Pressure Monitor tire pressure telltale when one or malfunction indicator is combined Operation on page 5-46 for more of your tires is significantly with the low tire pressure telltale. additional information. under-inflated. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for Accordingly, when the low tire Federal Communications approximately one minute and then pressure telltale illuminates, you Commission (FCC) and remain continuously illuminated. This should stop and check your tires as Industry and Science Canada sequence will continue upon soon as possible, and inflate them to subsequent vehicle start-ups as long The Tire Pressure Monitor System the proper pressure. Driving on a as the malfunction exists. (TPMS) operates on a radio significantly under-inflated tire frequency and complies with Part 15 causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is of the FCC Rules. Operation is lead to tire failure. Under-inflation illuminated, the system may not be subject to the following two also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire conditions: tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS vehicle’s handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety 1. This device may not cause ability. of reasons, including the installation harmful interference. of replacement or alternate tires or 2. This device must accept any Please note that the TPMS is wheels on the vehicle that prevent interference received, including not a substitute for proper tire the TPMS from functioning properly. interference that may cause maintenance, and it is the driver’s Always check the TPMS malfunction undesired operation. responsibility to maintain correct tire telltale after replacing one or more pressure, even if under-inflation has tires or wheels on your vehicle to not reached the level to trigger ensure that the replacement or illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. 5-46 Service and Appearance Care

Vehicles with TPMS operate on a Tire Pressure Monitor At the same time a message to radio frequency and comply check the pressure in a specific tire with RSS-210 of Industry and Operation appears on the Driver Information Science Canada. Operation is This vehicle may have a Tire Center (DIC) display. The low subject to the following two Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). tire pressure warning light and the conditions: The TPMS is designed to warn DIC warning message come on 1. This device may not cause the driver when a low tire pressure at each ignition cycle until the tires interference. condition exists. TPMS sensors are inflated to the correct inflation are mounted onto each tire pressure. Using the DIC, tire 2. This device must accept any and wheel assembly, excluding the pressure levels can be viewed by interference received, including spare tire and wheel assembly, the driver. For additional information interference that may cause if the vehicle has one. The TPMS and details about the DIC operation undesired operation of the sensors monitor the air pressure in and displays see DIC Operation device. the vehicle’s tires and transmits and Displays on page 3-43 and DIC Changes or modifications to the tire pressure readings to Warnings and Messages on this system by other than an a receiver located in the vehicle. page 3-50. authorized service facility could The low tire pressure warning light void authorization to use this may come on in cool weather equipment. when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and need to be inflated When a low tire pressure condition is to the proper pressure. detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument panel cluster. Service and Appearance Care 5-47

A Tire and Loading Information Always use the GM approved tire the conditions that can cause the label, attached to your vehicle, sealant available through your malfunction light and DIC message shows the size of your vehicle’s dealer/retailer. to come on are: original equipment tires and Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits • One of the road tires has been the correct inflation pressure for use a GM approved liquid tire replaced with the spare tire, if your vehicle’s tires when they sealant. Using non-approved tire your vehicle has one. The spare are cold. See Loading the Vehicle sealants could damage the TPMS tire does not have a TPMS on page 4-16, for an example of the sensors. See Tire Sealant and sensor. The TPMS malfunction Tire and Loading Information Compressor Kit on page 5-59 for light and DIC message should go label and its location on your information regarding the inflator kit off once you re-install the road tire vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire materials and instructions. containing the TPMS sensor. Pressure on page 5-43. • The TPMS sensor matching Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you TPMS Malfunction Light and Message process was started but not about a low tire pressure condition completed or not completed but it does not replace normal The TPMS will not function properly if successfully after rotating the tire maintenance. See Tire one or more of the TPMS sensors vehicle’s tires. The DIC message Inspection and Rotation on are missing or inoperable. When the and TPMS malfunction light page 5-49 and Tires on page 5-37. system detects a malfunction, the should go off once the TPMS Notice: Using non-approved low tire warning light flashes for sensor matching process is tire sealants could damage about one minute and then stays on performed successfully. See the Tire Pressure Monitor System for the remainder of the ignition “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” (TPMS) sensors. TPMS sensor cycle. A DIC warning message is later in this section. damage caused by using an also displayed. The low tire warning incorrect tire sealant is not light and DIC warning message covered by the vehicle warranty. come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of 5-48 Service and Appearance Care

• One or more TPMS sensors If the TPMS is not functioning it The TPMS sensors can also be are missing or damaged. cannot detect or signal a low tire matched to each tire/wheel position The DIC message and the TPMS condition. See your dealer/retailer for by increasing or decreasing the malfunction light should go off service if the TPMS malfunction light tire’s air pressure. If increasing the when the TPMS sensors are and DIC message comes on and tire’s air pressure, do not exceed installed and the sensor stays on. the maximum inflation pressure matching process is performed indicated on the tire’s sidewall. successfully. See your dealer/ TPMS Sensor Matching Process To decrease air-pressure out of a retailer for service. tire you can use the pointed • Replacement tires or wheels do Each TPMS sensor has a unique end of the valve cap, a pencil-style not match your vehicle’s original identification code. Any time air pressure gage, or a key. equipment tires or wheels. Tires you rotate your vehicle’s tires or You have two minutes to match and wheels other than those replace one or more of the TPMS the first tire/wheel position, and recommended for your vehicle sensors, the identification codes will five minutes overall to match all could prevent the TPMS from need to be matched to the new four tire/wheel positions. If it takes functioning properly. See Buying tire/wheel position. The sensors are longer than two minutes, to New Tires on page 5-51. matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following order: driver side match the first tire and wheel, or • Operating electronic devices or front tire, passenger side front tire, more than five minutes to match all being near facilities using radio passenger side rear tire, and four tire and wheel positions the wave frequencies similar to the driver side rear tire using a TPMS matching process stops and TPMS could cause the TPMS diagnostic tool. See your you need to start over. sensors to malfunction. dealer/retailer for service. Service and Appearance Care 5-49

The TPMS sensor matching process 6. Proceed to the passenger side Tire Inspection and is outlined below: front tire, and repeat the Rotation 1. Set the parking brake. procedure in Step 5. 7. Proceed to the passenger side We recommend that you 2. Turn the ignition switch to regularly inspect the vehicle’s ON/RUN with the engine off. rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5. tires, including the spare 3. Press the Remote Keyless tire, if the vehicle has one, for Entry (RKE) transmitter’s LOCK 8. Proceed to the driver side rear signs of wear or damage. and UNLOCK buttons at the tire, and repeat the procedure See When It Is Time for New same time for approximately in Step 5. The horn sounds Tires on page 5-51 for more five seconds. The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor information. identification code has been twice to signal the receiver is in Tires should be rotated relearn mode and TIRE matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS sensor every 5,000 to 8,000 miles LEARNING ACTIVE message (8 000 to 13 000 km). See displays on the DIC screen. matching process is no longer active. The TIRE LEARNING Scheduled Maintenance on 4. Start with the driver side ACTIVE message on the page 6-3. front tire. DIC display screen goes off. The purpose of a regular tire 5. Remove the valve cap from the 9. Turn the ignition switch to rotation is to achieve a uniform valve cap stem. Activate the LOCK/OFF. wear for all tires on the TPMS sensor by increasing or vehicle. This will ensure that the decreasing the tire’s air pressure 10. Set all four tires to the vehicle continues to perform for five seconds, or until a horn recommended air pressure level most like it did when the chirp sounds. The horn chirp, as indicated on the Tire and tires were new. which may take up to 30 seconds Loading Information label. to sound, confirms that the sensor 11. Put the valve caps back on the identification code has been valve stems. matched to this tire and wheel position. 5-50 Service and Appearance Care

Any time you notice unusual After the tires have been rotated, wear, rotate the tires as soon as adjust the front and rear inflation CAUTION (Continued) possible and check wheel pressures as shown on the Tire alignment. Also check for and Loading Information label. The wheel could come off and damaged tires or wheels. See See Inflation - Tire Pressure on cause an accident. When you When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-43 and Loading the change a wheel, remove any page 5-51 and Wheel Vehicle on page 4-16. rust or dirt from places where Replacement on page 5-55. the wheel attaches to the Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor vehicle. In an emergency, you System. See Tire Pressure can use a cloth or a paper Monitor Operation on page 5-46. towel to do this; but be sure to Make certain that all wheel use a scraper or wire brush nuts are properly tightened. See later, if needed, to get all the “Wheel Nut Torque” under rust or dirt off. See Changing Capacities and Specifications a Flat Tire on page 5-67. on page 5-94. Make sure the spare tire, if the { CAUTION vehicle has one, is stored securely. Push, pull, and then Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on try to rotate or turn the tire. the parts to which it is If it moves, tighten the cable. When rotating the vehicle’s tires, fastened, can make wheel See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire always use the correct rotation nuts become loose after time. and Tools on page 5-76. pattern shown here. (Continued) If the vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not include it in the tire rotation. Service and Appearance Care 5-51

When It Is Time for New You need new tires if any of the they degrade due to age. If you are Tires following statements are true: unsure about the need to replace • You can see the indicators at the tires as they get older, consult Various factors, such as three or more places around the tire manufacturer for more maintenance, temperatures, driving the tire. information. speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions influence when you need • You can see cord or fabric Buying New Tires new tires. showing through the tire’s rubber. • The tread or sidewall is cracked, GM has developed and matched cut, or snagged deep enough to specific tires for your vehicle. show cord or fabric. The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle, when it • The tire has a bump, bulge, or was new, were designed to split. meet General Motors Tire • The tire has a puncture, cut, or Performance Criteria other damage that cannot be Specification (TPC Spec) repaired well because of the size system rating. If you need or location of the damage. replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that you get The rubber in tires degrades over tires with the same TPC Spec time, even if they are not being rating. This way, your vehicle will used. This is also true for the spare continue to have tires that are One way to tell when it is time for tire, if the vehicle has one. Multiple designed to give the same new tires is to check the treadwear conditions affect how fast this performance and vehicle safety, indicators, which will appear aging takes place, including during normal use, as the when the tires have only 1/16 inch temperatures, loading conditions, original tires. (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. and inflation pressure maintenance. With proper care and maintenance tires typically wear out before 5-52 Service and Appearance Care

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec See Tire Inspection and Rotation system considers over a dozen on page 5-49 for information on { CAUTION critical speciﬁcations that proper tire rotation. impact the overall performance If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the wheel rim ﬂanges of your vehicle, including { CAUTION brake system performance, ride could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and handling, traction control, Mixing tires could cause you and tire pressure monitoring and/or wheel could fail to lose control while driving. If suddenly, causing a crash. performance. GM’s TPC Spec you mix tires of different sizes, number is molded onto the tire’s Use only radial-ply tires with brands, or types (radial and the wheels on the vehicle. sidewall near the tire size. If bias-belted tires), the vehicle the tires have an all-season may not handle properly, and tread design, the TPC Spec you could have a crash. Using If you must replace your vehicle’s number will be followed by an tires of different sizes, brands, tires with those that do not have a MS for mud and snow. See Tire or types may also cause TPC Spec number, make sure Sidewall Labeling on page 5-38 damage to your vehicle. Be they are the same size, load for additional information. sure to use the correct size, range, speed rating, and GM recommends replacing tires brand, and type of tires on all construction type (radial and in sets of four. This is because wheels. It is all right to drive bias-belted tires) as your uniform tread depth on all tires with your compact spare vehicle’s original tires. will help keep your vehicle temporarily, as it was performing most like it did when developed for use on your the tires were new. Replacing vehicle. See Compact Spare less than a full set of tires can Tire on page 5-79. affect the braking and handling performance of your vehicle. Service and Appearance Care 5-53

Vehicles that have a tire pressure Different Size Tires and { monitoring system could give an Wheels CAUTION inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC Spec rated tires are If you add wheels or tires that are a If you add different sized installed on your vehicle. different size than your original wheels, your vehicle may not Non-TPC Spec rated tires may equipment wheels and tires, this provide an acceptable level of give a low-pressure warning that could affect the way your vehicle performance and safety if tires not is higher or lower than the proper performs, including its braking, ride recommended for those wheels warning level you would get with and handling characteristics, are selected. You may increase TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire stability, and resistance to rollover. the chance that you will crash and Pressure Monitor System on Additionally, if your vehicle has suffer serious injury. Only use GM page 5-44. electronic systems such as anti-lock specific wheel and tire systems brakes, rollover airbags, traction developed for your vehicle, and Your vehicle’s original equipment control, and electronic stability tires are listed on the Tire and have them properly installed by a control, the performance of these GM certified technician. Loading Information Label. systems can be affected. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-16, for more See Buying New Tires on page 5-51 information about the Tire and and Accessories and Modifications Loading Information Label on page 5-3 for additional and its location on your vehicle. information. 5-54 Service and Appearance Care

Uniform Tire Quality rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches due to variations in driving habits, Grading (25 to 30 cm), or to some service practices, and differences limited-production tires. in road characteristics and climate. Quality grades can be found While the tires available on where applicable on the General Motors passenger cars Traction – AA, A, B, C tire sidewall between tread and light trucks may vary shoulder and maximum section with respect to these grades, The traction grades, from highest width. For example: they must also conform to to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Treadwear 200 Traction AA federal safety requirements and Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement Temperature A additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) as measured under controlled The following information relates standards. conditions on specified to the system developed by the government test surfaces of United States National Highway Treadwear asphalt and concrete. A tire Traffic Safety Administration marked C may have poor traction The treadwear grade is a performance. (NHTSA), which grades tires by comparative rating based on the treadwear, traction, and wear rate of the tire when tested Temperature – A, B, C temperature performance. This under controlled conditions on a applies only to vehicles sold in specified government test The temperature grades are A the United States. The grades course. For example, a tire (the highest), B, and C, are molded on the sidewalls of graded 150 would wear one and representing the tire’s resistance most passenger car tires. The a half (1.5) times as well on the to the generation of heat and Uniform Tire Quality Grading government course as a tire its ability to dissipate heat when (UTQG) system does not apply to graded 100. The relative tested under controlled deep tread, winter-type snow performance of tires depends conditions on a specified indoor tires, space-saver, or temporary upon the actual conditions of laboratory test wheel. Sustained use spare tires, tires with nominal their use, however, and may high temperature can cause depart significantly from the norm the material of the tire to Service and Appearance Care 5-55 degenerate and reduce tire life, Wheel Alignment and Wheel Replacement and excessive temperature Tire Balance can lead to sudden tire failure. Replace any wheel that is bent, The grade C corresponds to The tires and wheels on your cracked, or badly rusted or a level of performance which all vehicle were aligned and balanced corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming passenger car tires must carefully at the factory to give loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and meet under the Federal Motor you the longest tire life and best wheel nuts should be replaced. If the Vehicle Safety Standard overall performance. Adjustments to wheel leaks air, replace it (except No. 109. Grades B and A wheel alignment and tire balancing some aluminum wheels, which represent higher levels of will not be necessary on a regular can sometimes be repaired). See performance on the laboratory basis. However, if you notice your dealer/retailer if any of test wheel than the minimum unusual tire wear or your vehicle these conditions exist. required by law. It should pulling to one side or the other, the Your dealer/retailer will know the be noted that the temperature alignment might need to be kind of wheel you need. grade for this tire is established checked. If you notice your vehicle for a tire that is properly vibrating when driving on a Each new wheel should have the inflated and not overloaded. smooth road, the tires and wheels same load-carrying capacity, Excessive speed, underinflation, might need to be rebalanced. diameter, width, offset, and be or excessive loading, either See your dealer/retailer for proper mounted the same way as the one separately or in combination, can diagnosis. it replaces. cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 5-56 Service and Appearance Care

If you need to replace any of your Notice: The wrong wheel can Used Replacement Wheels wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, also cause problems with bearing or Tire Pressure Monitor System life, brake cooling, speedometer { CAUTION (TPMS) sensors, replace them only or odometer calibration, with new GM original equipment headlamp aim, bumper height, Putting a used wheel on the parts. This way, you will be sure to vehicle ground clearance, and tire vehicle is dangerous. You cannot have the right wheel, wheel or tire chain clearance to the know how it has been used or bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS body and chassis. how far it has been driven. It sensors for your vehicle. See Changing a Flat Tire on could fail suddenly and cause a page 5-67 for more information. crash. If you have to replace a { CAUTION wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel. Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement. Service and Appearance Care 5-57

Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat CAUTION (Continued) It is unusual for a tire to blowout { CAUTION while you are driving, especially if Use another type of traction you maintain the tires properly. See device only if its manufacturer Do not use tire chains. There is Tires on page 5-37. If air goes not enough clearance. Tire chains recommends it for use on the out of a tire, It is much more likely used on a vehicle without the vehicle and tire size combination to leak out slowly. But if you proper amount of clearance can and road conditions. Follow that should ever have a blowout, here cause damage to the brakes, manufacturer’s instructions. To are a few tips about what to expect suspension or other vehicle parts. help avoid damage to the vehicle, and what to do: drive slowly, readjust or remove The area damaged by the tire If a front tire fails, the flat tire will chains could cause you to lose the device if it is contacting the vehicle, and do not spin the create a drag that pulls the vehicle control of the vehicle and you or toward that side. Take your foot others may be injured in a crash. vehicle’s wheels. If you do find traction devices that will fit, install off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to (Continued) them on the front tires. maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. 5-58 Service and Appearance Care

A rear blowout, particularly on a If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire curve, acts much like a skid and wheel damage by driving slowly { CAUTION and may require the same correction to a level place and stopping. you would use in a skid. In any Lifting a vehicle and getting under 1. Turn on the hazard warning it to do maintenance or repairs is rear blowout, remove your foot from flashers. See Hazard Warning dangerous without the appropriate the accelerator pedal. Get the Flashers on page 3-5. vehicle under control by steering the safety equipment and training. If a way you want the vehicle to go. It 2. Park the vehicle. Set the parking jack is provided with the vehicle, it may be very bumpy and noisy, brake firmly and put the shift is designed only for changing a but you can still steer. Gently brake lever in P (Park). flat tire. If it is used for anything to a stop, well off the road if 3. Turn off the engine. else, you or others could be badly possible. injured or killed if the vehicle slips 4. Inspect the flat tire. off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.

This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jack and spare tire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-67. To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page 5-59. Service and Appearance Care 5-59

Tire Sealant and If this vehicle has a tire sealant and { CAUTION compressor kit, there may not be a Compressor Kit spare tire, tire changing equipment, Over-inflating a tire could cause and on some vehicles there may not { CAUTION the tire to rupture and you or be a place to store a tire. others could be injured. Be sure Idling a vehicle in an enclosed to read and follow the tire sealant The tire sealant and compressor can be used to temporarily area with poor ventilation is and compressor kit instructions seal punctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) dangerous. Engine exhaust may and inflate the tire to its in the tread area of the tire. It can enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust recommended pressure. Do not also be used to inflate an under contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) exceed the recommended inflated tire. which cannot be seen or smelled. pressure. It can cause unconsciousness If the tire has been separated from and even death. Never run the the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, engine in an enclosed area that { CAUTION or has a large puncture, the tire has no fresh air ventilation. For is too severely damaged for the tire more information, see Engine Storing the tire sealant and sealant and compressor kit to be Exhaust on page 2-30. compressor kit or other equipment effective. See Roadside Assistance in the passenger compartment of Program on page 7-6. the vehicle could cause injury. In Read and follow all of the tire a sudden stop or collision, loose sealant and compressor kit equipment could strike someone. instructions. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location. 5-60 Service and Appearance Care

This vehicle may have one of the Tire Sealant following tire sealant and Read and follow the safe handling compressor kits. The kit includes: instructions on the label adhered to the sealant canister. Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister” A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or following. Air Only) There is only enough sealant to seal B. On/Off Button one tire. After usage, the sealant C. Pressure Gage canister and sealant/air hose D. Pressure Deﬂation Button assembly must be replaced. See (If equipped) “Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister” following. E. Tire Sealant Canister F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) G. Air Only Hose (Black) H. Power Plug Service and Appearance Care 5-61

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inﬂate a Punctured Tire Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment for 5 minutes. This will help to inﬂate the tire faster. Always do a safety check ﬁrst. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-57. Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire. 1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage on page 5-66. 5-62 Service and Appearance Care

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle 10. Inflate the tire to the and the power plug (H). must be running while using recommended inflation pressure 3. Place the kit on the ground. the air compressor. using the pressure gage (C). 8. Turn the selector switch (A) The recommended inflation Make sure the tire valve pressure can be found on the stem is positioned close to the counterclockwise to the Sealant + Air position. Tire and Loading Information ground so the hose will reach it. label. See Inflation - Tire 4. Remove the valve stem cap from 9. Press the on/off (B) button to Pressure on page 5-43. turn the tire sealant and the flat tire by turning it The pressure gage (C) may compressor kit on. counterclockwise. read higher than the actual tire 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) The compressor will inject pressure while the compressor onto the tire valve stem. Turn sealant and air into the tire. is on. Turn the compressor it clockwise until it is tight. The pressure gage (C) will initially off to get an accurate pressure show a high pressure while the reading. The compressor 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the compressor pushes the sealant may be turned on/off until the accessory power outlet in the into the tire. Once the sealant is correct pressure is reached. vehicle. Unplug all items completely dispersed into the tire, from other accessory power Notice: If the recommended the pressure will quickly drop and outlets. See Accessory Power pressure cannot be reached after start to rise again as the tire Outlet(s) on page 3-18. approximately 25 minutes, the inflates with air only. If the vehicle has an accessory vehicle should not be driven power outlet, do not use the farther. The tire is too severely cigarette lighter. damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the If the vehicle only has a cigarette tire. Remove the power plug from lighter, use the cigarette lighter. the accessory power outlet and Do not pinch the power plug unscrew the inflating hose from cord in the door or window. the tire valve. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6. Service and Appearance Care 5-63

11. Press the on/off button (B) to 19. Stop at a safe location and turn the tire sealant and check the tire pressure. compressor kit off. Refer to Steps 1 through 11 The tire is not sealed and will under “Using the Tire Sealant continue to leak air until and Compressor Kit without the vehicle is driven and the Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).” sealant is distributed in the tire, 16. If the flat tire was able to inflate therefore, Steps 12 through to the recommended inflation If the tire pressure has fallen 18 must be done immediately pressure, remove the maximum more than 10 psi (68 kPa) below after Step 11. speed label from the sealant the recommended inflation Be careful while handling the canister (E) and place it pressure, stop driving the tire sealant and compressor kit in a highly visible location. The vehicle. The tire is too severely as it could be warm after label is a reminder not to damaged and the tire sealant usage. exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until cannot seal the tire. See the damaged tire is repaired Roadside Assistance Program 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from on page 7-6. the accessory power outlet in or replaced. If the tire pressure has not the vehicle. 17. Return the equipment to its dropped more than 10 psi original storage location in 13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) (68 kPa) from the recommended the vehicle. counterclockwise to remove it inflation pressure, inflate the from the tire valve stem. 18. Immediately drive the vehicle tire to the recommended 14. Replace the tire valve 5 miles (8 km) to distribute the inflation pressure. sealant in the tire. stem cap. 20. Wipe off any sealant from the 15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), wheel, tire, and vehicle. and the power plug (H) back in their original location. 5-64 Service and Appearance Care

21. Dispose of the used sealant canister (E) and sealant/air hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/retailer or in accordance with local state codes and practices. 22. Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer/retailer. 23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer/retailer Always do a safety check first. See within a 100 miles (161 km) If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-57. of driving to have the tire repaired or replaced. 1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage Using the Tire Sealant and location. See Tire Sealant Compressor Kit without and Compressor Kit Storage on Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not page 5-66. Punctured) 2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) To use the air compressor to inflate and the power plug (H). a tire with air only and not sealant: 3. Place the kit on the ground. Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. Service and Appearance Care 5-65

4. Remove the tire valve stem cap 9. Press the on/off (B) button to This option is only functional from the flat tire by turning it turn the compressor on. when using the air only counterclockwise. The compressor will inflate the hose (G). 5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto tire with air only. 11. Press the on/off button (B) to the tire valve stem by turning it 10. Inflate the tire to the turn the tire sealant and clockwise until it is tight. recommended inflation pressure compressor kit off. 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the using the pressure gage (C). Be careful while handling the accessory power outlet in the The recommended inflation tire sealant and compressor kit vehicle. Unplug all items pressure can be found on the as it could be warm after from other accessory power Tire and Loading Information usage. outlets. See Accessory Power label. See Inflation - Tire 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from Outlet(s) on page 3-18. Pressure on page 5-43. the accessory power outlet in If the vehicle has an accessory The pressure gage (C) may the vehicle. read higher than the actual tire power outlet, do not use the 13. Disconnect the air only hose (G) pressure while the compressor cigarette lighter. from the tire valve stem, by is on. Turn the compressor If the vehicle only has a cigarette turning it counterclockwise, and off to get an accurate reading. lighter, use the cigarette lighter. replace the tire valve stem cap. The compressor may be Do not pinch the power plug turned on/off until the correct 14. Replace the air only hose (G) cord in the door or window. pressure is reached. and the power plug (H) and 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle If you inflate the tire higher than cord back in its original location. must be running while using the recommended pressure 15. Place the equipment in the air compressor. you can adjust the excess the original storage location in 8. Turn the selector switch (A) pressure by pressing the the vehicle. clockwise to the Air Only position. pressure deflation button (D), if equipped, until the proper pressure reading is reached. 5-66 Service and Appearance Care

Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister To remove the sealant canister: 1. Unwrap the sealant hose. 2. Press the canister release button. 3. Pull up and remove the canister. 4. Replace with a new canister which is available from your dealer/retailer. 5. Push the new canister into place. The tire sealant and compressor kit 1. Press down on the latch tab and has an accessory adapter located Tire Sealant and pull the cover off to access the in a compartment on the bottom Compressor Kit Storage storage compartment. of its housing that may be used to The tire sealant and compressor 2. Press the two tabs on the quick inﬂate air mattresses, balls, etc. kit is located in the storage release buckle to release the compartment on the driver side, at tire sealant and compressor kit the rear of the vehicle. strap. 3. Remove the sealant and compressor kit from its tray. To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse the steps. Service and Appearance Care 5-67

Changing a Flat Tire When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), CAUTION (Continued) use the following example as a If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire guide to assist you in the placement and wheel damage by driving slowly 3. Turn off the engine and do of wheel blocks (A). to a level place. Turn on the not restart while the vehicle hazard warning flashers. See is raised. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-5. 4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle. { CAUTION To be even more certain the vehicle will not move, you should Changing a tire can be dangerous. put blocks at the front and rear of The vehicle can slip off the jack the tire farthest away from the and roll over or fall on you or other one being changed. That would people. You and they could be be the tire, on the other side, at badly injured or even killed. Find a the opposite end of the vehicle. level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from A. Wheel Block moving: B. Flat Tire 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put the shift lever in The following information explains P (Park). how to use the jack and change a tire. (Continued) 5-68 Service and Appearance Care

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The tools needed to remove the spare tire are located in the storage compartment on the driver side, at the rear of the vehicle. 1. Open the jack storage compartment by pulling on the latch tab, located toward the rear of the vehicle, and pulling the cover off.

A. Tool Bag The tools you will be using include B. Wing Bolt the jack (A) and lug wrench (B). C. Jack 2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by turning it counterclockwise 3. Push the jack (C) up out of the holding bracket. 4. Turn the jack on its side, with the bottom facing toward you. 5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom ﬁrst. Service and Appearance Care 5-69

Removing the Spare Tire 1. Open the storage compartment The compact spare tire is located door of the convenience center under the vehicle, in front of the rear that is nearest the liftgate bumper. See Compact Spare Tire on and remove the cap on the page 5-79 for more information about bottom of the storage the compact spare. compartment. 2. Open the carpet cutout that is located through the hole of the storage compartment. 3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft. 5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel opening 4. Turn the lug wrench to remove the spare tire from the counterclockwise to lower the cable. spare tire to the ground. Continue turning the wrench until the 6. Turn the wrench clockwise to spare tire can be pulled out from raise the cable back up after under the vehicle. removing the spare tire. Do not store a full-size or a ﬂat A. Rear Convenience Center road tire under the vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire B. Lug Wrench and Tools on page 5-76. C. Storage Compartment Cap Hole To continue changing the ﬂat tire, D. Hoist Shaft see Removing the Flat Tire and E. Compact Spare Tire Installing the Spare Tire on F. Retainer page 5-70. G. Hoist Shaft Assembly 5-70 Service and Appearance Care

3. Loosen the cable by turning the Removing the Flat Tire wrench counterclockwise three and Installing the or four turns. Spare Tire 4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable all the way and 1. Do a safety check before then loosen it at least two proceeding. See Changing a Flat times. Tire on page 5-67 for more information. If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue with Step 5 2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, under “Removing the Spare Tire loosen the plastic nut caps with (Vehicles with the Rear the wheel wrench. They will Convenience Center)” listed not come off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry If the spare tire will not lower, the previously. along the edge of the cover until secondary latch could be engaged. 5. If you still cannot lower the spare it comes off. Be careful; the Do the following to check the tire to the ground, see Secondary edges may be sharp. Do not try cable: Latch System on page 5-74. to remove the cover with your 1. Check under the vehicle to see if bare hands. the cable is visible. Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of the vehicle until you 2. If it is not visible, see Secondary have the flat tire repaired or Latch System on page 5-74. replaced. If it is visible, first try to tighten If the vehicle has aluminum the cable by turning the lug wheels, remove the wheel nut wrench clockwise until you hear caps using the wheel wrench. two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot over-tighten the cable. Service and Appearance Care 5-71

{ CAUTION

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it 4. To identify the appropriate is supported only by a jack. jacking location, ﬁnd the triangle (A) about 12 inches (30.5 cm) from the front tire or (B) { CAUTION 3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do about 10.5 inches (27 cm) from not remove them — using the the rear tire. Raising your vehicle with the jack lug wrench. For wheels with The triangle is located near each improperly positioned can damage a wheel lock key, use the wheel wheel on the vehicle’s exterior. the vehicle and even make the lock key between the lock nut vehicle fall. To help avoid Notice: If a jack is used to raise and lug wrench. The key is personal injury and vehicle the vehicle without positioning it supplied in the front passenger damage, be sure to ﬁt the jack lift correctly, the vehicle could be door pocket. head into the proper location damaged. When raising the before raising the vehicle. Notice: If this vehicle has wheel vehicle on a jack, avoid contact locks and an impact wrench is with the rear axle control arms. used to remove the wheel nuts, 6. Attach the lug wrench to the 5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put jack, and turn the wrench the lock nut or wheel lock key the compact spare tire near you. could be damaged. Do not use an clockwise to raise the jack head impact wrench to remove the 3 inches (7.6 cm). wheel nuts if this vehicle has wheel locks. 5-72 Service and Appearance Care

{ CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure 7. Place the jack under the vehicle 9. Remove the plastic spare tire to use a scraper or wire brush as identified in Step 3. Raise the heat shield by pulling the later, if needed, to get all the rust vehicle by turning the lug rubber latch. Store the plastic or dirt off. See Changing a Flat wrench clockwise in the jack. spare tire heat shield. See Tire on page 5-67. Raise the vehicle far enough off Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and the ground so that there is Tools on page 5-76 for more enough room for the spare tire to information. { fit under the wheel well. CAUTION 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and Never use oil or grease on bolts the flat tire. or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a crash. Service and Appearance Care 5-73

10. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting { CAUTION surfaces, and spare wheel. Wheel nuts that are improperly or 11. Place the spare tire on the incorrectly tightened can cause wheel mounting surface. the wheels to become loose or 12. Put the nuts on by hand by come off. The wheel nuts should turning the clockwise until be tightened with a torque wrench the wheel is held against the to the proper torque specification mounting surface. Make after replacing. Follow the torque sure the rounded end is toward specification supplied by the the wheel. aftermarket manufacturer when 13. Lower the vehicle by attaching using accessory locking wheel the lug wrench to the jack and nuts. See Capacities and 14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in turning the wrench Specifications on page 5-94 for a crisscross sequence, as counterclockwise. Lower the original equipment wheel nut shown. jack completely. torque specifications. Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your vehicle’s compact Notice: Improperly tightened spare. If you try to put a wheel wheel nuts can lead to brake cover on the compact spare, the pulsation and rotor damage. To cover or the spare could be avoid expensive brake repairs, damaged. evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification. See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-94 for the wheel nut torque specification. 5-74 Service and Appearance Care

Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch: This vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly that has a secondary latch system. It is { CAUTION designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly falling off the Someone standing too close vehicle if the cable holding the spare during the procedure could be tire is damaged. For the secondary injured by the jack. If the spare latch to work, the tire must be tire does not slide off the jack stowed with the valve stem pointing completely, make sure no one is down. See Storing a Flat or behind you or on either side of Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-76 you as you pull the jack out from for instructions on storing the under the spare. All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown spare tire correctly. 2. Turn the lug wrench 1. If the cable is not visible, start counterclockwise until { CAUTION this procedure at Step 3. approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. Before beginning this procedure 3. Attach the lug wrench to the jack read all the instructions. Failure to and raise the jack at least read and follow the instructions 10 turns. could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get 4. Place the jack under the vehicle, hurt. Read and follow the ahead of the rear bumper. instructions listed next. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. Service and Appearance Care 5-75

5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to 9. Tilt the retainer and slip it through raise the jack until it lifts the the wheel opening when the secondary latch spring. spare tire has been completely 6. Keep raising the jack until the lowered. spare tire stops moving upward 10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise and is held ﬁrmly in place. to raise the cable back up if the This lets you know that the cable is hanging. secondary latch has released Have the hoist shaft assembly and the spare tire is balancing on inspected as soon as you can. You the jack. will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced. 8. Disconnect the lug wrench from the jack and carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push against the spare tire while ﬁrmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand.

7. Lower the jack by turning the lug wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack. 5-76 Service and Appearance Care

Storing a Flat or Spare 4. When the compact spare tire is { CAUTION almost in the stored position, Tire and Tools turn the tire so the valve is Storing the Spare Tire Storing a jack, a tire, or other toward the rear of the vehicle. equipment in the passenger This position helps when compartment of the vehicle could { CAUTION checking the air pressure in the cause injury. In a sudden stop or compact spare tire. collision, loose equipment could The underbody-mounted spare strike someone. Store all these in 5. Raise the tire fully against the tire needs to be stored with the the proper place. underside of the vehicle. Continue valve stem pointing down. If the turning the lug wrench until you spare tire is stored with the valve feel more than two clicks. This To store the spare tire: stem pointing upwards, the indicates that the compact spare secondary latch will not work 1. Lay the compact spare tire near tire is secure and the cable is properly and the spare tire could the rear of the vehicle with the tight. The spare tire hoist cannot loosen and suddenly fall from the valve stem down. be overtightened. vehicle. If this happened when the 2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire vehicle was being driven, the tire heat shield on the compact might contact a person or another spare tire. vehicle, causing injury and 3. Slide the cable retainer through damage to itself. Be sure the the center of the wheel and start underbody-mounted spare tire is to raise the compact spare tire. stored with the valve stem pointing down. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. Service and Appearance Care 5-77

3. Put the ﬂat tire in the rear storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the vehicle.

6. Make sure the tire is stored 5. Hook the cable onto the outside securely. Push, pull (A), and then portion of the liftgate hinges (B). try to turn (B) the tire. If the 6. Hook the other end of the cable tire moves, use the lug wrench to 4. Pull the cable (A) through the onto the outside portion of the tighten the cable. door striker (E), the center of liftgate hinge (A). Storing the Flat Tire the wheel (D), and the plastic 7. Pull on the cable to make sure it spare tire heat shield (C), is secure. 1. Remove the cable package from as shown. the jack storage area. 2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels. 5-78 Service and Appearance Care

Storing the Tools 3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by turning clockwise. 4. To replace the cover, line up the tab at the front of the cover with the notch in the cover opening. Push the cover in place and make sure that the rear clips are in the slots and push the cover closed. Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheel covers until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle. 8. Make sure the metal tube is When you replace the compact centered at the striker. Push A. Tool Bag spare with a full-size tire, reinstall the tube toward the front of the the bolt-on wheel covers or the vehicle. B. Wing Bolt center cap. Hand-tighten them over C. Jack 9. Close the liftgate and make sure the wheel nuts, using the lug it is latched properly. wrench. Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on. 1. Ensure that the bottom of the jack is facing toward you. 2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place down on the holding bracket. Service and Appearance Care 5-79

Compact Spare Tire After installing the compact spare on And do not mix the compact spare the vehicle, stop as soon as possible tire or wheel with other wheels { and make sure the spare tire is or tires. They will not fit. Keep the CAUTION correctly inflated. The compact spare spare tire and its wheel together. is made to perform well at speeds up The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system Driving with more than one to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances will be automatically disabled compact spare tire at a time could up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you when you use the compact spare. result in loss of braking and can finish your trip and have the To restore the AWD and prevent handling. This could lead to a full-size tire repaired or replaced at excessive wear on the clutch in your crash and you or others could be your convenience. Of course, it is AWD, replace the compact spare injured. Use only one compact best to replace the spare with a tire with a full-size tire as soon spare tire at a time. full-size tire as soon as possible. The as possible. spare tire will last longer and be in The compact spare tire, if the good shape in case it is needed Notice: Tire chains will not fit vehicle has one, was fully inflated again. the compact spare. Using when the vehicle was new, however, them can damage the vehicle and Notice: When the compact spare it can lose air after a time. Check can damage the chains too. Do is installed, do not take the vehicle the inflation pressure regularly. not use tire chains on the through an automatic car wash It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). compact spare. with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other parts of the vehicle. Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles. 5-80 Service and Appearance Care

Appearance Care When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, Many cleaners contain solvents that only use cleaners speciﬁcally may become concentrated in the designed for the surfaces being vehicle’s breathing space. Before Interior Cleaning cleaned. Permanent damage may using cleaners, read and adhere to The vehicle’s interior will continue to result from using cleaners on all safety instructions on the label. look its best if it is cleaned often. surfaces for which they were not While cleaning the vehicle’s interior, Although not always visible, intended. Use glass cleaner only on maintain adequate ventilation by dust and dirt can accumulate on the glass. Remove any accidental opening the vehicle’s doors and upholstery. Dirt can damage over-spray from other surfaces windows. immediately. To prevent over-spray, carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic Dust may be removed from small apply cleaner directly to the surfaces. Regular vacuuming buttons and knobs using a small cleaning cloth. is recommended to remove particles brush with soft bristles. from the upholstery. It is important Notice: Using abrasive cleaners to keep the upholstery from Products that remove odors from when cleaning glass surfaces on becoming and remaining heavily the vehicle’s upholstery and the vehicle, could scratch the soiled. Soils should be removed as clean the vehicle’s glass can be glass and/or cause damage to the quickly as possible. The vehicle’s obtained from your dealer/retailer. rear window defogger. When interior may experience extremes of cleaning the glass on the vehicle, Do not clean the vehicle using: heat that could cause stains to use only a soft cloth and glass set rapidly. • A knife or any other sharp object cleaner. to remove a soil from any interior Lighter colored interiors may surface. require more frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers and • A stiff brush. It can cause garments that transfer color to home damage to the vehicle’s interior furnishings may also transfer color to surfaces. the vehicle’s interior. Service and Appearance Care 5-81

• Heavy pressure or aggressive Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the rubbing with a cleaning cloth. soil and gently rub toward the Use of heavy pressure can Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft center. Continue cleaning, using damage the interior and does not brush attachment frequently to a clean area of the cloth each improve the effectiveness of remove dust and loose dirt. time it becomes soiled. soil removal. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled • Laundry detergents or on floor carpet and carpeted floor area until the cleaning cloth dishwashing soaps with mats. For any soil, always try remains clean. degreasers can leave residue to remove it first with plain water or 5. If the soil is not completely that streaks and attracts dirt. For club soda. Before cleaning, removed, use a mild soap liquid cleaners, about 20 drops gently remove as much of the soil solution and repeat the cleaning per gallon (3.78 L) of water as possible using one of the process that was used with is a good guide. Use only mild, following techniques: plain water. neutral-pH soaps. • For liquids: gently blot the If any of the soil remains, a • Too much cleaner that saturates remaining soil with a paper towel. commercial fabric cleaner or spot the upholstery. Allow the soil to absorb into the lifter may be necessary. When • Organic solvents such as naptha, paper towel until no more can be a commercial upholstery cleaner or alcohol, etc. that can damage the removed. spot lifter is to be used, test a vehicle’s interior. • For solid dry soils: remove as small hidden area for colorfastness much as possible and then first. If the locally cleaned area vacuum. gives any impression that a ring formation may result, clean the To clean: entire surface. 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white After the cleaning process has been cloth with water or club soda. completed, a paper towel can be 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess used to blot excess moisture moisture. from the fabric or carpet. 5-82 Service and Appearance Care

Leather Instrument Panel, Vinyl, Some commercial products may and Other Plastic increase gloss on the instrument A soft cloth dampened with water panel. The increase in gloss can be used to remove dust. If a Surfaces may cause annoying reﬂections in more thorough cleaning is A soft cloth dampened with water the windshield and even make necessary, a soft cloth dampened may be used to remove dust. it difficult to see through the with a mild soap solution can be If a more thorough cleaning is windshield under certain conditions. used. Allow the leather to dry necessary, a clean soft cloth naturally. Do not use heat to dry. dampened with a mild soap solution Never use steam to clean leather. Care of Safety Belts can be used to gently remove Never use spot lifters or spot Keep belts clean and dry. dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters removers on leather. Many or removers on plastic surfaces. commercial leather cleaners and Many commercial cleaners { CAUTION coatings that are sold to preserve and coatings that are sold to and protect leather may permanently preserve and protect soft plastic Do not bleach or dye safety belts. change the appearance and feel of surfaces may permanently change It may severely weaken them. In the leather and are not the appearance and feel of the a crash, they might not be able to recommended. Do not use silicone interior and are not recommended. provide adequate protection. or wax-based products, or those Do not use silicone or wax-based containing organic solvents to clean Clean safety belts only with mild products, or those containing the vehicle’s interior because they soap and lukewarm water. organic solvents to clean the can alter the appearance by vehicle’s interior because they can increasing the gloss in a non-uniform alter the appearance by increasing manner. Never use shoe polish on the gloss in a non-uniform manner. leather. Service and Appearance Care 5-83

Weatherstrips Do not wash the vehicle in direct High pressure car washes may sunlight. Use a car washing cause water to enter the vehicle. Silicone grease on weatherstrips will soap. Do not use cleaning agents Avoid using high pressure washes make them last longer, seal better, that are petroleum based or closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the and not stick or squeak. Apply that contain acid or abrasives, as surface of the vehicle. Use of power silicone grease with a clean cloth. they can damage the paint, metal or washers exceeding 1,200 psi During very cold, damp weather plastic on the vehicle. Approved (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or frequent application may be required. cleaning products can be obtained removal of paint and decals. See Recommended Fluids and from your dealer/retailer. Follow Lubricants on page 6-11. all manufacturers’ directions Cleaning Exterior regarding correct product usage, Lamps/Lenses Washing Your Vehicle necessary safety precautions Use only lukewarm or cold water, a The best way to preserve the and appropriate disposal of any soft cloth and a car washing vehicle’s ﬁnish is to keep it clean by vehicle care product. soap to clean exterior lamps and washing it often. Rinse the vehicle well, before lenses. Follow instructions washing and after to remove all Notice: Certain cleaners contain under Washing Your Vehicle on cleaning agents completely. If they chemicals that can damage page 5-83. are allowed to dry on the surface, the emblems or nameplates on they could stain. the vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states that Dry the ﬁnish with a soft, clean it should not be used on plastic chamois or an all-cotton towel to parts, do not use it on the vehicle avoid surface scratches and or damage may occur and it water spotting. would not be covered by the warranty. 5-84 Service and Appearance Care

Finish Care industrial chimneys, etc., can steam or caustic soap to clean damage the vehicle’s finish if they aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed Occasional waxing or mild polishing remain on painted surfaces. Wash to high polish, is recommended for all of the vehicle by hand may be the vehicle as soon as possible. If bright metal parts. necessary to remove residue from necessary, use non-abrasive the paint finish. Approved cleaning cleaners that are marked safe for Windshield, Backglass, products can be obtained from painted surfaces to remove foreign and Wiper Blades your dealer/retailer. matter. If the vehicle has a Clean the outside of the windshield Exterior painted surfaces are and backglass with glass cleaner. basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the subject to aging, weather and clearcoat gives more depth and chemical fallout that can take their Clean the rubber blades using a lint gloss to the colored basecoat. toll over a period of years. To free cloth or paper towel soaked with Always use waxes and polishes that help keep the paint finish looking windshield washer fluid or a mild are non-abrasive and made for a new, keep the vehicle garaged detergent. Wash the windshield basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. or covered whenever possible. thoroughly when you clean the Notice: Machine compounding or blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and a Protecting Exterior Bright Metal buildup of vehicle wash/wax aggressive polishing on a Parts basecoat/clearcoat paint finish treatments may cause wiper may damage it. Use only Bright metal parts should be streaking. Replace the wiper blades non-abrasive waxes and polishes cleaned regularly to keep their if they are worn or damaged. that are made for a basecoat/ luster. Washing with water is all that Wipers can be damaged by: clearcoat paint finish on the is usually needed. However, • Extreme dusty conditions vehicle. chrome polish may be used on chrome or stainless steel trim, if • Sand and salt Foreign materials such as calcium necessary. chloride and other salts, ice melting • Heat and sun Use special care with aluminum trim. agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, • Snow and ice, without proper To avoid damaging protective trim, bird droppings, chemicals from removal never use auto or chrome polish, Service and Appearance Care 5-85

Aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could Notice: Driving the vehicle Chrome-Plated Wheels damage the surface of the through an automatic car wash wheel(s). The repairs would not that has silicone carbide tire and Trim be covered by the vehicle cleaning brushes, could damage The vehicle may have either warranty. Use only approved the aluminum or chrome-plated aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. cleaners on aluminum or wheels. The repairs would not be chrome-plated wheels. covered by the vehicle warranty. Keep the wheels clean using a Never drive a vehicle that has The surface of these wheels is soft clean cloth with mild soap and aluminum or chrome-plated similar to the painted surface of the water. Rinse with clean water. wheels through an automatic car vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a wash that uses silicone carbide chemicals, abrasive polishes, soft clean towel. A wax may then be tire cleaning brushes. applied. abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes Notice: Chrome wheels and on them because they could Tires other chrome trim may be damage the surface. Do not use To clean the tires, use a stiff brush damaged if the vehicle is not chrome polish on aluminum wheels. with tire cleaner. washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with Notice: Using chrome polish Notice: Using petroleum-based magnesium, calcium or sodium on aluminum wheels could tire dressing products on the chloride. These chlorides are damage the wheels. The repairs vehicle may damage the paint used on roads for conditions would not be covered by the ﬁnish and/or tires. When applying such as ice and dust. Always vehicle warranty. Use chrome a tire dressing, always wipe off wash the vehicle’s chrome with polish on chrome wheels only. any overspray from all painted soap and water after exposure. Use chrome polish only on surfaces on the vehicle. Notice: Using strong soaps, chrome-plated wheels, but avoid chemicals, abrasive polishes, any painted surface of the wheel, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners and buff off immediately after that contain acid on aluminum or application. 5-86 Service and Appearance Care

Sheet Metal Damage Underbody Maintenance Chemical Paint Spotting If the vehicle is damaged and Chemicals used for ice and Some weather and atmospheric requires sheet metal repair or snow removal and dust control can conditions can create a chemical replacement, make sure the body collect on the underbody. If these fallout. Airborne pollutants can repair shop applies anti-corrosion are not removed, corrosion and rust fall upon and attack painted surfaces material to parts repaired or can develop on the underbody on the vehicle. This damage can replaced to restore corrosion parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped protection. pan, and exhaust system even discolorations, and small, irregular though they have corrosion dark spots etched into the paint Original manufacturer replacement protection. surface. parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining At least every spring, flush these Although no defect in the paint job the vehicle warranty. materials from the underbody causes this, we will repair, at no with plain water. Clean any areas charge to the owner, the surfaces of Finish Damage where mud and debris can collect. new vehicles damaged by this Dirt packed in close areas of fallout condition within 12 months or Any stone chips, fractures or deep the frame should be loosened before 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of scratches in the finish should being flushed. Your dealer/retailer purchase, whichever occurs first. be repaired right away. Bare metal or an underbody car washing will corrode quickly and may system can do this. develop into major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop. Service and Appearance Care 5-87

Vehicle Identification Engine Identification Electrical System The eighth character in the VIN is Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code High Voltage Devices and Number (VIN) helps identify the vehicle’s engine, Wiring specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications { CAUTION on page 5-94 for the vehicle’s engine code. Exposure to high voltage can This is the legal identifier for the cause shock, burns, and even vehicle. It appears on a plate in the Service Parts death. The high voltage systems front corner of the instrument panel, Identification Label in your vehicle can only be on the driver side. It can be seen serviced by technicians with through the windshield from outside This label is on the inside of the special training. the vehicle. The VIN also appears on glove box. It is very helpful if parts High voltage devices are identified need to be ordered. The label the Vehicle Certification and Service by labels. Do not remove, open, has the following information: Parts labels and the certificates of take apart, or modify these title and registration. • Vehicle Identification devices. High voltage cable or Number (VIN) wiring has orange covering. Do not • Model designation probe, tamper with, cut, or modify high voltage cable or wiring. • Paint information • Production options and special equipment Do not remove this label from the vehicle. 5-88 Service and Appearance Care

Add-On Electrical Windshield Wiper Fuses Fuses and Circuit Equipment The windshield wiper motor is Breakers Notice: Do not add anything protected by a circuit breaker and a The wiring circuits in your vehicle electrical to the vehicle unless you fuse. If the motor overheats due are protected from short circuits by a check with your dealer/retailer to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will combination of fuses, circuit first. Some electrical equipment stop until the motor cools. If the breakers and fusible thermal links. can damage the vehicle and the overload is caused by some This greatly reduces the chance damage would not be covered by electrical problem, have it fixed. of fires caused by electrical the vehicle’s warranty. Some problems. Power Windows and add-on electrical equipment can Look at the silver-colored band keep other components from Other Power Options inside the fuse. If the band is broken working as they should. Circuit breakers in the fuse block or melted, replace the fuse. Be Add-on equipment can drain the protect the power windows and sure you replace a bad fuse with a vehicle’s battery, even if the vehicle other power accessories. When the new one of the identical size is not operating. current load is too heavy, the and rating. circuit breaker opens and closes, The vehicle has an airbag system. Fuses of the same amperage can protecting the circuit until the Before attempting to add anything be temporarily borrowed from problem is fixed or goes away. electrical to the vehicle, see another fuse location, if a fuse goes Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped out. Replace the fuse as soon as Vehicle on page 1-57. you can. Service and Appearance Care 5-89

Instrument Panel Fuse Fuses Usage Block AIRBAG Airbag The instrument panel fuse block is AMP Ampliﬁer located under the instrument BCK/UP/ Back-up panel on the passenger side of the STOP Lamp/Stoplamp vehicle. Pull down on the cover Body Control BCM to access the fuse block. Module CNSTR/ VENT Canister Vent CTSY Courtesy DR/LCK Door Locks Daytime Running DRL Lamps GMC HID Only/Rear DRL 2 Fog Lamps-China Only DSPLY Display Front Windshield FRT/WSW Washer HTD/COOL Heated/Cooling SEAT Seats Heating, Ventilation HVAC and Air Conditioning Fuse Side IADV/PWR/ Inadvertent LED Power LED INFOTMNT Infotainment 5-90 Service and Appearance Care

Fuses Usage Relays Usage LT/TRN/SIG Driver Side Turn LT/PWR/ Driver Side Power Signal SEAT Seat Relay MSM Memory Seat RT/PWR/ Passenger Side Module SEAT Power Seat Relay Power Mirrors, PWR/ Power Windows PDM Liftgate Release WNDW Relay PWR Power Mode PWR/ Power Steering MODE COLUMN Column Relay PWR/MIR Power Mirrors L/GATE Liftgate Relay RDO Radio LCK Power Lock Relay REAR WPR Rear Wiper Rear Window REAR/WSW Passenger Side Washer Relay RT/TRN/SIG Turn Signal UNLCK Power Unlock Relay SPARE Spare Daytime Running DRL2 SPARE Spare Lamps 2 Relay STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel LT/UNLCK Driver Side Unlock ILLUM Illumination Relay Daytime Running DRL Lamps Relay SPARE Spare Front Windshield FRT/WSW Washer Relay Relay Side Service and Appearance Care 5-91

Underhood Fuse Block To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index ﬁnger and pull straight out. The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block. Notice: Spilling liquid on any Fuses Usage Fuses Usage electrical components on A/C Air Conditioning Adaptive Forward the vehicle may damage it. CLUTCH Clutch AFS Lighting System Always keep the covers on any Antilock Braking AIRBAG Airbag System electrical component. ABS MTR System (ABS) Motor AUX POWER Auxiliary Power 5-92 Service and Appearance Care

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage AUX VAC Auxiliary Vacuum FSCM Fuel System Control PCM IGN Powertrain Control PUMP Pump Module Module Ignition AWD All-Wheel-Drive HORN Horn PWR Power Liftgate System L/GATE HTD WASH Heated Windshield BATT 1 Battery 1 Washer Fluid PWR Power Outlet OUTLET BATT 2 Battery 2 HTD MIR Heated Outside BATT 3 Battery 3 Rearview Mirror REAR Rear Camera CAMERA Engine Control Heating, Ventilation ECM HVAC and Air Conditioning Module BLWR Rear Accessory Blower RR APO Power Outlet Engine Control ECM 1 Module 1 LT HI Left High-Beam RR DEFOG Rear Defogger BEAM Headlamp EMISSION 1 Emission 1 Rear Climate LT LO Left Low-Beam RR HVAC Control System EMISSION 2 Emission 2 BEAM Headlamp RT HI Right High-Beam EVEN LT PRK Left Parking Lamp BEAM Headlamp COILS Even Injector Coils Trailer Left RT LO Right Low-Beam FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 LT TRLR STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn BEAM Headlamp FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Signal RT PRK Right Parking Lamp FOG LAMP Fog Lamps ODD Odd Injector Coils Trailer Right COILS RT TRLR Stoplamp and Turn STOP/TRN Signal Service and Appearance Care 5-93

Fuses Usage Relays Usage Relays Usage Regulated Voltage A/C PRK LAMP Park Lamp RVC SNSR Air Conditioning Control Sensor CMPRSR PWR/TRN Powertrain CLTCH Compressor Clutch S/ROOF/ Sunroof Rear Window SUNSHADE AUX VAC Auxiliary Vacuum RR DEFOG Defogger PUMP Pump SPARE Spare Trailer Right CRNK Switched Power RT TRLR Stop Lamps Stop Lamps STOP/TRN Stoplamp and Turn (China FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 Signal Lamp Only) (China Only) FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Stop Lamps Stop Lamps STRTR Starter FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3 (China Only) (China Only) Transmission FOG LAMP Fog Lamps TCM Control Module TRLR Trailer Back-up High-Beam BCK/UP Lamps TRANS Transmission HI BEAM Headlamps WPR Windshield Wiper TRLR Trailer Back-up High Intensity BCK/UP Lamps HID/LO Discharge (HID) WPR HI Windshield Wiper TRLR BRK Trailer Brake BEAM Low-Beam High Speed TRLR PRK Trailer Parking Headlamps LAMP Lamps HORN Horn TRLR PWR Trailer Power IGN Ignition Main WPR/WSW Windshield Trailer Left Wiper/Washer LT TRLR Stoplamp and Turn STOP/TRN Signal Lamp 5-94 Service and Appearance Care

Capacities and Speciﬁcations The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-11 for more information.

Capacities Application English Metric For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System 11.4 qt 10.8 L Engine Oil with Filter 5.5 qt 5.2 L Fuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 L Transmission Fluid* 5.3 qt 5.0 L Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y *See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-16 for information on checking fluid level. All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Speciﬁcations Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 0.043 in (1.10 mm) Maintenance Schedule 6-1

Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Schedule Schedule Requirements Notice: Maintenance intervals, Introduction checks, inspections, replacement parts, and recommended fluids Important: Keep engine oil at the and lubricants as prescribed in Maintenance Schedule proper level and change as ...... 6-1 this manual are necessary to keep Introduction recommended. Maintenance Requirements .....6-1 this vehicle in good working Your Vehicle and the condition. Any damage caused Environment ...... 6-1 by failure to follow scheduled Using the Maintenance maintenance might not be covered ...... 6-2 Schedule by the vehicle warranty. Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-3 Additional Required Services ....6-5 Maintenance Footnotes ...... 6-7 Your Vehicle and the Owner Checks and Services ....6-8 Environment At Each Fuel Fill ...... 6-8 Have you purchased the GM At Least Once a Month ...... 6-9 Protection Plan? The Plan Proper vehicle maintenance not only At Least Once a Year ...... 6-9 supplements the vehicle warranties. helps to keep the vehicle in good Recommended Fluids See the Warranty and Owner working condition, but also helps the and Lubricants ...... 6-11 Assistance booklet or your environment. All recommended Maintenance Replacement maintenance is important. Improper ...... 6-12 dealer/retailer for details. Parts vehicle maintenance can even affect Engine Drive Belt Routing .....6-13 Maintenance Record ...... 6-13 the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from the vehicle. 6-2 Maintenance Schedule

To help protect the environment, and This schedule is for vehicles that: { CAUTION to keep the vehicle in good condition, • carry passengers and cargo be sure to maintain the vehicle within recommended limits on the properly. Performing maintenance work on Tire and Loading Information a vehicle can be dangerous. In label. See Loading the Vehicle on trying to do some jobs, you can Using the Maintenance page 4-16. Schedule be seriously injured. Do your own • are driven on reasonable road maintenance work only if you We want to help keep this vehicle in surfaces within legal driving have the required know-how and good working condition. But we do limits. the proper tools and equipment not know exactly how you will drive it. • use the recommended fuel. See for the job. If you have any doubt, You might drive very short distances Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. see your dealer/retailer to have a only a few times a week. Or you qualiﬁed technician do the work. The services in Scheduled might drive long distances all the See Doing Your Own Service Maintenance on page 6-3 should be time in very hot, dusty weather. Work on page 5-4. You might use the vehicle in making performed when indicated. See deliveries. Or you might drive it to Additional Required Services work, to do errands, or in many on page 6-5 and Maintenance Some maintenance services can other ways. Footnotes on page 6-7 for further be complex. So, unless you are information. technically qualiﬁed and have the Because of all the different ways necessary equipment, have your people use their vehicles, dealer/retailer do these jobs. maintenance needs vary. You might need more frequent checks and When you go to your dealer/retailer replacements. So please read the for service, trained and supported following and note how you drive. If service technicians will perform you have any questions on how to the work using genuine parts. keep the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer. Maintenance Schedule 6-3

To purchase service information, Scheduled Maintenance the oil life system whenever the oil see Service Publications Ordering is changed. See Engine Oil Life When the CHANGE ENGINE Information on page 7-13. System on page 5-14 for information OIL SOON message displays, on the Engine Oil Life System and Owner Checks and Services on service is required for the vehicle. resetting the system. page 6-8 tells what should be Have the vehicle serviced as checked, when to check it, and what soon as possible within the next When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL can easily be done to help keep 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible SOON message appears, certain the vehicle in good condition. that, if driving under the best services, checks, and inspections conditions, the engine oil life system are required. Required services The proper replacement parts, might not indicate that vehicle are described in the following fluids, and lubricants to use service is necessary for over a year. for “Maintenance I” and are listed in Recommended Fluids However, the engine oil and filter “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is and Lubricants on page 6-11 must be changed at least once recommended that the first service and Maintenance Replacement a year and at this time the system be Maintenance I, the second Parts on page 6-12. When the must be reset. Your dealer/retailer service be Maintenance II, and then vehicle is serviced, make sure these has trained service technicians alternate Maintenance I and are used. All parts should be who will perform this work using Maintenance II thereafter. However, replaced and all necessary repairs genuine parts and reset the system. in some cases, Maintenance II may done before you or anyone else be required more often. drives the vehicle. We recommend If the engine oil life system is ever the use of genuine parts from reset accidentally, service the vehicle your dealer/retailer. within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last service. Remember to reset 6-4 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed. Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance I. Always use Maintenance II whenever the message displays 10 months or more since the last service or if the message has not come on at all for one year. Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-12. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-14. An Emission Control •• Service. Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). •• Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air • Cleaner/Filter on page 5-15. See footnote (l). Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-49 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month •• on page 6-9. Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). •• Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as •• needed. Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in •• this section. Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). • Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). • Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). • Maintenance Schedule 6-5

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d) Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). • Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). • Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item. Additional Required Services 25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000 Service and Miles (Kilometers) (40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000) Inspect fuel system for damage or • ••••• leaks. Inspect exhaust system for loose or • ••••• damaged components. Replace engine air cleaner filter. See ••• Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-15. Change automatic transmission fluid ••• (severe service). See footnote (h). Change automatic transmission fluid • (normal service). 6-6 Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services (cont’d) 25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000 Service and Miles (Kilometers) (40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000) All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change transfer case fluid (severe service). ••• See footnote (m). All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change • transfer case fluid (normal service). Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control • Service. Engine cooling system service (or every five years, whichever occurs • first). An Emission Control Service. See footnote (i). Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. See • footnote (k). Maintenance Schedule 6-7

Maintenance Footnotes (d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, liftgate hinges. More frequent cracking, or contamination. lubrication may be required when (a) Visually inspect brake lines Clean the windshield and wiper exposed to a corrosive environment. and hoses for proper hook-up, blades, if contaminated. Replace Applying silicone grease on binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. wiper blades that are worn or weatherstrips with a clean cloth will Inspect disc brake pads for wear damaged. See Windshield Wiper make them last longer, seal and rotors for surface condition. Blade Replacement on page 5-36 better, and not stick or squeak. Inspect other brake parts, including and Windshield, Backglass, (g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system calipers, parking brake, etc. and Wiper Blades on page 5-84 for could indicate a problem. Have Check parking brake adjustment. more information. the system inspected and repaired (b) Visually inspect front and (e) Make sure the safety belt and the fluid level checked. Add rear suspension and steering reminder light and safety belt fluid if needed. system for damaged, loose, or assemblies are working properly. (h) Change automatic transmission missing parts or signs of wear. Look for any other loose or fluid if the vehicle is mainly Inspect power steering lines and damaged safety belt system parts. driven under one or more of these hoses for proper hook-up, binding, If you see anything that might conditions: leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. keep a safety belt system from doing (c) Visually inspect hoses and have its job, have it repaired. Have any − In heavy city traffic where the them replaced if they are cracked, torn or frayed safety belts replaced. outside temperature regularly swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all Also see Checking the Restraint reaches 90¡F (32¡C) or higher. pipes, fittings and clamps; replace Systems on page 1-59. − In hilly or mountainous terrain. with genuine parts as needed. To (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, − When doing frequent trailer help ensure proper operation, a hood latch assemblies, secondary towing. pressure test of the cooling system latches, pivots, spring anchor − Uses such as found in taxi, and pressure cap and cleaning and release pawl, hood and door police, or delivery service. the outside of the radiator and hinges, rear folding seats, and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year. 6-8 Maintenance Schedule

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling (m) Change transfer case fluid if the At Each Fuel Fill system. This service can be vehicle is mainly driven under It is important to perform these complex; you should have your one or more of these conditions: underhood checks at each fuel fill. dealer/retailer perform this service. − In heavy city traffic where See Engine Coolant on page 5-18 for the outside temperature regularly Engine Oil Level Check what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean reaches 90¡F (32¡C) or higher. radiator, condenser, pressure cap, Notice: It is important to check − In hilly or mountainous terrain. the engine oil regularly and keep it and filler neck. Pressure test the − When doing frequent trailer cooling system and pressure cap. at the proper level. Failure to keep towing. the engine oil at the proper level (j) Check system for interference or − Uses such as found in taxi, police, can cause damage to the engine binding and for damaged or missing or delivery service. not covered by the vehicle parts. Replace parts as needed. Owner Checks and warranty. Replace any components that have Services Check the engine oil level and add high effort or excessive wear. Do not the proper oil if necessary. See lubricate accelerator or cruise control These owner checks and services Engine Oil on page 5-12. cables. should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle (k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, Engine Coolant Level Check safety, dependability, and emission excessive cracks, or obvious Check the engine coolant level control performance. Your dealer/ ® damage. Replace belt if necessary. and add DEX-COOL coolant retailer can assist with these checks mixture if necessary. See Engine (l) If driving regularly under dusty and services. Coolant on page 5-18. conditions, inspect the filter at each Be sure any necessary repairs are engine oil change. completed at once. Whenever any Windshield Washer Fluid fluids or lubricants are added to the Level Check vehicle, make sure they are the Check the windshield washer fluid proper ones, as shown in level in the windshield washer Recommended Fluids and fluid reservoir and add the proper Lubricants on page 6-11. fluid if necessary. Maintenance Schedule 6-9

At Least Once a Month At Least Once a Year Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check Tire Inflation Check Starter Switch Check Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make { CAUTION sure they are inflated to the { CAUTION correct pressures. Do not forget to When you are doing this check the spare tire, if the vehicle When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move has one. See Inflation - Tire inspection, the vehicle could move Pressure on page 5-43.Ifthe suddenly. If the vehicle moves, suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. vehicle has a spare tire, check to you or others could be injured. make sure it is stored securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-67. 1. Before starting this check, be 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room Tire Wear Inspection sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be around the vehicle. Tire rotation may be required for parked on a level surface. high mileage highway drivers prior to 2. Firmly apply both the parking 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. the Engine Oil Life System service brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27. See Parking Brake on page 2-27. notification. Check the tires for Be ready to apply the regular wear and, if necessary, rotate the Do not use the accelerator brake immediately if the vehicle tires. See Tire Inspection and pedal, and be ready to turn off begins to move. Rotation on page 5-49. the engine immediately if it starts. 3. With the engine off, turn the 3. Try to start the engine in ignition to ON/RUN, but do not each gear. The vehicle should start the engine. Without applying start only in P (Park) or the regular brake, try to move the N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts shift lever out of P (Park) with in any other position, contact normal effort. If the shift lever your dealer/retailer for service. moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for service. 6-10 Maintenance Schedule

Ignition Transmission Parking Brake and Automatic • To check the P (Park) Lock Check Transmission P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability: With the engine running, shift While parked, and with the parking Mechanism Check to P (Park). Then release the brake set, try to turn the ignition to parking brake followed by the LOCK/OFF in each shift lever { CAUTION regular brake. position. When you are doing this check, • The ignition should turn to Contact your dealer/retailer if the vehicle could begin to move. service is required. LOCK/OFF only when the shift You or others could be injured lever is in P (Park). and property could be damaged. Underbody Flushing Service • The ignition key should come Make sure there is room in front At least every spring, use plain water out only in LOCK/OFF. of the vehicle in case it begins to to ﬂush any corrosive materials from Contact your dealer/retailer if roll. Be ready to apply the regular the underbody. Take care to clean service is required. brake at once should the vehicle thoroughly any areas where mud begin to move. and other debris can collect.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Tire Sealant and vehicle facing downhill. Keeping Compressor Kit your foot on the regular brake, set If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and the parking brake. Compressor Kit, check the sealant • To check the parking brake’s expiration date printed on the holding ability: With the engine instruction label of the kit at least running and the transmission once a year. See your dealer/retailer in N (Neutral), slowly remove for a replacement canister. foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. Maintenance Schedule 6-11

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identiﬁed below by name, part number, or speciﬁcation can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certiﬁed for Gasoline Engines starburst Engine Oil symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-12. ® Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 5-18. DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, Hydraulic Brake System in Canada 88862807). Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, Power Steering System in Canada 89021186). Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Key Lock Cylinders in Canada 10953474). Carrier Assembly — Differential (Rear Drive Module) and Transfer SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, Case (Power Transfer Unit) in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Speciﬁcation 9986115. Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of and Release Pawl NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. 6-12 Maintenance Schedule

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Hood and Door Hinges and Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Rear Folding Seat in Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, Weatherstrip Conditioning in Canada 10953518) or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identiﬁed below by name, part number, or speciﬁcation can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107 Wiper Blades Front Driver Side – 24.6 in (62.5 cm) 25941805 — Front Passenger Side – 20.9 in (53.0 cm) 25941804 — Rear – 11.8 in (30.0 cm) 25820122 — Maintenance Schedule 6-13

Engine Drive Belt Maintenance Record Routing After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, 3.6L V6 Engine odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-1. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts. 6-14 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Record Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II Maintenance Schedule 6-15

Maintenance Record (cont’d) Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II 6-16 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Record (cont’d) Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II Customer Assistance Information 7-1

Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance Customer Reporting Safety Defects to the United States and Information Assistance Government ...... 7-12 Reporting Safety Defects to Customer Satisfaction Information the Canadian Government ....7-13 Reporting Safety Defects Procedure to General Motors ...... 7-13 Your satisfaction and goodwill are Service Publications important to your dealer and to ...... 7-13 Customer Assistance and Ordering Information Buick. Normally, any concerns Information with the sales transaction or Customer Satisfaction Vehicle Data Recording and Procedure ...... 7-1 Privacy the operation of your vehicle will Online Owner Center ...... 7-3 Vehicle Data Recording be resolved by your GM dealer’s Customer Assistance for and Privacy ...... 7-14 sales or service departments. Event Data Recorders ...... 7-15 Sometimes, however, despite the Text Telephone (TTY) ® Users ...... 7-4 OnStar ...... 7-15 best intentions of all concerned, Customer Assistance Offices ....7-4 Navigation System ...... 7-16 misunderstandings can occur. GM Mobility Reimbursement Radio Frequency If your concern has not been Identiﬁcation (RFID) ...... 7-16 Program ...... 7-5 resolved to your satisfaction, the Roadside Assistance following steps should be taken: Program ...... 7-6 Scheduling Service STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Appointments ...... 7-8 with a member of dealership Courtesy Transportation ...... 7-8 management. Normally, concerns Collision Damage Repair ...... 7-9 can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager. 7-2 Customer Assistance Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Buick, please use of the program is free of charge member of dealership management, remember that your concern and your case will generally be it appears your concern cannot will likely be resolved at a dealer’s heard within 40 days. If you do not be resolved by the dealership facility. That is why we suggest agree with the decision given in without further help, in the U.S., you follow Step One first if you have your case, you may reject it contact the Buick Customer a concern. and proceed with any other venue Assistance Center by calling for relief available to you. 1-800-521-7300. In Canada, STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: contact General Motors of Canada Both General Motors and your You may contact the BBB Auto Customer Communication Centre dealer are committed to making sure Line Program using the toll-free by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) you are completely satisfied with telephone number or write them or 1-800-263-7854 (French). your new vehicle. However, in at the following address: the United States, if you continue to BBB Auto Line Program We encourage you to call the remain unsatisfied after following Council of Better Business toll-free number in order to give your the procedure outlined in Steps One Bureaus, Inc. inquiry prompt attention. Please and Two, you can file with the 4200 Wilson Boulevard have the following information BBB Auto Line Program to enforce Suite 800 available to give the Customer your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838 Assistance Representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 • Vehicle Identification Number. out of court program administered dr.bbb.org/goauto This is available from the by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all vehicle registration or title, or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by the instrument panel. the interpretation of the New vehicle age, mileage and other • Dealership name and location Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although factors. General Motors reserves you may be required to resort to the right to change eligibility • Vehicle delivery date and present this informal dispute resolution mileage limitations and/or discontinue its program prior to filing a court action, participation in this program. Customer Assistance Information 7-3

STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Online Owner Center Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor not feel your concerns have Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), Online Owner Center (U.S.) — been addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. www.gmownercenter.com/buick procedure outlined in Steps one Alternatively you may call the Information and services customized and two, General Motors of Canada General Motors Customer for your specific vehicle — all in Limited wants you to be aware of Communication Centre, one convenient place. its participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-3777 (English), Mediation/Arbitration program. 1-800-263-7854 (French), or • Digital owner manual, warranty General Motors of Canada Limited you may write to the Mediation/ information, and more has committed to binding Arbitration Program at the following • Online service and maintenance arbitration of owner disputes address. Your inquiry should be records involving factory-related vehicle accompanied by your Vehicle service claims. The program Identification Number (VIN). • Find Buick dealers for service nationwide provides for the review of the facts Mediation/Arbitration Program involved by an impartial third c/o Customer Communication • Exclusive privileges and offers party arbiter, and may include an Centre • Recall notices for your specific informal hearing before the arbiter. General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle The program is designed so Mail Code: CA1-163-005 ® that the entire dispute settlement 1908 Colonel Sam Drive • OnStar and GM Cardmember process, from the time you file your Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Services Earnings summaries complaint to the final decision, Other Helpful Links: should be completed in approximately 70 days. We believe Buick − www.buick.com our impartial program offers Buick Merchandise — advantages over courts in most www.buickmerchandise.com jurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and free of charge. 7-4 Customer Assistance Information

Help Center — • My Driveway: Access quick links Customer Assistance www.buick.com/helpcenter to parts and service estimates, Offices • FAQ check trade-in values, or schedule a service appointment Buick encourages customers to call • Contact Us by adding the vehicles you the toll-free number for assistance. My GM Canada (Canada) — own to your driveway proﬁle. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Buick, the letter • My Preferences: Manage your www.gm.ca should be addressed to: proﬁle and use tools and forms My GM Canada is a with greater ease. password-protected section of United States — Customer www.gm.ca where you can save To sign up, visit the My GM Canada Assistance information on GM vehicles, section within www.gm.ca. Buick Customer Assistance Center get personalized offers, and P.O. Box 33136 use handy tools and forms with Customer Assistance for Detroit, MI 48232-5136 greater ease. Text Telephone (TTY) www.Buick.com Here are a few of the valuable Users 1-800-521-7300 tools and services you will have 1-800-832-8425 (For Text access to: To assist customers who are deaf, Telephone devices (TTYs)) hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Roadside Assistance: • My Showroom: Find and save and who use Text Telephones 1-800-252-1112 information on vehicles and (TTYs), Buick has TTY equipment current offers in your area. From Puerto Rico: available at its Customer Assistance 1-800-496-9992 (English) • My Dealers/Retailers: Save Center. Any TTY user can 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) details such as address and communicate with Buick by dialing: 1-800-83-BUICK. TTY users in From U.S. Virgin Islands phone number for each of your 1-800-496-9994 preferred GM dealers/retailers. Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. Customer Assistance Information 7-5

Canada — Customer Mexico, Central America and GM Mobility Assistance Caribbean Islands/Countries Reimbursement Program General Motors of Canada Limited (Except Puerto Rico and Customer Communication Centre, U.S. Virgin Islands) — CA1-163-005 Customer Assistance 1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors de Mexico, S. de Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 R.L. de C.V. www.gmcanada.com Customer Assistance Center 1-800-263-3777 (English) Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Col. Lomas de Bezares 1-800-263-7854 (French) This program, available to qualiﬁed 1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. applicants, can reimburse you Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-508-0000 Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible 1-800-268-6800 aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle, such as Overseas — Customer hand controls or a wheelchair/ Assistance scooter lift. Please contact the local General The offer is available for a very Motors Business Unit. limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935. 7-6 Customer Assistance Information

General Motors of Canada also • Model, year, color, and license owner or driver if they decide the has a Mobility Program. Call plate number of the vehicle claims are made too often, or 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) the same type of claim is made • Odometer reading, Vehicle for details. TTY users call many times. Identification Number (VIN), and 1-800-263-3830. delivery date of the vehicle Services Provided Roadside Assistance • Description of the problem • Emergency Fuel Delivery: Program Delivery of enough fuel for Coverage the vehicle to get to the nearest For U.S. purchased vehicles, call Services are provided up to 5 years/ service station. 1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone 100,000 miles (160 000 km), (TTY): 1-888-889-2438). • Lock-Out Service: Service is whichever comes first. provided to unlock the vehicle For Canadian purchased vehicles, In the U.S., anyone driving the if you are locked out. A remote call 1-800-268-6800. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a unlock may be available if ® Service is available 24 hours a day, person driving the vehicle without you have OnStar . For security 365 days a year. permission from the owner is reasons, the driver must not covered. present identification before this service is given. Calling for Assistance Roadside Assistance is not a part of When calling Roadside Assistance, the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Emergency Tow From a Public have the following information Buick and General Motors of Road or Highway: Tow to the ready: Canada Limited reserve the right to nearest Buick dealer for warranty make any changes or discontinue service, or if the vehicle was in • Your name, home address, and a crash and cannot be driven. home telephone number the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification. Assistance is also given when the • Telephone number of your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, location Buick and General Motors of or snow. Canada Limited reserve the right to • Location of the vehicle limit services or payment to an Customer Assistance Information 7-7

• Flat Tire Change: Service is • Mounting, dismounting or • Trip Interruption Benefits and provided to change a flat tire changing of snow tires, chains, Assistance: Must be over with the spare tire. The spare tire, or other traction devices. 250 kilometres from where your if equipped, must be in good • Towing or services for vehicles trip was started to qualify. General condition and properly inflated. driven on a non-public road or Motors of Canada Limited It is the owner’s responsibility highway. requires pre-authorization, for the repair or replacement of original detailed receipts, and a the tire if it is not covered by Services Specific to Canadian copy of the repair orders. Once the warranty. Purchased Vehicles authorization has been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor • Battery Jump Start: Service is • Fuel delivery: Reimbursement will help you make arrangements provided to jump start a dead is approximately $5 Canadian. and explain how to receive battery. Diesel fuel delivery may be payment. • Trip Interruption Benefits and restricted. Propane and other Assistance: If your trip is fuels are not provided through • Alternative Service: If interrupted due to a warranty this service. assistance cannot be provided right away, the Roadside failure, incidental expenses may • Lock-Out Service: Vehicle Assistance advisor may give you be reimbursed during the 5 years/ registration is required. 100,000 miles (160 000 km) permission to get local emergency • Trip Routing Service: Detailed Powertrain warranty period. Items road service. You will receive maps of North America are considered are hotel, meals, and payment, up to $100, after provided when requested either rental car. sending the original receipt to with the most direct route or the Roadside Assistance. Mechanical Services Not Included in most scenic route. There is a failures may be covered, however Roadside Assistance six request limit per year. any cost for parts and labor for Additional travel information is repairs not covered by the • Impound towing caused by also available. Allow three weeks warranty are the owner violation of any laws. for delivery. responsibility. • Legal fines. 7-8 Customer Assistance Information

Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Appointments To enhance your ownership Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, When your vehicle requires warranty experience, we and our participating if you are unable to wait, GM helps service, contact your dealer/retailer dealers are proud to offer Courtesy to minimize your inconvenience by and request an appointment. By Transportation, a customer providing several transportation scheduling a service appointment support program for vehicles with options. Depending on the and advising your service consultant the Bumper to Bumper (Base circumstances, your dealer can of your transportation needs, your Warranty Coverage period in offer you one of the following: dealer/retailer can help minimize Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid speciﬁc warranty in your inconvenience. Shuttle Service both the U.S. and Canada. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled Shuttle service is the preferred into the service department Several courtesy transportation means of offering Courtesy immediately, keep driving it until it options are available to assist Transportation. Dealers may provide can be scheduled for service, in reducing your inconvenience you with shuttle service to get you unless, of course, the problem is when warranty repairs are required. to your destination with minimal safety-related. If it is, please Courtesy Transportation is not a interruption of your daily schedule. call your dealership/retailer, let them part of the New Vehicle Limited This includes one-way or round know this, and ask for instructions. Warranty. A separate booklet trip shuttle service within reasonable If the dealer/retailer requests entitled “Warranty and Owner time and distance parameters of you to bring the vehicle for service, Assistance Information” furnished the dealer’s area. you are urged to do so as early with each new vehicle provides in the work day as possible to allow detailed warranty coverage for the same day repair. information. Customer Assistance Information 7-9

Public Transportation or Fuel Rental reimbursement will be limited General Motors reserves the right to Reimbursement and must be supported by original unilaterally modify, change or If your vehicle requires overnight receipts. This requires that you sign discontinue Courtesy Transportation warranty repairs, and public and complete a rental agreement at any time and to resolve all transportation is used instead of the and meet state/provincial, local, and questions of claim eligibility pursuant dealer’s shuttle service, the expense rental vehicle provider requirements. to the terms and conditions must be supported by original Requirements vary and may include described herein at its sole receipts and can only be up to the minimum age requirements, discretion. maximum amount allowed by GM for insurance coverage, credit card, etc. shuttle service. In addition, for U.S. You are responsible for fuel usage Collision Damage Repair charges and may also be customers, should you arrange If your vehicle is involved in a transportation through a friend or responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental collision and it is damaged, have relative, limited reimbursement for the damage repaired by a qualified reasonable fuel expenses may be usage beyond the completion of the repair. technician using the proper available. Claim amounts should equipment and quality replacement reflect actual costs and be supported It may not be possible to provide a parts. Poorly performed collision by original receipts. See your dealer like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. repairs diminish your vehicle’s for information regarding the Additional Program resale value, and safety allowance amounts for performance can be compromised reimbursement of fuel or other Information in subsequent collisions. transportation costs. All program options, such as shuttle Collision Parts Courtesy Rental Vehicle service, may not be available at every dealer. Please contact Genuine GM Collision parts are new Your dealer may arrange to provide your dealer for specific information parts made with the same materials you with a courtesy rental vehicle or about availability. All Courtesy and construction methods as the reimburse you for a rental vehicle Transportation arrangements will be parts with which your vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept administered by appropriate was originally built. Genuine GM for an overnight warranty repair. dealer personnel. Collision parts are your best choice 7-10 Customer Assistance Information to ensure that your vehicle’s vehicle. As a result, these parts There are significant differences in designed appearance, durability, may fit poorly, exhibit premature the quality of coverage afforded and safety are preserved. The use durability/corrosion problems, by various insurance policy terms. of Genuine GM parts can help and may not perform properly in Many insurance policies provide maintain your GM New Vehicle subsequent collisions. Aftermarket reduced protection to your Warranty. parts are not covered by your GM vehicle by limiting compensation GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, for damage repairs by using Recycled original equipment parts and any vehicle failure related to aftermarket collision parts. Some may also be used for repair. such parts are not covered by insurance companies will not specify These parts are typically removed that warranty. aftermarket collision parts. When from vehicles that were total purchasing insurance, we losses in prior crashes. In most Repair Facility recommend that you assure your cases, the parts being recycled are vehicle will be repaired with from undamaged sections of the We recommend that you choose a GM original equipment collision vehicle. A recycled original collision repair facility that meets parts. If such insurance coverage is equipment GM part, may be an your needs before you ever need not available from your current acceptable choice to maintain your collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer insurance carrier, consider switching vehicle’s originally designed may have a collision repair center to another insurance carrier. appearance and safety performance, with GM-trained technicians and however, the history of these state of the art equipment, or be able If your vehicle is leased, the leasing parts is not known. Such parts are to recommend a collision repair company may require you to not covered by your GM New center that has GM-trained have insurance that assures repairs Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any technicians and comparable with Genuine GM Original related failures are not covered equipment. Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) by that warranty. Insuring Your Vehicle parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease Aftermarket collision parts are also Protect your investment in your carefully, as you may be charged available. These are made by GM vehicle with comprehensive at the end of your lease for companies other than GM and may and collision insurance coverage. poor quality repairs. not have been tested for your Customer Assistance Information 7-11

If a Crash Occurs • If you need roadside assistance, number, and a general description of the damage to Here is what to do if you are call GM Roadside Assistance. the other vehicle. involved in a crash. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6 for more • If possible, call your insurance • Check to make sure that you are information. company from the scene of all right. If you are uninjured, the crash. They will walk make sure that no one else in • If your vehicle cannot be driven, you through the information they your vehicle, or the other vehicle, know where the towing service will need. If they ask for a is injured. will be taking it. Get a card from the tow truck operator or police report, phone or go to the • If there has been an injury, call write down the driver’s name, the police department headquarters emergency services for help. service’s name, and the phone the next day and you can get Do not leave the scene of a crash number. a copy of the report for a nominal until all matters have been fee. In some states/provinces • Remove any valuables from your taken care of. Move your vehicle with “no fault” insurance laws, a vehicle before it is towed away. only if its position puts you in report may not be necessary. Make sure this includes your danger or you are instructed to This is especially true if there are insurance information and move it by a police officer. no injuries and both vehicles registration if you keep these are driveable. • Give only the necessary and items in your vehicle. requested information to • Choose a reputable collision • Gather the important information police and other parties involved repair facility for your vehicle. you will need from the other in the crash. Do not discuss Whether you select a dealer/ driver. Things like name, your personal condition, mental retailer or a private collision address, phone number, driver’s frame of mind, or anything repair facility to ﬁx the damage, license number, vehicle license unrelated to the crash. This will make sure you are comfortable plate, vehicle make, model help guard against post-crash with them. Remember, you and model year, Vehicle legal action. will have to feel comfortable with Identiﬁcation Number (VIN), their work for a long time. insurance company and policy 7-12 Customer Assistance Information

• Once you have an estimate, read Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Reporting Safety it carefully and make sure you but you must live with the repair. understand what work will Depending on your policy limits, your Defects be performed on your vehicle. insurance company may initially If you have a question, ask for value the repair using aftermarket Reporting Safety Defects an explanation. Reputable shops parts. Discuss this with your repair to the United States welcome this opportunity. professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle Government Managing the Vehicle Damage is leased you may be obligated to If you believe that your vehicle Repair Process have the vehicle repaired with has a defect which could In the event that your vehicle Genuine GM parts, even if your cause a crash or could cause requires damage repairs, GM insurance coverage does not pay injury or death, you should recommends that you take an active the full cost. immediately inform the National role in its repair. If you have a If another party’s insurance Highway Traffic Safety pre-determined repair facility company is paying for the repairs, Administration (NHTSA) in of choice, take your vehicle there, you are not obligated to accept addition to notifying General or have it towed there. Specify to a repair valuation based on Motors. the facility that any required that insurance company’s collision If NHTSA receives similar replacement collision parts be policy repair limits, as you have complaints, it may open an original equipment parts, either no contractual limits with that investigation, and if it ﬁnds that new Genuine GM parts or recycled company. In such cases, you can a safety defect exists in a original GM parts. Remember, have control of the repair and group of vehicles, it may order a recycled parts will not be covered parts choices as long as cost stays recall and remedy campaign. by your GM vehicle warranty. within reasonable limits. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors. Customer Assistance Information 7-13

To contact NHTSA, you may Reporting Safety Defects Service Publications call the Vehicle Safety Hotline to General Motors Ordering Information toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Service Manuals safercar.gov; or write to: Transport Canada) in a situation like this, please notify General Motors. Service Manuals have the diagnosis Administrator, NHTSA and repair information on engines, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Call 1-800-521-7300, or write: transmission, axle suspension, Washington D.C., 20590 Buick Customer Assistance Center brakes, electrical, steering, You can also obtain other P.O. Box 33136 body, etc. Detroit, MI 48232-5136 information about motor vehicle Service Bulletins safety from safercar.gov. In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 Service Bulletins give additional Reporting Safety Defects (French), or write: technical service information needed to the Canadian to knowledgeably service General General Motors of Canada Limited Motors cars and trucks. Each Government Customer Communication Centre, bulletin contains instructions to If you live in Canada, and you CA1-163-005 assist in the diagnosis and service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive believe that your vehicle has of your vehicle. Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, in addition to Owner Information notifying General Motors of Owner publications are written Canada Limited. Call them at speciﬁcally for owners and intended 1-800-333-0510 or write to: to provide basic operational Transport Canada information about the vehicle. Road Safety Branch The owner manual includes the 2780 Sheffield Road Maintenance Schedule for Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 all models. 7-14 Customer Assistance Information

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, ORDER TOLL FREE: Vehicle Data Owner Manual, and Warranty 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday Booklet. 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time Recording and RETAIL SELL PRICE: For Credit Card Orders Only Privacy (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee Your GM vehicle has a number of Helm, Inc. on the World Wide sophisticated computers that Without Portfolio: Owner Web at: helminc.com Manual only. record information about the Or you can write to: vehicle’s performance and how it is RETAIL SELL PRICE: driven. For example, your vehicle $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 uses computer modules to monitor Current and Past Model Order Detroit, MI 48207 and control engine and transmission Forms performance, to monitor the Prices are subject to change without conditions for airbag deployment Technical Service Bulletins and notice and without incurring and deploy airbags in a crash and, Manuals are available for current obligation. Allow ample time for if so equipped, to provide antilock and past model GM vehicles. delivery. braking to help the driver control To request an order form, specify Note to Canadian Customers: All the vehicle. These modules year and model name of the vehicle. listed prices are quoted in U.S. may store data to help your dealer/ funds. Canadian residents are to retailer technician service your make checks payable in U.S. funds. vehicle. Some modules may also store data about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings. Customer Assistance Information 7-15

Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better GM will not access this data or understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with the This vehicle has an Event in which crashes and injuries consent of the vehicle owner or, Data Recorder (EDR). The main occur. if the vehicle is leased, with purpose of an EDR is to record, in Important: EDR data is recorded the consent of the lessee; in certain crash or near crash-like by your vehicle only if a non-trivial response to an official request of situations, such as an airbag crash situation occurs; no data police or similar government office; deployment or hitting a road is recorded by the EDR under as part of GM’s defense of obstacle, data that will assist in normal driving conditions and no litigation through the discovery understanding how a vehicle’s personal data (e.g., name, gender, process; or, as required by law. Data systems performed. The EDR is age, and crash location) is that GM collects or receives may designed to record data related to recorded. However, other parties, also be used for GM research needs vehicle dynamics and safety such as law enforcement, could or may be made available to systems for a short period of time, combine the EDR data with the type others for research purposes, where typically 30 seconds or less. of personally identifying data a need is shown and the data is The EDR in this vehicle is designed routinely acquired during a crash not tied to a speciﬁc vehicle to record such data as: investigation. or vehicle owner. • How various systems in your vehicle were operating To read data recorded by an EDR, ® special equipment is required, OnStar • Whether or not the driver and and access to the vehicle or the If your vehicle has OnStar and you passenger safety belts were EDR is needed. In addition to subscribe to the OnStar services, buckled/fastened the vehicle manufacturer, other please refer to the OnStar • How far, if at all, the driver was parties, such as law enforcement, Terms and Conditions for pressing the accelerator and/or that have the special equipment, can information on data collection and ¨ brake pedal read the information if they have use. See also OnStar System access to the vehicle or the EDR. on page 2-41 in this manual • How fast the vehicle was for more information. traveling 7-16 Customer Assistance Information

Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions. Radio Frequency Identiﬁcation (RFID) RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security, as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other GM system containing personal information. INDEX i-1

A Airbag System (cont.) Appearance Care (cont.) Accessories and What Will You See After Interior Cleaning ...... 5-80 Modifications ...... 5-3 an Airbag Inflates? ...... 1-51 Leather ...... 5-82 Accessory Power ...... 2-22 When Should an Airbag Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-86 Accessory Power Outlets ...... 3-18 Inflate? ...... 1-49 Tires ...... 5-85 Adaptive Forward Lighting Where Are the Airbags? ..... 1-47 Underbody Maintenance .... 5-86 System ...... 3-14 Airbags Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-83 Adding Equipment to Your Passenger Status Weatherstrips ...... 5-83 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-58 Indicator ...... 3-32 Windshield, Backglass, Additional Required Services, All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-33 and Wiper Blades ...... 5-84 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-5 All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) Assistance Program, Additives, Fuel ...... 5-5 Add-On Electrical System ...... 4-7 Roadside ...... 7-6 Equipment ...... 5-88 Analog Clock ...... 3-20 Audio System ...... 3-68 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ...... 5-15 Antilock Brake System (ABS) .... 4-4 Audio Steering Wheel Airbag Warning Light ...... 3-35 Controls ...... 3-119 Readiness Light ...... 3-31 Appearance Care Navigation/Radio System, Airbag System ...... 1-45 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated see Navigation Manual .... 3-98 Adding Equipment to Wheels ...... 5-85 Setting the Clock ...... 3-69 Your Airbag-Equipped Care of Safety Belts ...... 5-82 Audio System(s) ...... 3-70 Vehicle ...... 1-58 Chemical Paint Spotting ..... 5-86 Audio Systems How Does an Airbag Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Radio Reception ...... 3-120 Restrain? ...... 1-51 Lenses ...... 5-83 Rear Seat (RSA) ...... 3-117 Passenger Sensing Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-81 Theft-Deterrent Feature .... 3-119 System ...... 1-53 Finish Care ...... 5-84 Automatic Transmission Servicing Your Finish Damage ...... 5-86 Fluid ...... 5-16 Airbag-Equipped Instrument Panel, Vinyl, Operation ...... 2-24 Vehicle ...... 1-57 and Other Plastic What Makes an Airbag Surfaces ...... 5-82 Inflate? ...... 1-50 i-2 INDEX

B C Check Engine Lamp ...... 3-37 Battery ...... 5-28 Calibration ...... 3-48 Checking Things Under Electric Power California the Hood ...... 5-9 Management ...... 3-16 Perchlorate Materials Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 5-86 Run-Down Protection ...... 3-17 Requirements ...... 5-4 Belt Routing, Engine ...... 6-13 Child Restraints ® California Fuel ...... 5-5 Bluetooth ...... 3-98 Infants and Young California Proposition 65 Brake Children ...... 1-28 Warning ...... 5-3 Emergencies ...... 4-5 Lower Anchors and Tethers Camera, Rear Vision ...... 2-37 Brake Fluid ...... 5-26 for Children ...... 1-34 Canadian Owners ...... ii Brakes ...... 5-26 Older Children ...... 1-25 Capacities and Antilock ...... 4-4 Securing a Child Restraint in Speciﬁcations ...... 5-94 Parking ...... 2-27 a Rear Seat Position ...... 1-40 Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-11 System Warning Light ...... 3-34 Securing a Child Restraint Braking ...... 4-3 Engine Exhaust ...... 2-30 in the Right Front Seat Braking in Emergencies ...... 4-5 Liftgate ...... 2-10 Position ...... 1-42 Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 2-20 Winter Driving ...... 4-13 Systems ...... 1-31 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-35 Care of Where to Put the Fog Lamp ...... 3-14 Safety Belts ...... 5-82 Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-34 Restraint ...... 1-32 Cargo Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-33 Circuit Breakers ...... 5-88 Tie Downs ...... 2-52 Headlamps ...... 5-33 Cleaning Cargo Management System .... 2-52 High Intensity Discharge Aluminum or Chrome-Plated CD, MP3 ...... 3-87, 3-91 (HID) Lighting ...... 5-34 Wheels ...... 5-85 Center Console Storage ...... 2-49 License Plate Lamps ...... 5-35 Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-83 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Chains, Tire ...... 5-57 Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-81 Stoplamps and Charging System Light ...... 3-33 Finish Care ...... 5-84 Sidemarker Lamps ...... 5-34 Buying New Tires ...... 5-51 INDEX i-3

Cleaning (cont.) Compressor Kit, Tire D Instrument Panel, Vinyl, Sealant ...... 5-59 Damage Repair, Collision ...... 7-9 and Other Plastic Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2-16 Data Recorders Surfaces ...... 5-82 Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-3 Event ...... 7-15 Interior ...... 5-80 Coolant Daytime Running Lamps/ Leather ...... 5-82 Engine ...... 5-18 Automatic Headlamp Tires ...... 5-85 Engine Temperature Gage ... 3-36 System ...... 3-13 Underbody Maintenance .... 5-86 Engine Temperature Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-83 Warning Light ...... 3-36 Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 3-15 Weatherstrips ...... 5-83 Cooled Seats ...... 1-4 Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 3-16 Windshield, Backglass, Cooling System ...... 5-17 Delayed Headlamps ...... 3-13 and Wiper Blades ...... 5-84 Courtesy Transportation ...... 7-8 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Climate Control System Cruise Control ...... 3-10 DIC Compass ...... 3-48 Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-25 Cruise Control Light ...... 3-41 Disc, MP3 ...... 3-87, 3-91 Rear Air Conditioning Cupholders ...... 2-49 Doing Your Own and Heating System ...... 3-26 Customer Assistance ...... 7-4 Service Work ...... 5-4 Rear Air Conditioning Offices ...... 7-4 Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-15 and Heating System, Text Telephone (TTY) Dome Lamps ...... 3-14 Electronic ...... 3-27 Users ...... 7-4 Door Climate Control Systems Customer Information Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Dual Automatic ...... 3-20 Service Publications Locks ...... 2-8 Clock ...... 3-20 Ordering Information ...... 7-13 Power Door Locks ...... 2-8 Clock, Setting ...... 3-69 Customer Satisfaction Programmable Automatic Collision Damage Repair ...... 7-9 Procedure ...... 7-1 Door Locks ...... 2-9 Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-79 Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-9 Compass ...... 3-48 i-4 INDEX

Drive Systems Dual Automatic Climate Engine All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-33 Control System ...... 3-20 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 5-15 Driver Information DVD Check and Service Engine Center (DIC) ...... 3-42 Rear Seat Entertainment Soon Lamp ...... 3-37 DIC Operation and System ...... 3-108 Compartment Overview ...... 5-10 Displays ...... 3-43 Coolant ...... 5-18 DIC Vehicle Coolant Heater ...... 2-23 Customization ...... 3-59 E Coolant DIC Warnings and EDR ...... 7-14 Temperature Gage ...... 3-36 Messages ...... 3-50 Electrical Equipment Coolant Temperature Driving Add-On Equipment ...... 5-88 Warning Light ...... 3-36 At Night ...... 4-10 Electrical System Cooling System ...... 5-17 Before a Long Trip ...... 4-12 Fuses and Circuit Drive Belt Routing ...... 6-13 Defensive ...... 4-2 Breakers ...... 5-88 Exhaust ...... 2-30 Drunk ...... 4-2 Instrument Panel Oil ...... 5-12 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-12 Fuse Block ...... 5-89 Oil Life System ...... 5-14 Hill and Mountain Roads .... 4-12 Power Windows and Overheated Protection In Rain and on Other Power Options ..... 5-88 Operating Mode ...... 5-24 Wet Roads ...... 4-11 Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-91 Overheating ...... 5-22 Loss of Control ...... 4-9 Windshield Wiper Fuses .... 5-88 Starting ...... 2-22 Electronic Immobilizer Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-9 ® Entry Lighting ...... 3-15 Rocking Your Vehicle PASS-Key III+ ...... 2-18 Reporting Safety Defects to Get it Out ...... 4-15 Electronic Immobilizer to the United States Operation Winter ...... 4-13 ® Government ...... 7-12 Driving for Better Fuel PASS-Key III+ ...... 2-18 Event Data Recorders ...... 7-15 Economy ...... 4-1 Extender, Safety Belt ...... 1-25 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-12 INDEX i-5

F Fuses H Fuses and Circuit Filter Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-34 Breakers ...... 5-88 Engine Air Cleaner ...... 5-15 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 3-5 Instrument Panel Finish Damage ...... 5-86 Head Restraints ...... 1-2 Fuse Block ...... 5-89 Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 3-5 Headlamp Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-8 Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-91 Aiming ...... 5-33 Flat Tire ...... 5-57 Windshield Wiper ...... 5-88 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 5-67 Headlamps Flat Tire, Storing ...... 5-76 Adaptive Forward Lighting Floor Mats ...... 2-51 G System ...... 3-14 Fluid Gage Bulb Replacement ...... 5-33 Automatic Transmission ..... 5-16 Speedometer ...... 3-30 Daytime Running Lamps/ Power Steering ...... 5-24 Tachometer ...... 3-30 Automatic Headlamp Windshield Washer ...... 5-25 Voltmeter Gage ...... 3-33 System ...... 3-13 Fog Lamp Gages Delayed ...... 3-13 Fog ...... 3-14 Engine Coolant Exterior Lamps ...... 3-12 Fog Lamp Light ...... 3-41 Temperature ...... 3-36 Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-8 Fuel ...... 5-5 Fuel ...... 3-42 High Intensity Discharge Additives ...... 5-5 Garage Door Opener ...... 2-44 (HID) Lighting ...... 5-34 California Fuel ...... 5-5 Gasoline High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7 Economy Driving ...... 4-1 Octane ...... 5-5 Heated Seats ...... 1-4 Filling a Portable Fuel Speciﬁcations ...... 5-5 Heater Container ...... 5-8 Glove Box ...... 2-49 Engine Coolant ...... 2-23 Filling the Tank ...... 5-7 GM Mobility Reimbursement High Voltage Devices Fuels in Foreign Countries .... 5-6 Program ...... 7-5 and Wiring ...... 5-87 Gage ...... 3-42 Highbeam On Light ...... 3-41 Gasoline Octane ...... 5-5 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-12 Gasoline Speciﬁcations ...... 5-5 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-12 i-6 INDEX

Hood K Lights Checking Things Under ...... 5-9 Airbag Readiness ...... 3-31 Keyless Entry, Remote Release ...... 5-9 Antilock Brake System Operation ...... 2-4 Horn ...... 3-5 (ABS) Warning ...... 3-35 Keyless Entry System ...... 2-3 How to Wear Safety Brake System Warning ...... 3-34 Keys ...... 2-2 Belts Properly ...... 1-16 Charging System ...... 3-33 Cruise Control ...... 3-41 I L Engine Coolant Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 5-38 Temperature Warning ..... 3-36 Ignition Positions ...... 2-21 Lamp Exterior Lamps ...... 3-12 Infants and Young Children, Malfunction Indicator ...... 3-37 Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-8 Restraints ...... 1-28 Lamps Fog Lamp ...... 3-41 Inﬂation - Tire Pressure ...... 5-43 Dome ...... 3-14 Highbeam On ...... 3-41 Instrument Panel Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-15 High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7 Brightness ...... 3-14 License Plate ...... 5-35 Oil Pressure ...... 3-40 Cluster ...... 3-29 Reading ...... 3-16 Passenger Airbag Overview ...... 3-4 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-20 Status Indicator ...... 3-32 Storage Area ...... 2-49 LATCH System for Safety Belt Reminders ...... 3-30 Introduction ...... 6-1 Child Restraints ...... 1-34 Security ...... 3-41 ® Liftgate StabiliTrak Indicator ...... 3-35 J Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-10 Tire Pressure ...... 3-37 Jump Starting ...... 5-29 Liftgate, Power ...... 2-11 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 3-41 Lighting Loading Your Vehicle ...... 4-16 Delayed Entry ...... 3-15 Locks Delayed Exit ...... 3-16 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Entry ...... 3-15 Door ...... 2-8 Parade Dimming ...... 3-16 Lockout Protection ...... 2-9 INDEX i-7

Locks (cont.) Maintenance Schedule (cont.) N Power Door ...... 2-8 Owner Checks and Navigation System, Privacy ... 7-16 Programmable Automatic Services ...... 6-8 Navigation/Radio System, Door Locks ...... 2-9 Recommended Fluids see Navigation Manual ...... 3-98 Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-9 and Lubricants ...... 6-11 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 2-20 Loss of Control ...... 4-9 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-3 Lower Anchors and Tethers Using ...... 6-2 for Children ...... 1-34 Your Vehicle and the O Luggage Carrier ...... 2-51 Environment ...... 6-1 Odometer ...... 3-30 Lumbar Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 3-37 Off-Road Manual Controls ...... 1-3 Manual Lumbar Controls ...... 1-3 Recovery ...... 4-9 Power Controls ...... 1-4 Memory Seat and Mirrors ...... 1-5 Oil Message Engine ...... 5-12 M DIC Warnings and Engine Oil Life System ...... 5-14 Messages ...... 3-50 Pressure Light ...... 3-40 Maintenance Mirrors Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-25 Footnotes ...... 6-7 Automatic Dimming Online Owner Center ...... 7-3 Maintenance Schedule Rearview ...... 2-31 OnStar, Privacy ...... 7-15 Additional Required Outside Convex Mirror ...... 2-34 OnStar® System, see Services ...... 6-5 Outside Heated Mirrors ...... 2-34 OnStar® Manual ...... 2-41 At Each Fuel Fill ...... 6-8 Outside Power Foldaway Operation, Universal Home At Least Once a Month ...... 6-9 Mirrors ...... 2-32 Remote System ...... 2-45 At Least Once a Year ...... 6-9 Outside Power Mirrors ...... 2-32 Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-25 Maintenance Record ...... 6-13 Park Tilt ...... 2-33 Outlets Maintenance Replacement MP3 ...... 3-87, 3-91 Accessory Power ...... 3-18 Parts ...... 6-12 Outside Maintenance Requirements ... 6-1 Convex Mirror ...... 2-34 Heated Mirrors ...... 2-34 i-8 INDEX

Outside (cont.) Perchlorate Materials R Power Foldaway Mirrors .... 2-32 Requirements, California ...... 5-4 Radio Frequency Power Mirrors ...... 2-32 Phone ® Identiﬁcation (RFID), Overheated Engine Protection Bluetooth ...... 3-98 Privacy ...... 7-16 Operating Mode ...... 5-24 Power Radio(s) ...... 3-70 Owner Checks and Services ..... 6-8 Door Locks ...... 2-8 Radios Owners, Canadian ...... ii Electrical System ...... 5-88 Navigation/Radio System, Liftgate ...... 2-11 Lumbar Controls ...... 1-4 see Navigation Manual .... 3-98 Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Reception ...... 3-120 P Setting the Clock ...... 3-69 Paint, Damage ...... 5-86 Current ...... 3-19 Theft-Deterrent ...... 3-119 Retained Accessory Parade Dimming ...... 3-16 Reading Lamps ...... 3-16 (RAP) ...... 2-22 Rear Air Conditioning and Park Seat ...... 1-3 Shifting Into ...... 2-28 Steering Fluid ...... 5-24 Heating System ...... 3-26 Shifting Out of ...... 2-29 Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Rear Air Conditioning Park Aid ...... 2-34 Steering Column ...... 3-6 and Heating System Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-33 Windows ...... 2-14 and Electronic Climate Parking Pregnancy, Using Controls ...... 3-27 Assist ...... 2-34 Safety Belts ...... 1-25 Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-9 Over Things That Burn ...... 2-29 Privacy ...... 7-14 Rear Seat Armrest ...... 2-52 Parking Brake ...... 2-27 Navigation System ...... 7-16 Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Passenger Airbag Status OnStar ...... 7-15 System ...... 3-117 Indicator ...... 3-32 Radio Frequency Rear Seat Entertainment Passenger Sensing System .... 1-53 Identiﬁcation (RFID) ...... 7-16 System ...... 3-108 Passing ...... 4-9 Programmable Automatic Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-8 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Door Locks ...... 2-9 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) .... 2-37 Immobilizer ...... 2-18 Proposition 65 Warning, Rear Window Washer/Wiper .... 3-9 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic California ...... 5-3 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Immobilizer Operation ...... 2-18 Dimming ...... 2-31 INDEX i-9

Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-6 Retained Accessory Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-3 Recommended Fluids Power (RAP) ...... 2-22 Additional Required and Lubricants ...... 6-11 Roadside Assistance Services ...... 6-5 Recreational Vehicle Towing .... 4-21 Program ...... 7-6 Scheduling Appointments ...... 7-8 Reimbursement Program, Rocking Your Vehicle to Sealant Kit, Tire ...... 5-59 GM Mobility ...... 7-5 Get it Out ...... 4-15 Seats Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roof Head Restraints ...... 1-2 System ...... 2-3 Sunroof ...... 2-54 Heated and Cooled Seats .... 1-4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Running the Vehicle Heated Seats ...... 1-4 System, Operation ...... 2-4 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-5 While Parked ...... 2-30 Manual Lumbar ...... 1-3 Removing the Flat Tire and Memory, Mirrors ...... 1-5 Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-70 S Power Lumbar ...... 1-4 Removing the Spare Power Seats ...... 1-3 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 3-30 Tire and Tools ...... 5-68 Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-8 Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-35 Safety Belts Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-6 Replacement Parts, Care of ...... 5-82 Third Row Seat ...... 1-10 Maintenance ...... 6-12 Extender ...... 1-25 Second Row Center Reporting Safety Defects How to Wear Safety Console ...... 2-50 Canadian Government ...... 7-13 Belts Properly ...... 1-16 Secondary Latch System ...... 5-74 General Motors ...... 7-13 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-20 Securing a Child Restraint Reporting Safety Defects Safety Belts Are for Rear Seat Position ...... 1-40 to the Canadian Everyone ...... 1-12 Right Front Seat Position .... 1-42 Government ...... 7-13 Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-25 Security Light ...... 3-41 Restraint System Check Safety Defects Service ...... 5-3 Checking the Restraint Reporting to General Accessories and Systems ...... 1-59 Motors ...... 7-13 Modiﬁcations ...... 5-3 Replacing Restraint System Reporting to the United Adding Equipment to the Parts After a Crash ...... 1-60 States Government ...... 7-12 Outside of the Vehicle ..... 5-4 Safety Warnings and Symbols .... iii Doing Your Own Work ...... 5-4 i-10 INDEX

Service (cont.) Starting the Engine ...... 2-22 T Engine Soon Lamp ...... 3-37 Steering ...... 4-8 Tachometer ...... 3-30 Publications Ordering Steering Wheel Controls, Taillamps Information ...... 7-13 Audio ...... 3-119 Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Scheduling Appointments ..... 7-8 Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Sidemarker Lamps ...... 5-34 Service Parts Identiﬁcation Wheel and Telescopic Telescopic Steering Column, Label ...... 5-87 Steering Column ...... 3-6 Power Tilt Wheel ...... 3-6 Servicing Your Steering Wheel, Tilt and Telescopic Wheel ...... 3-6 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-57 Telescopic ...... 3-6 Text Telephone (TTY) Users .... 7-4 Setting the Clock ...... 3-69 Storage Areas Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-119 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-86 Cargo Management Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-16 Shifting System ...... 2-52 Content Theft-Deterrent ..... 2-16 Out of Park ...... 2-29 Center Console ...... 2-49 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Shifting Into Park ...... 2-28 Cupholders ...... 2-49 Immobilizer ...... 2-18 Signals, Turn and Glove Box ...... 2-49 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Lane-Change ...... 3-7 Instrument Panel ...... 2-49 Immobilizer Operation .... 2-18 Spare Tire Luggage Carrier ...... 2-51 Third-Row Seats ...... 1-10 Compact ...... 5-79 Rear Seat Armrest ...... 2-52 Tilt Wheel ...... 3-6 Installing ...... 5-70 Second Row Center Time, Setting ...... 3-69 Removing ...... 5-68 Console ...... 2-50 Tire Storing ...... 5-76 Storing the Tire Sealant Pressure Light ...... 3-37 Speciﬁcations and and Compressor Kit ...... 5-66 Tire Sealant and Capacities ...... 5-94 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Compressor Kit ...... 5-66 Speedometer ...... 3-30 Ice, or Snow ...... 4-15 Tires ...... 5-37 StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..... 3-35 Sun Visors ...... 2-16 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated StabiliTrak® System ...... 4-5 Sunroof ...... 2-54 Wheels, Cleaning ...... 5-85 Start Vehicle, Remote ...... 2-5 Buying New Tires ...... 5-51 Chains ...... 5-57 INDEX i-11

Tires (cont.) Tires (cont.) U Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-67 Wheel Alignment and Ultrasonic Rear Parking Cleaning ...... 5-85 Tire Balance ...... 5-55 Assist (URPA) ...... 2-34 Compact Spare ...... 5-79 Wheel Replacement ...... 5-55 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ... 5-54 Different Size ...... 5-53 When It Is Time for Universal Home Remote If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 5-57 New Tires ...... 5-51 System ...... 2-44 Inflation - Tire Pressure ..... 5-43 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 2-26 Operation ...... 2-45 Inspection and Rotation ..... 5-49 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 3-41 Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-70 Towing Pressure Monitor Recreational Vehicle ...... 4-21 V Operation ...... 5-46 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-24 Vehicle Control ...... 4-3 Pressure Monitor System .... 5-44 Your Vehicle ...... 4-20 Loading ...... 4-16 Removing the Flat Tire ...... 5-70 Traction ® Running While Parked ...... 2-30 Removing the Spare StabiliTrak System ...... 4-5 Symbols ...... iii Tire and Tools ...... 5-68 Transmission Vehicle Customization, DIC .... 3-59 Sealant and Fluid, Automatic ...... 5-16 Vehicle Data Recording Compressor Kit ...... 5-59 Transmission Operation, and Privacy ...... 7-14 Secondary Latch System .... 5-74 Automatic ...... 2-24 Vehicle Data Recording, Sidewall Labeling ...... 5-38 Transportation, Courtesy ...... 7-8 Radio Frequency (RFID) .... 7-16 Storing a Flat or Spare Turn and Lane-Change Vehicle Identification Tire and Tools ...... 5-76 Signals ...... 3-7 Number (VIN) ...... 5-87 Terminology and Turn Signal/Multifunction Service Parts Identification Definitions ...... 5-40 Lever ...... 3-6 Label ...... 5-87 Uniform Tire Quality Vehicle, Remote Start ...... 2-5 Grading ...... 5-54 Ventilation Adjustment ...... 3-25 Visors ...... 2-16 Voltage Devices, and Wiring .... 5-87 Voltmeter Gage ...... 3-33 i-12 INDEX

W Windshield (cont.) Washer ...... 3-8 Warning Lights, Gages, Washer Fluid ...... 5-25 and Indicators ...... 3-28 Wiper Blade Warnings Replacement ...... 5-36 DIC Warnings and Wiper Fuses ...... 5-88 Messages ...... 3-50 Wipers ...... 3-8 Hazard Warning Flashers .... 3-5 Winter Driving ...... 4-13 Safety and Symbols ...... iii Wipers Wheels Rear Washer ...... 3-9 Alignment and Tire Wiring, High Voltage Balance ...... 5-55 Devices ...... 5-87 Different Size ...... 5-53 Replacement ...... 5-55 When It Is Time for X New Tires ...... 5-51 XM Radio Messages ...... 3-96 Where to Put the Child Restraint ...... 1-32 Y Windows ...... 2-14 Your Vehicle and the Power ...... 2-14 Environment ...... 6-1 Windshield Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ...... 5-84 Replacement ...... 5-36